Chlouvānem/Morphology: Difference between revisions

From Linguifex
Jump to navigation Jump to search
 
(994 intermediate revisions by 2 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
'''Chlouvānem''' is a highly inflected language with a synthetic morphology. Six parts of speech are traditionally distinguished: nouns, adjectives, verbs, pronouns, numerals, and particles.
'''Chlouvānem''' is a highly inflected language with a synthetic morphology. Five parts of speech are traditionally distinguished: nouns, verbs, pronouns, numerals, and particles. Throughout the page there will be references to the topics treated in the pages on [[Chlouvānem/Syntax|Chlouvānem syntax]], [[Chlouvānem/Positional and motion verbs|positional and motion verbs]], and [[Chlouvānem/Exterior and interior verbs|exterior and interior verbs]].
==Nouns - Halenī ==
{{Chlouvānem sidebar}}
==Nouns (''halenī'') ==
→ ''See [[Lahob languages#Morphology|Lahob languages § Morphology]] for diachronical tables and comparisons with sister languages.''<br/>
→ ''See also [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Noun_phrase|Chlouvānem syntax § Noun phrase]] for discussion of case usage.''


The [[Chlouvānem]] noun (''haloe'', pl. ''halenī'') is highly inflected: it declines for three numbers (singular, dual, plural), and eleven cases (direct, vocative, accusative, ergative, genitive, translative, exessive, essive, dative, ablative, and locative). Nouns also have grammatical gender, being divided in three classes (called ''dragon'', ''lotus'', and ''parrot'' based on nouns included in them<ref>Dragon is ''kaṃšūs'', lotus is ''yujam'', and parrot is ''geltah''.</ref>).
The [[Chlouvānem]] noun (''haloe'', pl. ''halenī'') is highly inflected - it declines for:

* Three numbers:
:: '''Singular''' (''emibausire smoḍūm'')
:: '''Dual''' (''danyausire smoḍūm'')
:: '''Plural''' (''tailyausire smoḍūm'')
* Twelve cases:

:: '''Direct''' (''daradhūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Vocative''' (''halausire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Accusative''' (''dṛṣokire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Ergative''' (''darinūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Genitive''' (''cārūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Translative''' (''najamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Exessive''' (''nanijamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Essive''' (''jalausire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Dative''' (''męlyausire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Ablative''' (''tųlunūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Locative''' (''yuñcūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Instrumental''' (''drausire dirūnnevya'')


There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. ''hærūm'' lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. ''chlouvānem'', which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to ''lila'' (person), e.g. ''chlouvānumi lila'' (a Chlouvānem).
There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. ''hærūm'' lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. ''chlǣvānem'', which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to ''lila'' (person), e.g. ''chlǣvānumi lila'' (a Chlouvānem).<br/>


===Gender===
Chlouvānem does not have grammatical gender, and there are only a few natural gender terms. There are thirteen different noun declensions, but most of them only have few small differences. Chlouvānem declensions are predictable from the ending of the direct case noun, and they're categorized depending on their endings as ''s-'', ''m-'', or ''h-nouns''<ref>These are the remnants of a former gender system present in Proto-Lahob, still evident in other Lahob languages; unlike others in the family, Chlouvānem did not become genderless because of losing gender marking on nouns, but because it lost concordance anywhere else.</ref>: inside these broad categories, different declensions are distinguished by the thematic vowel of the suffix: ''a'', ''u'', or ''i'' for ''s-'' and ''m-nouns'', and ''a'', ''e'', ''u'', ''i'' for ''h-nouns''.
Genders and declensions are dependent on the form of the noun. Due to the prevailing endings in direct case, ''dragon'' nouns are also called the ''s-class''; ''lotus'' nouns the ''m-class''; and ''parrot'' nouns the ''h-class'':


'''Dragon nouns (kaṃšūlñī halenī)''':
===S-nouns - Sasą lā halenī===
* '''1s''': nouns ending in ''-as'' or ''-ās'', as well as Eastern toponyms in ''-o''
There are some traits which are common to all nominal declensions: the vocative is only distinct in the singular; in the dual there is also no distinction between translative and dative, essive and locative, and between exessive, ablative, and instrumental. In the plural, the exessive and ablative also share the same form, as do the essive plural and the ergative dual.
* '''2s''': nouns ending in ''-us'' or ''-ūs''
{{col-begin}}
* '''3s''': nouns ending in ''-is'' or ''-īs''
{{col-break}}
* '''4s''': nouns ending in ''-oe''
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
'''Lotus nouns (yujamñī halenī)''':
|+1-s (-as, -ās)
* '''1m''': nouns ending in ''-am'', ''-em'', ''-ām'', ''-ėm'', or any vowel plus ''-n''
|-
* '''2m''': nouns ending in ''-um'' or ''-ūm''
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
* '''3m''': nouns ending in ''-im'' or ''-īm''
* '''4m''': nouns ending in ''-ai''
'''Parrot nouns (geltañī halenī)''':
* '''1h''': nouns ending in ''-a'', ''-ah'', ''-ā'', or ''-āh''
* '''2h''': nouns ending in ''-ė'' or ''-eh'' (plus some diminutives ending in ''-ėh'')
* '''3h''': nouns ending in ''-uh'' or ''-ūh'', and a few words of Dabuke origin in ''-u'' (mostly only used regionally in the West)
* '''4h''': nouns ending in ''-ih'' or ''-īh'' (plus a few exceptional ones in ''-i'')
* '''5h''': nouns ending in ''-a'' which have ablaut-conditioned variations in their stems in different cases
 
===Dragon nouns - Kaṃšūlñī halenī===
The first declension of dragon nouns is also the most common one for that gender. Like all other nominal declensions, the vocative is only distinct in the singular, and dual and plural have the same forms for translative, exessive, essive, dative, ablative, and locative.
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! 1s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 2s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 3s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 4s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''prātas'''<br/><small>''"wind"''</small> || rowspan=2 | prātāt || rowspan=2 | prāte
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || prātas <small>''"wind"''</small> || prātudi || prāte || || kældus <small>''"wax"''</small> || kældudi || kælduvī || || kumis <small>''"bamboo"''</small> || kumidi || kumiye || || haloe <small>''"name"''</small> || haloedi || halenī
! <small>Vocative</small>
| prātau
|-
|-
| '''Vocative''' || prātau || prātudi || prāte || || kældu || kældudi || kælduvī || || kumi || kumidi || kumiye || || haloe || haloedi || halenī
! <small>Accusative</small>
| prātu || prātāṣa || prataih
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || prātu || prātudau || prātānu || || kældau || kældudau || kældūnu || || kumiu || kumidau || kumiānu || || halenu || haloedau || halenænu
! <small>Ergative</small>
| prātei || prātāya || prātān
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || prāteṃs || prātudeni || prātān || || kældoṃs || kældudeni || kældān || || kumiei || kumideni || kumiān || || halenei || haloedeni || halenān
! <small>Genitive</small>
| prāti || prāteva || prātumi
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || prāti || prātudais || prātumi || || kældavi || kældudais || kældoumi || || kumieyi || kumideis || kumiumi || || halenies || haloedais || halenyumi
! <small>Translative</small>
| prātan || prātaus || prātāmān
|-
|-
| '''Translative''' || prātan || prātyoh || prātyoh || || kældun || kældyoh || kældyoh || || kumian || kumiyoh || kumiyoh || || halenan || halenyoh || halenyoh
! <small>Exessive</small>
| prātat || prātābhan || prātenīs
|-
|-
| '''Exessive''' || prātat || prātyās || prātyās || || kældut || kældyās || kældyās || || kumiæt || kumiyās || kumiyās || || halenat || halenyās || halenyās
! <small>Essive</small>
| prātą || prātigin || prātāya
|-
|-
| '''Essive''' || prātą || prātvin || prātvin || || kældęs || kældvin || kældvin || || kumiæs || kumivin || kumivin || || haleṃs || halemvin || halemvin
! <small>Dative</small>
| prātom || prātaus || prātasām
|-
|-
| '''Dative''' || prātui || prāteiti || prāteiti || || kældui || kældeiti || kældeiti || || kumiui || kumievuti || kumievuti || || halenui || haleneiti || haleneiti
! <small>Ablative</small>
| prātų || prātābhan || prātenīs
|-
|-
| '''Ablative''' || prātų || prātenīs || prātenīs || || kældų || kældunīs || kældunīs || || kumių || kumienīs || kumienīs || || halenų || haleninīs || haleninīs
! <small>Locative</small>
| prāte || prātigin || prātilīm
|-
|-
| '''Locative''' || prāte || prātilīm || prātilīm || || kælduve || kældilīm || kældilīm || || kumie || kumiælīm || kumiælīm || || halenive || haleṃlīm || haleṃlīm
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| prātap || prātābhan || prātenīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
===Lotus nouns - Yujamñī halenī===
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="wikitable"
|+2-s (-us, -ūs)
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! 1m !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 2m !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 3m !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 4m !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''haɂrus'''<br/><small>''"squid"''</small> || rowspan=2 | haɂrūt || rowspan=2 | haɂraus
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || yujam <small>''"lotus"''</small> || yujandi || yujye || || tūlum <small>''"worm"''</small> || tūlundi || tūluvye || || jāyim <small>''"girl"''</small> || jāyiñxi || jāyiñe || || lunai <small>''"tea"''</small> || lunaidi || lunāye
! <small>Vocative</small>
| haɂru
|-
|-
| '''Vocative''' || yujam || yujandi || yujye || || tūlu || tūlundi || tūluvye || || jāyī || jāyiñxi || jāyiñe || || lunai || lunaidi || lunāye
! <small>Accusative</small>
| haɂravu || haɂrūṣa || haɂravih
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || yujamu || yujandau || yujāmūn || || tūlau || tūlundau || tūlumūn || || jāyimu || jāyiñxau || jāyimin || || lunāyu || lunaidau || lunainū
! <small>Ergative</small>
| haɂrave || haɂrūya || haɂrūn
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || yujamei || yujandeni || yujamān || || tūluṃs || tūlundeni || tūlumān || || jāyimei || jāyiñxeni || jāyimān || || lunea || lunaideni || lunæyān
! <small>Genitive</small>
| haɂravi || haɂragva || haɂrǣmi
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || yujami || yujandais || yujammi || || tūlumvi || tūlundais || tūloumi || || jāyimi || jāyiñxeis || jāyiñumi || || lunayi || lunaidais || lunæyumi
! <small>Translative</small>
| haɂrun || haɂrugus || haɂromān
|-
|-
| '''Translative''' || yujaman || yujyoh || yujyoh || || tūluman || tūluvyoh || tūluvyoh || || jāyiman || jāyiñyoh || jāyiñyoh || || lunāyan || lunāyoh || lunāyoh
! <small>Exessive</small>
| haɂrut || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Exessive''' || yujamat || yujamyās || yujamyās || || tūlumat || tūlumyās || tūlumyās || || jāyimæt || jāyiñyās || jāyiñyās || || lunāyat || lunāyās || lunāyās
! <small>Essive</small>
| haɂrą || haɂrugin || haɂrūya
|-
|-
| '''Essive''' || yujamą || yujamvin || yujamvin || || tūlumą || tūlumvin || tūlumvin || || jāyimą || jāyimvin || jāyimvin || || lunąis || lunaivin || lunaivin
! <small>Dative</small>
| haɂravom || haɂrugus || haɂrusām
|-
|-
| '''Dative''' || yujamui || yujyeiti || yujyeiti || || tūlumui || tūluvyeiti || tūluvyeiti || || jāyimui || jāyimėti || jāyimėti || || lunāmui || lunāyeiti || lunāyeiti
! <small>Ablative</small>
| haɂrų || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Ablative''' || yujamų || yujamñis || yujamñis || || tūlumų || tūlumñis || tūlumñis || || jāyimų || jāyimñīs || jāyimñīs || || lunāyų || lunaiñīs || lunaiñīs
! <small>Locative</small>
| haɂrave || haɂrugin || haɂrulīm
|-
|-
| '''Locative''' || yujamñe || yujailīm || yujailīm || || tūlumñe || tuluilīm || tuluilīm || || jāyimñe || jāyælīm || jāyælīm || || lunaiñe || lunæyilīm || lunæyilīm
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| haɂrup || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīka<sup>1</sup>
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
===Parrot nouns - Geltañī halenī===
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="wikitable"
|+3-s (-is, -īs)
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! 1h !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 2h !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 3h !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 4h !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 5h !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ḍhogis'''<br/><small>''"monument"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ḍhogīt || rowspan=2 | ḍhogais
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || māra <small>''"mango"''</small> || māradi || mārai || || javilė <small>''"apple"''</small> || javiladi || javilei || || camūh <small>''"group"''</small> || camūdi || camūvai || || xamih <small>''"arrow"''</small> || xamīdi || xamīye || || lila <small>''"person"''</small> || lildi || leliė
! <small>Vocative</small>
| ḍhogi
|-
|-
| '''Vocative''' || māra || māradi || mārai || || javili || javiladi || javilei || || camū || camūdi || camūvai || || xamī || xamīdi || xamīye || || lila || lildi || leliė
! <small>Accusative</small>
| ḍhogayu || ḍhogīṣa || ḍhogaih
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || māru || māradau || mārānu || || javilu || javiladau || javilėnu || || camou || camūdau || camounu || || xamīyu || xamīdau || xameinu || || lilu || lildau || leliu
! <small>Ergative</small>
| ḍhogaye || ḍhogīya || ḍhogīn
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || mārei || māradeni || mārān || || javiliai || javiladeni || javilėn || || camūvei || camūdeni || camoun || || xamīyi || xamīdeni || xamein || || lilei || lildeni || leliei
! <small>Genitive</small>
| ḍhogayi || ḍhogajña || ḍhogyumi
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || māri || māradais || mārumi || || javili || javiladais || javilumi || || camūvi || camūdais || camūmi || || xamīyi || xamīdais || xamiūmi || || leli || lildais || laili
! <small>Translative</small>
| ḍhogin || ḍhogigus || ḍhogemān
|-
|-
| '''Translative''' || māran || māryāh || māryāh || || javilan || javilyāh || javilyāh || || camūn || camūyāh || camūyāh || || xamīn || xamīyāh || xamīyāh || || lilan || lelian || lelian
! <small>Exessive</small>
| ḍhogit || ḍhogebhan || ḍhogenīs
|-
|-
| '''Exessive''' || mārat || māryās || māryās || || javilet || javilyās || javilyās || || camūt || camūyās || camūyās || || xamīt || xamīyās || xamīyās || || lilat || leliat || leliat
! <small>Essive</small>
| ḍhogę || ḍhogigin || ḍhogīya
|-
|-
| '''Essive''' || māręs || mārvin || mārvin || || javilęs || javilein || javilein || || camųs || camūvin || camūvin || || xamįs || xamīvin || xamīvin || || liląs || lailąs || lailąs
! <small>Dative</small>
| ḍhogayom || ḍhogigus || ḍhogisām
|-
|-
| '''Dative''' || mārui || mārauti || mārauti || || javilui || javiliauti || javiliauti || || camvui || camvauti || camvauti || || xamiui || xamiauti || xamiauti || || lilui || leliui || leliui
! <small>Ablative</small>
| ḍhogyų || ḍhogebhan || ḍhogenīs
|-
|-
| '''Ablative''' || mārų || mārenīs || mārenīs || || javilių || javilenīs || javilenīs || || camųu || camūnīs || camūnīs || || xamių || xamīnīs || xamīnīs || || lilų || lelių || lelių
! <small>Locative</small>
| ḍhogaye || ḍhogigin || ḍhogilīm
|-
|-
| '''Locative''' || māre || mārilīm || mārilīm || || javiliye || javililīm || javililīm || || camve || camuilīm || camuilīm || || xamie || xamīlīm || xamīlīm || || lile || laile || laile
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| ḍhogip || ḍhogebhan || ḍhoginīka
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
# The ending is ''-unīs/-unīka''; the '''n''' → '''ṇ''' shift is a case of regular saṃdhi.
Also note that modern borrowings ending in [s] typically add a further case ending, e.g. Skyrdagor ''valtasz'' (nunatak) becomes Chlouvānem ''valtasas'' (same meaning), declining as ''valtasau'', ''valtasu'', ''valtasei''...


==Adjectives and adverbs==
===M-nouns - Mamą lā halenī===
Adjectives, in Chlouvānem, are actually a subset of nouns which have different forms depending on gender. They can function as attributes to nouns, but they can also be used without any noun, usually replacing it (and taking its gender) as a means of anaphora. If they are related to people, they take parrot gender: the common explanation is that they stand for <small>ADJ.</small> + ''lila'' (person).<br/>
{{col-begin}}
Adjectives decline much like nouns, except for a few small differences. Their dragon gender form, direct case, singular number, is the citation form.
{{col-break}}
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
=== Dragon gender (kaṃšūlñis) ===
|+1-m (-am, -ām)
There are three main adjectival declensions: '''-as''', '''-us''', and '''-is'''; a small subset of '''-es''' adjectives (mainly ordinal numbers) follows the '''-is''' pattern except for plural direct and vocative (having ''-eye'' instead of ''-ī'') and having ''-e'' as a thematic vowel instead of ''-i'' before endings.<br>
|-
Translative, exessive, essive, dative, ablative, and locative forms are exactly the same as for nouns. Forms that are different from the nominal declensions are in '''bold''':
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! 1s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 2s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 3s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''yujam'''<br/><small>''"lotus"''</small> || rowspan=2 | yujivā || rowspan=2 | yujāk
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || prātūkas <small>''"windy"''</small> || '''prātūkadi''' || prātūke || || mālthus <small>''"last"''</small> || mālthudi || mālthuvī || || tarlausis <small>''"scientific"''</small> || tarlausidi || '''tarlausī'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
| yujā
|-
|-
| '''Vocative''' || '''prātūka''' || '''prātūkadi''' || prātūke || || mālthu || mālthudi || mālthuvī || || tarlausi || tarlausidi || '''tarlausī'''
! <small>Accusative</small>
| yujamu || yujmes || yujmaih
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || prātūku || '''prātūkadu''' || prātūkānu || || mālthau || mālthudau || mālthūnu || || tarlausiu || tarlausidau || tarlausiānu
! <small>Ergative</small>
| yujmæ || yujmyan || yujamūn
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || '''prātūkai''' || '''prātūkaden''' || prātūkān || || mālthoṃs || mālthudeni || mālthān || || tarlausiei || tarlausideni || tarlausiān
! <small>Genitive</small>
| yujami || yujmeva || yujaṃrān
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || '''prātūkuyi''' ||  '''prātūkadais''' || prātūkumi || || '''mālthuyi''' || mālthudais || '''mālthūmi''' || || '''tarlausiai''' || tarlausideis || '''tarlausieis'''
! <small>Translative</small>
|}
| yujaman || yujmį || yujamān
=== Lotus gender (yujamñis) ===
Lotus gender adjectives follow the same patterns as dragon ones — their endings are '''-am''', '''-um''', '''-im''' ('''-em''').
Differences in bold are from lotus gender nouns.
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! 1m !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 2m !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 3m !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Exessive</small>
| yujamat || yujabhan || yujmenīs
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || prātūkam <small>''"windy"''</small> || prātūkandi || '''prātūkeñe''' || || mālthum <small>''"last"''</small> || mālthundi || mālthuvye || || tarlausim <small>''"scientific"''</small> || tarlausiñxi || tarlausiñe
! <small>Essive</small>
| yujmą || yujmenne || yujmyan
|-
|-
| '''Vocative''' || prātūkam || prātūkandi || '''prātūkeñe''' || || mālthu || mālthundi || mālthuvye || || tarlausi || tarlausiñxi || tarlausiñe
! <small>Dative</small>
| yujamom || yujmį || yujaṃsām
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || prātūkamu || '''prātūkandu''' || '''prātūkūnu''' || || mālthau || mālthundau || mālthumūn || || tarlausimu || tarlausiñxau || tarlausimān
! <small>Ablative</small>
| yujamų || yujabhan || yujmenīs
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || '''prātūkemei''' || '''prātūkanden''' || '''prātūkūnen''' || || mālthuṃs || mālthundeni || mālthumān || || tarlausimei || tarlausiñxeni || tarlausimān
! <small>Locative</small>
| yujaṃrye || yujmenne || yujmilīm
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || '''prātūkañi''' || prātūkandais || prātūkumi || || '''mālthuñi''' || mālthundais || mālthoumi || || '''tarlauseñi''' || tarlausiñxeis || '''tarlausemñi'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| yujamap || yujabhan || yujaṃrīka
|}
|}
=== Parrot gender (geltañis) ===
{{col-break}}
Parrot gender adjectives, unlike the other two genders, do not have the ''-e-'' subdeclension, having '''-ah''', '''-uh''', and '''-eh''' as its three declensional endings (''-is''/''-es'' and ''-im''/''-em'' all correspond to ''-eh'').
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
Differences in bold are from parrot gender nouns.
|+2-m (-um, -ūm)
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! 1s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 2s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! 3s !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || prātūkah <small>''"windy"''</small> || prātūkadi || '''prātūkæh''' || || mālthuh <small>''"last"''</small> || mālthudi || mālthuvai || || tarlauseh <small>''"scientific"''</small> || tarlausadi || tarlausei
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''tūlum'''<br/><small>''"worm"''</small> || rowspan=2 | tūlvivā || rowspan=2 | tūlūk
|-
|-
| '''Vocative''' || prātūka || prātūkadi || '''prātūkæh''' || || mālthu || mālthudi || mālthuvai || || tarlausi || tarlausadi || tarlausei
! <small>Vocative</small>
| tūlve
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || prātūku || prātūkadau || '''prātūkaun''' || || mālthou || mālthudau || mālthounu || || tarlausu || tarlausadau || tarlausėnu
! <small>Accusative</small>
| tūlumu || tūlves || tūluyih
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || prātūkei || '''prātūkaden''' || '''prātūkæn''' || || '''mālthuve''' || mālthudeni || mālthoun || || tarlausiai || tarlausaeni || tarlausėn
! <small>Ergative</small>
| tūluga || tūlvyan || tūlumūn
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || prātūki || prātūkadais || prātūkumi || || mālthuvi || mālthudais || mālthumi || || '''tarlauseah''' || '''tarlausadæs''' || tarlausumi
! <small>Genitive</small>
|}
| tūlumi || tūlveva || tūluṃrān
===Irregular adjectives===
"Irregular" adjectives are a closed group of words that have their own declensional paradigm. They are all declined for gender (though only in direct, vocative, accusative, ergative, and genitive) but ''not'' for number. Unlike other adjectives, the citation form is the ''parrot gender'' and not the dragon; they end in ''-iā'' or ''-i'' in parrot direct, ''-em'' (rarely ''-im'' or ''-am'') in lotus direct, and ''-es'' (rarely ''-as'') in dragon direct.<br/>
These words are:
* The possessives: '''''liliā''''' - ''lilem'' - ''liles'' (my, mine), '''''sāmiā''''' - ''sāmim'' - ''sāmes'' (your(s) (sg)), '''''tamiā''''' - ''tamim'' - ''tames'' (his, her(s), its), '''''meyā''''' - ''meyem'' - ''meyes'' (our(s)), '''''negā''''' - ''negem'' - ''neges'' (your(s) (pl)), '''''tašñā''''' - ''tašñem'' - ''tašñes'' (their(s))
* The Classical/modern demonstratives: '''''nenė''''' - ''nenayem'' - ''nenayes'' (proximal), '''''nunū''''' - ''numvem'' - ''numves'' (medial), '''''nanā''''' - ''nanām'' - ''nanās'' (distal)
* The archaic demonstratives: '''''ami''''' - ''em'' - ''es'' (proximal), '''''uteni''''' - ''utam'' - ''utas'' (medial), '''''āteni''''' - ''ātam'' - ''ātas'' (distal)
* All compounds with one of these (most commonly ''ami'').
 
Their main declensional paradigm is the same for all except the parrot forms of ''nenė'' and ''nunū''. Note that ''ami'', ''uteni'' and ''āteni'' keep the palatalization also in the locative case (e.g. ''amiea'').<br/>
Only the first five cases are present for dragon and lotus genders, as the other forms are the same as in the parrot one. ''liliā'' is used as example here:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Case !! Parrot !! Lotus !! Dragon
! <small>Translative</small>
| tūluman || tūlvį || tūlumān
|-
|-
| Direct<br/>Vocative || '''liliā''' || '''lilem''' || '''liles'''
! <small>Exessive</small>
| tūlumat || tūlubhan || tūlvenīs
|-
|-
| Accusative || liliau || lilemu || lileṣu
! <small>Essive</small>
| tūlų || tūlunne || tūlvyan
|-
|-
| Ergative || lilie || lilemie || lilesie
! <small>Dative</small>
| tūlumom || tūlvį || tūluṃsām
|-
|-
| Genitive || liliai || lilemñi || lilesiai
! <small>Ablative</small>
| tūlumų || tūlubhan || tūlvenīs
|-
|-
| Translative || liliān ||  ||  
! <small>Locative</small>
| tūluṃrye || tūlunne || tūlulīm
|-
|-
| Exessive || liliāt || ||  
! <small>Instrumental</small>
|-
| tūlumap || tūlubhan || tūluṃrīka
| Essive || liliąa ||  ||  
|}
|-
{{col-break}}
| Dative || liliåh ||  ||
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+3-m (-im, -īm)
|-
|-
| Ablative || liliąu ||  ||
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| Locative || lilea || ||  
! <small>Direct</small>
|}
| '''jāyim'''<br/><small>''"girl"''</small> || rowspan=2 | jāyīvā || rowspan=2 | jāyīk
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Case !! Parrot !! Parrot
! <small>Vocative</small>
| jāyī
|-
|-
| Direct<br/>Vocative || '''nenė''' || '''nunū'''
! <small>Accusative</small>
| jāyimu || jājñes<sup>1</sup> || jāyīh
|-
|-
| Accusative || nenæyu || nunūyu
! <small>Ergative</small>
| jājña<sup>1</sup> || jāyiyan || jāyimūn
|-
|-
| Ergative || nenæye || nunūye
! <small>Genitive</small>
| jāyimi || jājñeva<sup>1</sup> || jāyiṃran
|-
|-
| Genitive || neniai || nunūyai
! <small>Translative</small>
| jāyiman || jāyį || jāyimān
|-
|-
| Translative || nenėn || nunūn
! <small>Exessive</small>
| jāyimat || jāyibhan || jājñenīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
| Exessive || nenėt || nunūt
! <small>Essive</small>
| jāyį || jāyinne || jāyiyan
|-
|-
| Essive || nenęe || nunųu
! <small>Dative</small>
| jāyimom || jāyį || jāyiṃsam
|-
|-
| Dative || neneah || nunouh
! <small>Ablative</small>
| jāyimų || jāyibhan || jājñenīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
| Ablative || nenėhu || nunūvu
! <small>Locative</small>
| jāyiṃrye || jāyinne || jāyilīm
|-
|-
| Locative || nenėhea || nunūvea
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| jāyimap || jāyibhan || jāyiṃrīka
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
{
Table notes:
# Such forms with ''-jñ-'' are underlyingly ''-y-y-'' (e.g. ''jāy-y-es'' → ''jājñes'').


===Adverbs===
===H-nouns - Hahą lā halenī===
Adjectives are turned into adverbs by removing the ending (-as/us/is/es) and adding '''-ęe''' (''-nęe'' after vowel-final stems). Thus:
{{col-begin}}
* ''tarlausis'' (scientific) → ''tarlausęe'' (scientifically, according to science)
{{col-break}}
* ''namęliausis'' (stakanovist) → ''namęliausęe'' (continuously; without any break)
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
* ''prātūkas'' (windy) → ''prātūkęe'' (windy; like the wind)
|+1-h (-a, -ā, (-ah, -āh), -o<sup>1</sup>)
 
A few ''-us'' adjectives keep the ''-u-'' (and thus add ''-nęe''):
* ''mālthus'' (last) → ''mālthunęe'' ((as) last; at last, finally)
 
There are also some irregular adverbs, made from other speech parts:
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlære'' (easily) (but note its synonym ''chlærausęe'' from the related adjective ''chlærausis'' (easy))
 
====Underived adverbs====
Some adverbs are not derived from any other part of speech. They include:
* All adverbial correlatives;
* ''flære'' (yesterday), ''amyære'' (today), and ''menire'' (tomorrow)
* Some adverbs formed by onomatopoeia or sound symbolism (and usually reduplicated) like ''rarāre'' (roaring) or ''tanetane'' (barefoot).
 
===Undeclinable adjectives===
A few common words may be used attributively just like adjectives, but they do not decline. Most of them end in either ''-a'' or ''-i'':
* ''cami'' - great, large (figurative), important
* ''lalla'' - high, higher, next
* ''chāra'' - good (and ''chloucæm'' (better))
* ''taili'' - many, much
* ''nanū'' - more
* ''kaili'' - most
* ''ṣūbha'' - few, little
* ''lьvyamna'' - far, distant
* ''yamei'' - "honorific" adjective
Note that ''cami'', ''taili'', and ''kaili'', in some (but not all) Archaic Chlouvānem texts, have a singular-only declension based on the irregular one of ''ami - em - es''. Most probably this was an analogic feature of a few pre-Classical standardization Chlouvānem dialects of 2000 years ago.
 
===Comparatives and superlatives===
There are two methods for building comparatives and superlatives: a synthetic and an analytic one. Synthetic comparatives, except for a few irregular forms, are extremely rare in spoken Chlouvānem and only used in very formal written language. Adjectives that either refer to the presence or absence of a quality do not have comparatives or superlatives, nor does the "honorific adjective" ''yamei''.
 
Analytic comparatives are made by using either '''nanū''' (more) or '''ovet''' (less) in front of the adjective; the compared term is in accusative case and followed by the comparative particle '''en'''; the superlative is formed by using '''yaivu en''' (than all) as the compared term.
Adverbs use the same method (e.g. ''chlære'' (easily) → ''nanū chlære'' → ''yaivu en nanū chlære''), but "than all" in superlatives is usually omitted, therefore they use ''nanū'' also with a superlative meaning.
 
Synthetic comparatives are formed with the suffix '''-apus''' (for ''-as'' and ''-us'' adjectives) or '''-epus''' (for ''-is'' adjectives). The compared term is always accusative + ''en'':
* ''prātūkas'' (windy) → ''prātūkapus'' (windier)
* ''kurgus'' (noisy) → ''kurgapus'' (noisier)
* ''chlærausis'' (easy) → ''chlærausepus'' (easier)
 
Synthetic superlatives use '''-ækṣasis''' (for ''-as'' adjectives) or '''-īkṣasis''' (for ''-us'' and ''-is'' adjectives):
* ''prātūkas'' → ''prātūkækṣasis'' (the windiest)
* ''kurgus'' → ''kurgīkṣasis'' (the noisiest)
* ''chlærausis'' → ''chlærausīkṣasis'' (the easiest)
 
Synthetic comparatives and superlatives for adverbs use respectively '''-ven''' and '''-eten''':
* ''chlærausęe'' (easily) → ''chlærausiven'' (more easily) → ''chlærauseten'' (most easily)
 
====Irregular forms====
There are seven irregular adjectives which are only used with the synthetic comparatives, all irregularly formed:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Positive !! Comparative !! Superlative
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| ''ñikas'' (small) || ''isis'' (smaller) || ''iñekṣis'' (smallest)
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''māra'''<br/><small>''"mango"''</small> || rowspan=2 | mārāt || rowspan=2 | mārai
|-
|-
| ''ṣubha'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (few, little) || ''isis'' (fewer, less) || ''iñekṣis'' (fewest, least)
! <small>Vocative</small>
| māre
|-
|-
| ''spragnyas'' (large) || ''samvaris'' (larger) || ''sasprāsis'' (largest)
! <small>Accusative</small>
| māru || mārāṣa || māraih
|-
|-
| ''garpas'' (bad) || ''grašcasis'' (worse) || ''gugārasis'' (worst)
! <small>Ergative</small>
| mārei || mārāra || mārān
|-
|-
| ''chāra'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (good) || ''chloucæm'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (better) || ''chloucækṣis'' (best)
! <small>Genitive</small>
| māri<sup>2</sup> || māreva || mārumi
|-
|-
| ''lьvyamna'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (far) || ''liādas'' (farther, further) || ''lilьvaisis'' (farthest, furthest)
! <small>Translative</small>
| māran || mārarį || māremān
|-
|-
| ''taili'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (many, much) || ''nanū'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (more) || ''kaili'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (most)
! <small>Exessive</small>
|}
| mārat || mārabhan || mārenīs
 
In addition to these, the other two indeclinable adjectives ''cami'' and ''lalla'' have only the analytic forms ''(yaivu en) nanū cami''/''lalla''.
 
==Verbs - Daradhūvī==
The Chlouvānem verb (''daradhūs'', pl. ''daradhūvī'') is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.
 
The first and most important division we can find in Chlouvānem verbs is the distinction between '''exterior '''(''kauyāva'') and '''interior''' (''nañyāva'') verbs. This may at first seem a voice system, but it must be distinguished from the true voices in Chlouvānem conjugation. The difference between them is mostly lexical: native grammarians distinguish exterior verbs as describing "activities or states that involve interactions with outside the self", and interior verbs as affecting principally the self. Exterior verbs are those we could most easily compare to active verbs in English, while interior verbs are a somewhat "catch-all" category including many distinct meanings, most notably middle-voice, reflexive and reciprocal ones, but also all adjectival verbs as well as peculiar and somewhat independent meanings for some verbs. Many verbs can be conjugated both as exterior and as interior and they often have differences in meaning - e.g. ''gṇyauke ''means “to give birth” when exterior and “to be born” when interior.
 
Potentially every Chlouvānem verb, no matter if exterior or interior, has a '''causative''' conjugation which is considered an inflection and not a derivation, even if the meanings may vary: ''mišake'' is an extreme example as each form has a different meaning (with particularly interior forms having many meanings) - non-causative exterior ''mešu'' "I am seen", interior ''meširu'' "I know; I see myself"; and causative exterior ''maišaxhā'' "I am shown", interior ''maiširxhā'' "I learn; I show myself <small>(trans.)</small>".
 
Chlouvānem verbs also conjugate for seven '''voices''', each one putting one of seven different core elements as the ''direct-case argument'', usually for means of topicalization or definiteness; they reflect the Austronesian-type morphosyntactical alignment of the language. The seven voices are, for exterior verbs:
* '''patient-trigger '''or ''patientive ''(unmarked);
* '''agent-trigger '''or ''agentive'' (transitive and ditransitive verbs only);
* '''benefactive-trigger '''or simply ''benefactive'';
* '''antibenefactive-trigger '''or simply ''antibenefactive'';
* '''locative-trigger '''or simply ''locative'';
* '''dative-trigger''' or simply ''dative'' (mostly ditransitive verbs);
* '''instrumental-trigger''' or simply ''instrumental'' (morphologically possible for all verbs, but not always meaningful).
Interior verbs only have six voices, as they do not have an agentive voice; the patientive, unmarked voice, is here called '''common voice'''.
 
Chlouvānem verbs also conjugate for four different '''tense-aspect combinations''' (simply ''tenses''): the '''present''' and '''future''', both imperfective, and '''past''' and '''perfect''', both perfective; other distinctions may be built periphrastically (most notably ''imperfect'', ''pluperfect'' and ''future perfect''). Tenses are the “basic unit” verbs conjugate in: all tenses conjugate for nine persons (1st-2nd-3rd in singular, dual and plural; note though that 3rd singular and 3rd plural are identical in the perfect). Note that some moods do only distinguish between imperfective and perfective aspect.
 
Some pronouns [[Chlouvānem#Personal pronouns|have a clitic form]] in accusative and ergative case which may be added to specify other arguments - e.g. ''mešėça'' "he sees" + ''-æl'' (clitic 1sg acc.) > ''mešėçæl'' "he sees me" - equivalent to ''læl mešėça''.
 
However, the most complex part of Chlouvānem verbs is the '''mood'''. Chlouvānem is particularly mood-heavy and its concept of mood is quite broad, conjugating verbs in what are called '''primary moods '''and '''secondary moods'''; a single verb form may have a single primary mood but up to two secondary moods. 
 
The ten primary moods are:
* '''indicative''' - the realis mood;
* '''imperative''' - used for giving orders or commands;
* '''desiderative''' - used to express a desire or will (e.g. I want to X);
* '''necessitative''' - used to express need or obligation (e.g. I have to X);
* '''potential''' - used to express the ability to do something (e.g. I can [= am able to] X)
* '''permissive''' - used to express the permission to do something (e.g. I can [= I’m allowed to] X)
* '''optative '''- used to express wishes or hopes;
* '''propositive '''- used to express proposals (e.g. let’s X; why don’t you X);
* '''hypothetical '''- used to express things that may happen or might have happened;
* '''subjunctive '''- used to express general advices (jussive use), purpose (supine use), and also syntactically conditioned by some particles.
The eight secondary moods are:
* five of them express '''evidentiality''', namely: certainty (also '''energetic mood'''), deduction, dream, specifically invented situation, and hearsay (also '''inferential mood''');
* '''interrogative''', used for questions;
* two '''consequential moods''': one expressing ''cause'' (e.g. “because X”), the other ''opposition'' (e.g. “although X”).
Chlouvānem verbs also have a '''non-finite form '''(the '''-ke''' form, called '''infinitive''' hereafter) as well as a large number of '''attributive''' and '''adverbial participles''', with forms for most voices and tenses and a distinction into '''modal adverbs''', '''homofocal gerundives''' and '''heterofocal gerundives'''.
 
===Verb classes and infinitive===
Verbs, in Chlouvānem, are conjugated depending on ''verb classes'' or ''conjugations''. There are five main patterns:
* '''a-root''', or '''thematic''': the most basic and regular, formed by adding '''a''' to the root before non-vocalic endings.
* '''Athematic''': as above, without '''a'''; endings are added directly to the root.
* '''Ablauting root''': formed by the root with ablaut changes in its main vowel, plus '''a''' before non-vocalic endings.
** '''Athematic ablauting root''': a small subset conjugating as above, but without '''a'''.
* '''nā/nī verbs''': verbs which add '''nā''' ('''na''' in some forms) or '''nī''', or nothing, to the root depending on form.
* '''ah verbs''': verbs which add '''-ah''' (or its allomorphs '''-ar''', '''-aš''', '''-ą''') to the root.
 
A sixth commonly recognized pattern is '''ru verbs'''. These are verbs formed by borrowed verb roots from Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi (where verbal nouns end in ''-ru'') and in the present and past undergo stem modifications like in that language. There are few common -ru verbs, and in usual speech they are often substituted by compounds with their root and either ''dṛke'' (to do) or ''jānake'' (to feel (physical)) or ''gyake'' (to be), as in ''pāṭṭaruke'' vs. ''pāṭṭarudṛke''. (to study).
 
Moods apart from the indicative mainly just follow root structure, with different allomorphs depending on whether the root ends in a consonant or in a vowel.
 
There are, in addition to these, a few particular verb types with either some kind of suffix added to the root in some forms, or irregular ablaut, or totally irregular (usually suppletive). The majority of verbs, anyway, is either ''thematic'' or ''thematic ablauting'', and the majority of roots end in one or two consonants.
 
The '''infinitive''' or ''ke-form'' is a non-finite form used in certain construction (like with certain verbs (e.g. ''daudike'' (to want)) or particles). It is also the citation form, and it is simple to recognize and form:
* The infinitive is always based on the root, thus with either a basic-grade vowel for ablauting verbs or an unreduced sequence for inverse-ablauting ones.
* Verbs in the ''thematic'' or ''ablauting root'' classes add '''-ake'''; ''nā/nī verbs'' add '''-nāke''';
* All other verbs just add '''-ke'''. There are a few cases where this is not always how it surfaces:
** verbs ending in a palatalized consonant have an epenthetic ''-i-'' (e.g. ''męlь-ke'' → ''męlike'' (to give));
** verbs whose roots end in any single or postnasal unvoiced dental, retroflex, or palatal stop or affricate, assimilate the ''-k-'' of the suffix (e.g. ''kit-ke'' → ''kitte'' (to put, place));
** verbs whose roots end in any single or postnasal voiced, non-velar stop, assimilate the voicing of the suffix ''-k-'' (e.g. ''dįb-ke'' → ''dįbge'' (to kick));
** verbs whose roots end in single ''-g'' or ''-gh'' assimilate the ''-k-'', with the regular saṃdhi change from double voiced stop to nasal + voiced stop (e.g. ''dig-ke'' → ''dilge'' (to pour));
** verbs whose roots end in any other consonant cluster only add ''-e'' (e.g. ''pugl-ke'' → ''pugle'' (to sleep)).
 
===Present indicative===
====Regular====
The regular present indicative has a distinct form for all verb types.<br/>Ablauting verbs have ''middle grade'' ablaut in all exterior forms and in the singular interior ones.<br/>nā/nī verbs have ''-nā'' in singular and plural and ''-nī'' in the dual. ru verbs change ''-ru'' with ''-su''.<br/>
Exterior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press"<br/>(a-root) !! halke "to call"<br/>(athem.) !! mišake "to see"<br/>(ablaut) !! khlunāke "to search, look for"<br/>(nā/nī) !! lilke "to live"<br/>(ah) !! pāṭṭaruke "to study"<br/>(ru)
! <small>Essive</small>
| māręs || māranne || mārāra
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''u''' || hal'''u''' || meš'''u''' || khlu'''nau''' || lil'''ah''' || pāṭṭa'''sū'''
! <small>Dative</small>
| mārom || mārarį || māresām
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''i''' || hal'''i''' || meš'''i''' || khlu'''nādi''' || lil'''aši''' || pāṭṭa'''sui'''
! <small>Ablative</small>
| mārų || mārabhan || mārenīs
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''ė''' || hal'''ė''' || meš'''ė''' || khlu'''nā''' || lil'''ah''' || pāṭṭa'''suvė'''
! <small>Locative</small>
| māre || māranne || mārelīm
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''odām''' || hal'''dām''' || meš'''odām''' || khlu'''nīdām''' || lil'''ardām''' || pāṭṭa'''sudām'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
|-
| mārap || mārabhan || mārenīka
| 2DU || nāmv'''odās''' || hal'''dās''' || meš'''odās''' || khlu'''nīdās''' || lil'''ardās''' || pāṭṭa'''sudās'''
|}
|-
{{col-break}}
| 3DU || nāmv'''odāvo''' || hal'''dāvo''' || meš'''odāvo''' || khlu'''nīdāvo''' || lil'''ardāvo''' || pāṭṭa'''sudāvo'''
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+2-h (-ē, -eh, -ǣh<sup>3</sup>)
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''amui''' || hal'''mui''' || meš'''amui''' || khlu'''nāmui''' || lil'''ąmui''' || pāṭṭa'''sumui'''
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''akui''' || hal'''kui''' || meš'''akui''' || khlu'''nākui''' || lil'''ąkui''' || pāṭṭa'''sukui'''
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''javileh'''<br/><small>''"apple"''</small> || rowspan=2 | javilyāt || rowspan=2 | javilyai
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''yąt''' || hal'''yąt''' || meš'''yąt''' || khlu'''nāyąt''' || lil'''ašąt''' || pāṭṭa'''suyąt'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
|}
| javilei
Interior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! dældake "to speak"<br/>(a-root) !! gṇyauke<ref>This verb has allomorphic stem variation between preconsonantal ''gṇyau'' and prevocalic ''gṇyāv''</ref> "to be born"<br/>(athem.) !! tṛlake "to know"<br/>(ablaut) !! chleināke "to smile"<br/>(nā/nī) !! hañilke "to remember"<br/>(ah) !! kūmeruke "to be embarassed"<br/>(ru)
! <small>Accusative</small>
| javilyu || javilēṣa || javileih
|-
|-
| 1SG || dæld'''iru''' || gṇyāv'''iru''' || tarl'''iru''' || chlei'''nairu''' || hañil'''ąiru''' || kūme'''suiru'''
! <small>Ergative</small>
| javilei || javilyāra || javilyān
|-
|-
| 2SG || dæld'''iris''' || gṇyāv'''iris''' || tarl'''iris''' || chlei'''nairis''' || hañil'''ąiris''' || kūme'''suiris'''
! <small>Genitive</small>
| javili || javileva<sup>4</sup> || javilyumi
|-
|-
| 3SG || dæld'''ire''' || gṇyāv'''ire''' || tarl'''ire''' || chlei'''naih''' || hañil'''ąire''' || kūme'''suire'''
! <small>Translative</small>
| javilen || javilerį || javilemān
|-
|-
| 1DU || dæld'''irdām''' || gṇyāv'''irdām''' || tṛl'''irdām''' || chlei'''nīrdām''' || hañil'''ęrdām''' || kūme'''suirdām'''
! <small>Exessive</small>
| javilet || javilebhan || javilenīs
|-
|-
| 2DU || dæld'''irdās''' || gṇyāv'''irdās''' || tṛl'''irdās''' || chlei'''nīrdās''' || hañil'''ęrdās''' || kūme'''suirdās'''
! <small>Essive</small>
| javilęs || javilenne || javilyāra
|-
|-
| 3DU || dæld'''irdāvo''' || gṇyāv'''irdāvo''' || tṛl'''irdāvo''' || chlei'''nīrdāvo''' || hañil'''ęrdāvo''' || kūme'''suirdāvo'''
! <small>Dative</small>
| javilyom || javilerį || javilesām
|-
|-
| 1PL || dæld'''irmui''' || gṇyāv'''irmui''' || tṛl'''irmui''' || chlei'''nairmui''' || hañil'''ęrmui''' || kūme'''suirmui'''
! <small>Ablative</small>
| javilyų || javilebhan || javilenīs
|-
|-
| 2PL || dæld'''irkui''' || gṇyāv'''irkui''' || tṛl'''irkui''' || chlei'''nairkui''' || hañil'''ęrkui''' || kūme'''suirkui'''
! <small>Locative</small>
| javilye || javilenne || javilelīm
|-
|-
| 3PL || dæld'''irųt''' || gṇyāv'''irųt''' || tṛl'''irųt''' || chlei'''nairųt''' || hañil'''ęrųt''' || kūme'''suirųt'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| javilep || javilebhan || javilenīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
====Causative====
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
 
|+3-h (-uh, -ūh, -u<sup>5</sup>)
Causative forms are the same regardless of conjugation; they are formed basically with an extended stem with ''-(a)xh-''. Ablauting verbs always have the highest grade vowel, while inverse ablaut verbs have the "lowered" vowel in front of the normal stem.<br/>
All causative verbs have both exterior and interior forms.
Exterior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to make crush, press"<br/>(normal) !! mišake "to show"<br/>(ablaut) !! valde "to make open"<br/>(inverse ablaut)
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''axhā''' || maiš'''axhā''' || uvald'''axhā'''
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ñaɂuh'''<br/><small>''"fruit skin"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūt || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūvi
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''axhie''' || maiš'''axhie''' || uvald'''axhie'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
| ñaɂū
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''axhāt''' || maiš'''axhāt''' || uvald'''axhāt'''
! <small>Accusative</small>
| ñaɂunu || ñaɂūṣa || ñaɂuyih
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''anxhām''' || maiš'''anxhām''' || uvald'''anxhām'''
! <small>Ergative</small>
| ñaɂuyei || ñaɂura || ñaɂun
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''anxhās''' || maiš'''anxhās''' || uvald'''anxhās'''
! <small>Genitive</small>
| ñaɂuyi || ñaɂuva || ñaɂūmi
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''anxhū''' || maiš'''anxhū''' || uvald'''anxhū'''
! <small>Translative</small>
| ñaɂun || ñaɂurį || ñaɂumān
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''axhumi''' || maiš'''axhumi''' || uvald'''axhumi'''
! <small>Exessive</small>
| ñaɂut || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīs
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''axhuši''' || maiš'''axhuši''' || uvald'''axhuši'''
! <small>Essive</small>
| ñaɂųs || ñaɂunne || ñaɂura
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''axhįs''' || maiš'''axhįs''' || uvald'''axhįs'''
! <small>Dative</small>
|}
| ñaɂuvom || ñaɂurį || ñaɂusām
Interior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to make each other crush, press"<br/>(normal) !! mišake "to learn; to show each other"<br/>(ablaut) !! valde "to open; to make each other open"<br/>(inverse ablaut)
! <small>Ablative</small>
| ñaɂuvų || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīs
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''irxhā''' || maiš'''irxhā''' || uvald'''irxhā'''
! <small>Locative</small>
| ñaɂuve || ñaɂunne || ñaɂulīm
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''irxhie''' || maiš'''irxhie''' || uvald'''irxhie'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| ñaɂup || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīka
|}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+4-m (-ih, -īh, -i<sup>6</sup>)
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''irxhāt''' || maiš'''irxhāt''' || uvald'''irxhāt'''
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''irenxhām''' || maiš'''irenxhām''' || uvald'''irenxhām'''
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ghārṭih'''<br/><small>''"arrow"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ghārṭīt || rowspan=2 | ghārṭeyi
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''irenxhās''' || maiš'''irenxhās''' || uvald'''irenxhās'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
| ghārṭī
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''irenxhū''' || maiš'''irenxhū''' || uvald'''irenxhū'''
! <small>Accusative</small>
| ghārṭyu || ghārṭīṣa || ghārṭeyih
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''irxhumi''' || maiš'''irxhumi''' || uvald'''irxhumi'''
! <small>Ergative</small>
| ghārṭyei || ghārṭira || ghārṭin
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''irxhuši''' || maiš'''irxhuši''' || uvald'''irxhuši'''
! <small>Genitive</small>
| ghārṭīyi || ghārṭiva || ghārṭyumi
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''irxhįs''' || maiš'''irxhįs''' || uvald'''irxhįs'''
! <small>Translative</small>
|}
| ghārṭin || ghārṭirį || ghārṭimān
 
===Imperative===
====Regular====
The imperative is a defective paradigm, lacking all dual forms; it is formed from the bare root, so it is formed in the same way for all verbs.
 
Note that, due to the politeness system of Chlouvānem, the imperative is somewhat rare, as other methods are used. The first person imperative is an exception, being often used with the meaning “I/we must”.
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press”<br/>(exterior) !! dældake “to speak”<br/>(interior)
! <small>Exessive</small>
| ghārṭit || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīs
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''ikṣam''' || dæld'''ikuru'''
! <small>Essive</small>
| ghārṭįs || ghārṭinne || ghārṭira
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''ikṣa''' || dæld'''ikuh'''
! <small>Dative</small>
| ghārṭyom || ghārṭirį || ghārṭisām
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''ikṣai''' || dæld'''ikurė'''
! <small>Ablative</small>
| ghārṭyų || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīs
|-
|-
| 1DU || ||
! <small>Locative</small>
| ghārṭye || ghārṭinne || ghārṭilīm
|-
|-
| 2DU || ||
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| ghārṭip || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīka
|}
{{col-end}}
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+1-h (h-paradigm)
|-
|-
| 3DU || — || —
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''ikṣumi''' || dæld'''ikurum'''
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''raiṇah'''<br/><small>''"(piece of) cloth"''</small> || rowspan=2 | raiṇāt || rowspan=2 | raiṇai
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''ikṣus''' || dæld'''ikurus'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
| raiṇe
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''ikṣat''' || dæld'''ikurat'''
! <small>Accusative</small>
|}
| raiṇu || raiṇāṣa || raiṇaih
 
====Causative====
Causative forms follow the same pattern as non-causative ones, but the stem is the specifically causative one.
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to make crush, press"<br/>(exterior) !! mišake "to learn; to show each other"<br/>(interior)
! <small>Ergative</small>
| raiṇei || raiṇāra || raiṇān
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''axhiṣam''' || maiš'''axhiuru'''
! <small>Genitive</small>
| raiṇi<sup>2</sup> || raiṇeva || raiṇumi
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''axhiṣa''' || maiš'''axhiuh'''
! <small>Translative</small>
| raiṇan || raiṇarį || raiṇamān
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''axhiṣai''' || maiš'''axhiurė'''
! <small>Exessive</small>
| raiṇat || raiṇabhan || raiṇenīs
|-
|-
| 1DU || ||
! <small>Essive</small>
| raiṇęs || raiṇanne || raiṇāra
|-
|-
| 2DU || ||
! <small>Dative</small>
| raiṇom || raiṇarį || raiṇasām
|-
|-
| 3DU || ||
! <small>Ablative</small>
| raiṇų || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīs
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''axhiṣumi''' || maiš'''axhiurum'''
! <small>Locative</small>
| raiṇe || raiṇanne || raiṇalīm
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''axhiṣus''' || maiš'''axhiurus'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
|-
| raiṇap || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīka
| 3PL || nāmv'''axhiṣat''' || maiš'''axhiurat'''
|}
|}
{{col-break|valign=middle|gap=1em}}
The ''h-paradigm'' used by nouns in ''-ah'' and ''-āh'' is substantially identical to the regular 1-h one, except for the exessive, dative, ablative, locative, and instrumental plural which have ''-a-'' instead of ''-e-'' as a linking vowel and, for some nouns, the genitive singular ''(see table note 2)''.
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
# ''-o'' nouns are mostly toponyms of Toyubeshian origins; they decline like ''-a'' nouns, with their ending being treated as *-a-u, with the -a part of the stem; e.g. ''Paramito'', locative ''Paramitai'' (underlying form Paramit-a-e).
# ''-ya'', and ''-yā'' nouns form the genitive singular in ''-ei'' (e.g. ''lalyā'' "night" → ''lalei''). Nouns in ''-yah'', and ''-yāh'', however, have the regular ending (e.g. ''yamyah'' "fog" → ''yamyi'').
# All ''-ǣh'' nouns are of Lällshag origin, and are mostly toponyms (like ''Laikunanǣh''), with some exceptions like the two lunar days ''kælyaunænǣh'' and ''yeicapænǣh''. Note that such nouns have their genitive singular in ''-ǣyi'' and not in ''-ī''.
# In older texts ''-eiva'' (e.g. ''javileiva''), today only used in literature for an archaïzing effect or to mark a character speaking with a Northern Plain pronunciation (where this form survives in the spoken language).
# Mostly regional Western words of Dabuke origin.
# Non-productive with borrowings, but common in native words.


===Past Indicative===
===Special declensions===
====Regular====
{{col-begin}}
In the past indicative, -ah verbs are not distinguished as a conjugation, behaving instead like root verbs. -nā/nī verbs have no root extension in the singular exterior and interior, and -nā- in all other forms.<br/>
{{col-break}}
Ablauting verbs always have their base grade, except for inverse ablaut roots which use the reduced vowel, and plural interior forms.
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
Exterior forms:
|+Ablaut declension
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press"<br/>(a-root) !! halke "to call"<br/>(athem.) !! mišake "to see"<br/>(ablaut) !! khlunāke "to search, look for"<br/>(nā/nī)
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''au''' || hal'''au''' || miš'''au''' || khlu'''vau'''
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''lila'''<br/><small>''"person"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lilāt || rowspan=2 | lelyē
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''ei''' || hal'''ei''' || miš'''ei''' || khlu'''vei'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''itь''' || hal'''itь''' || miš'''itь''' || khlu'''tь'''
! <small>Accusative</small>
| lilu || lilāṣa || lelyu
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''ādram''' || hal'''ādram''' || miš'''ādram''' || khlu'''nādram'''
! <small>Ergative</small>
| lilei || lilāra || lelyei
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''ādras''' || hal'''ādras''' || miš'''ādras''' || khlu'''nādras'''
! <small>Genitive</small>
| leli || lileva || laili
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''ādru''' || hal'''ādru''' || miš'''ādru''' || khlu'''nādru'''
! <small>Translative</small>
| lilan || lilarį || lelyan
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''alīmi''' || hal'''līmi''' || miš'''alīmi''' || khlu'''nālīmi'''
! <small>Exessive</small>
| lilat || lilabhan || lelyat
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''alīši''' || hal'''līši''' || miš'''alīši''' || khlu'''nālīši'''
! <small>Essive</small>
| liląs || lilanne || lailąs
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''āli''' || hal'''āli''' || miš'''āli''' || khlu'''nāli'''
! <small>Dative</small>
|}
| lilom || lilarį || lelyom
 
Interior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! dældake "to speak"<br/>(a-root) !! gṇyauke "to be born"<br/>(athem.) !! tṛlake "to know"<br/>(ablaut) !! chleināke "to smile"<br/>(nā/nī)
! <small>Ablative</small>
| lilų || lilabhan || lelyų
|-
|-
| 1SG || dæld'''irau''' || gṇyāv'''irau''' || tṛl'''irau''' || chley'''irau'''
! <small>Locative</small>
| lile || lilanne || laile
|-
|-
| 2SG || dæld'''irei''' || gṇyāv'''irei''' || tṛl'''irei''' || chley'''irei'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
|-
| lilap || lilabhan || lelyap
| 3SG || dæld'''iritь''' || gṇyāv'''iritь''' || tṛl'''iritь''' || chley'''iritь'''
|}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+-oe declension
|-
|-
| 1DU || dæld'''eldram''' || gṇyāv'''eldram''' || tṛl'''eldram''' || chlei'''naildram'''
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| 2DU || dæld'''eldras''' || gṇyāv'''eldras''' || tṛl'''eldras''' || chlei'''naildras'''
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''haloe'''<br/><small>''"name"''</small> || rowspan=2 | halenāt || rowspan=2 | halenī
|-
|-
| 3DU || dæld'''eldru''' || gṇyāv'''eldru''' || tṛl'''eldru''' || chlei'''naildru'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
|-
|-
| 1PL || dæld'''ielīmi''' || gṇyāv'''yelīmi''' || tarl'''ielīmi''' || chlei'''nailīmi'''
! <small>Accusative</small>
| halenu || halenāṣa || halenaih
|-
|-
| 2PL || dæld'''ielīši''' || gṇyāv'''yelīši''' || tarl'''ielīši''' || chlei'''nailīši'''
! <small>Ergative</small>
| halenei || halenāya || halenān
|-
|-
| 3PL || dæld'''irāli''' || gṇyāv'''irāli''' || tarl'''irāli''' || chlei'''nairāli'''
! <small>Genitive</small>
|}
| haleni || halemva || haloemi
 
====Causative====
Causative forms use the same stems as in the present indicative.
Exterior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to make crush, press"<br/>(normal) !! mišake "to show"<br/>(ablaut) !! valde "to make open"<br/>(inverse ablaut)
! <small>Translative</small>
| halenan || halenaus || haloemān
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''axhlou''' || maiš'''axhlou''' || uvald'''axhlou'''
! <small>Exessive</small>
| halenat || haloebhan || haloenīs
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''axhei''' || maiš'''axhei''' || uvald'''axhei'''
! <small>Essive</small>
| halen || haloegin || halenāya
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''axhitь''' || maiš'''axhitь''' || uvald'''axhitь'''
! <small>Dative</small>
| halenom || halenaus || haloesām
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''axhādram''' || maiš'''axhādram''' || uvald'''axhādram'''
! <small>Ablative</small>
| halenų || haloebhan || haloenīs
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''axhādras''' || maiš'''axhādras''' || uvald'''axhādras'''
! <small>Locative</small>
| halenye || haloegin || halenilīm
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''axhādru''' || maiš'''axhādru''' || uvald'''axhādru'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| halenap || haloebhan || haloenīka
|}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+-ai declension
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''axhalīm''' || maiš'''axhalīm''' || uvald'''axhalīm'''
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''axhalīs''' || maiš'''axhalīs''' || uvald'''axhalīs'''
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''lunai'''<br/><small>''"tea"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lunaiva || rowspan=2 | lunāye
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''axhāli''' || maiš'''axhāli''' || uvald'''axhāli'''
! <small>Vocative</small>
|}
Interior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to make each other crush, press"<br/>(normal) !! mišake "to learn; to show each other"<br/>(ablaut) !! valde "to open; to make each other open"<br/>(inverse ablaut)
! <small>Accusative</small>
| lunāyu || lunāyes || lunāyaih
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''irxhlou''' || maiš'''irxhlou''' || uvald'''irxhlou'''
! <small>Ergative</small>
| lunǣ || lunāyēn || lunāyūn
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''irxhei''' || maiš'''irxhei''' || uvald'''irxhei'''
! <small>Genitive</small>
| lunāyi || lunaiva || lunāyān
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''irxhitь''' || maiš'''irxhitь''' || uvald'''irxhitь'''
! <small>Translative</small>
| lunain || lunāyį || lunaimān
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''irxhādram''' || maiš'''irxhādram''' || uvald'''irxhādram'''
! <small>Exessive</small>
| lunait || lunaibhan || lunǣnīs
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''irxhādras''' || maiš'''irxhādras''' || uvald'''irxhādras'''
! <small>Essive</small>
| lunąis || lunainne || lunāyēn
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''irxhādru''' || maiš'''irxhādru''' || uvald'''irxhādru'''
! <small>Dative</small>
| lunāyom || lunāyį || lunaisām
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''irxhalīm''' || maiš'''irxhalīm''' || uvald'''irxhalīm'''
! <small>Ablative</small>
| lunāyų || lunaibhan || lunǣnīs
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''irxhalīs''' || maiš'''irxhalīs''' || uvald'''irxhalīs'''
! <small>Locative</small>
| lunāye || lunainne || lunailīm
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''irxhāli''' || maiš'''irxhāli''' || uvald'''irxhāli'''
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| lunaip || lunaibhan || lunainīka
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
The ablaut declension is in the singular (except for the vocative and essive) and dual the same as the 1-h one, including the ''-ei'' rule for the genitive singular (e.g. ''rinya'' "ceiling", gen.sg. ''renei''), except for the fact that the genitive singular has a middle-grade vowel. The plural has mostly the same endings as the singular but with middle-grade vowels in most forms (genitive, essive, and locative have a higher-grade one). ''-y-'' is inserted between the stem and the ending, but not for nouns ending in ''-ya'' (''rinya'' → ''renyē'').<br/>
The vowel that undergoes ablaut is usually the penultimate (e.g. ''plušamila'' "Office of the Inquisition", plural ''plušamelyē''), but in some cases it's the first (e.g. ''kimeda'' (a type of panther), plural ''kemedyē'').
Hypocoristic forms of male names, which end in ''-em'' and are only used in the singular, are declined following a mix of the 1-m and 1-h patterns. In fact, they follow the 1-m pattern (the ''-am'' paradigm) except for the ergative (in ''-emei'' instead of *-(e)mæ) and the essive (in ''-ęs'' instead of *-(e)mą). For example the hypocoristicon ''Kælem'' has ergative ''Kælemei'' and essive ''Kælęs''.
===Singularia and pluralia tantum===
'''Pluralia tantum''' in Chlouvānem include the following words or categories of words:
# many collective nouns:

#: ''pārāk'' "hair", ''kāraṇḍhai'' "guts", ''yūgure'' "limbs", ''agṇyaucai'' "sons and daughters", ''vailašaus'' "cutlery", ''šūlyakāše'' "dishes"
# things that are heterogeneous in form but considered as a single entity:
#: ''katanai'' "clutter", ''dūḍhvai'' "banquet, buffet", ''vārṇaigīk'' (a type of sandals made from straw rope), ''ḍheṃlatiryai'' "streaming"<ref>The word ''latiryai'' is the plural of ''latirē'' (wave, ray), but this compound does not have a singular form.</ref>, ''ltælime'' "magic", ''ṣrūḍhais'' "savings", ''dāyārṣe'' "resin", ''ḍåtvāk'' "fat", ''tadmāltsāk'' "controller"
# certain actions and processes that involve multiple people:
#: ''vāgdilanai'' "elections", ''viṣlonai'' "protest, riot", ''jāṃrice'' "traffic jam", ''grembātatālunai'' "hide-and-seek" (sometimes also found as dual)
# nouns denoting certain time spans, festivals, or holidays:
#: ''saṃlallai'' "afternoon", ''Bhaivyāvāṣaryai'' (the most important Yunyalīlti festivity), ''Kūlħanarai'' (a winter festival of Kenengyry origin)
# a few illnesses and health conditions or disorders:
#: ''nirganai'' "urticaria", ''nañvai'' "autism", ''paṣadårbhai'' "influenza"
# some locations, including large delimited areas as well as many toponyms:
#: ''aryai'' "square", ''cahåtaibāk'' "tropics"
#: ''Rīkalīnai'', ''Mūnnakṣalte''
# all ethnonyms:
#: ''chlǣvānem'' "Chlouvānem", ''ṣurṭāgyai'' "Skyrdegan(s)", ''bronyai'' "Bronic(s)", ''sairghīṭyai'' "Cerian(s)", ''nivrahīrai'' "Nivarese"                                                 
A few nouns do not have a singular, but can have a dual and a plural form. Their citation form is usually the dual:
: ''maihadhūt'' "parents", ''grembātatālunāt'' "hide-and-seek" (most commonly a plurale tantum)
Counted among pluralia tantums are certain words which are not defective in number, but whose plural forms have an additional meaning alongside the one of the singular form, like in the following examples:
: ''hamvyenī'' "nursery" (''hamvyoe'' "cradle"), ''įsmirte'' "playground" (''įsmirtas'' "swing"), ''nacai'' "clothes" (''naca'' "cloth"), ''garaṇai'' "clock, watch" (''garaṇa'' "hour), ''lairusī'' "galaxy" (''lairē'' "sky, air"), ''ilēneyi'' "universe" (''ilēni'' "space, invisible sky").
Unlike ethnonyms, nouns formed with the suffix ''-yūs'', generally identifying a person from a certain city (e.g. ''līlasuṃghāṇyūs'', ''ajāɂilbādhyūs'') – but note ''yacvānyūs'' "Westerner" – are not pluralia tantum and have regularly-formed plurals (in ''-yaus'').
Some words are '''singularia tantum''':
# many collective nouns:
#: ''nūlastām'' "money", ''maula'' "breasts [pair of]", ''mæchlišam'' "leafy greens" (and particular types, e.g. ''mæcichā'' "spinach), ''bågras'' "legumes" (and particular types, e.g. ''dīlla'' "peas", ''mahīra'' "lentils"), ''lāsīm'' "cereals", ''båltis'' "free time"
# feelings and sensations:
#: ''lācāh'' "romantic love", ''læchlyoe'' "fun", ''ǣlna'' "sadness"
# nouns denoting certain uncountable things:
#: ''paɂeh'' "dust", ''kanai'' "spices", ''nāmvāvi'' "powder, dust made from crushing something", ''ḍolam'' "ice", ''narmis'' "ash"
# certain illnesses and health conditions:
#: ''badarauga'' "blue plague", ''kloppa'' "cough" (cf. pluralizable ''kloppukāram'' "a single instance of coughing"), ''nadirṣas'' "runny nose"
# proper nouns referring to certain concepts:
#: ''yunya'', ''lillamurḍhyā'', ''mulipenai'' "the Eastern Bloc's 'Internet'", ''tulbaiganim'' "the Eastern Bloc's 'Olympics'"
#: individual sports, such as ''tēyakaitsūh'', ''ḍaṣaras'', ''lairhiṃħa'', ''yalkhaitah''
#: cardinal points, ''pūrjayuñca'' "North", ''nalejñuñca'' "East"..., including relative ones such as ''smrāṇyuñca'' "upstream" or ''memājñuñca'' "downstream"
#: musical genres, such as ''laneika'', ''mūṃjas'', ''kerachomā'', ''tūnisus''
#: specialistic terminology made with suffixes and related to sciences (''-tarlā'', ''-nātra''), diseases (''-ræṣka'', ''-yūtam'', ''-ītsun'', ''-gulas''), and political/philosophical currents (''-nātra'', ''-lija'')
# Most toponyms:
#: ''Murkadhānāvi'' "the Inquisition", ''Kaiṣamā'', ''Ṣurṭāgah'' "Skyrdagor", ''Sairghīṭa'' "Ceria", ''Kuyugvajitava'' "Kŭyŭgwažtov"
===Irregular plurals===
A few Chlouvānem nouns have irregular plurals:
* The word ''chlǣvānem'' itself is plural-only (like all ethnonyms) and irregular; direct and vocative are in ''-em'', but all other cases decline as a standard plural 1h noun (e.g. accusative ''chlǣvānānu'', ergative ''chlǣvānān'', genitive ''chlǣvānumi'');
* ''hulineh'' "woman" has the suppletive plural ''hulūne'' "women", which is declined as a regular 1s declension noun.
* ''maila'' “water” does not have a dual form outside of colloquial use (where ''mailāt'' is used with the meaning of “two glasses of water”) and has the irregular plural ''mailusī'', declined as the plural of an ''-oe'' noun, with ''-us-'' instead of ''-en-'' or ''-oe-'' throughout the declension (but note genitive ''mailūsmi'' and not ''mailusmi''). This plural form is actually common, used when talking about bodies of water in an area, water layers, glasses of water, and a few minor idiomatic uses (e.g. ''taili mailusilīm hilælulke'', lit. “to arrive by crossing many waters”, meaning “to have had much experience”).<br/>The ''-usī'' semantic plural is also used for the word ''damītah'' when used for "petals" (''damītusī''; the meaning of "nails" has the regular plural ''damītai''), and ''lairē'' (''lairusī'', which does not mean "skies" or "days" but "galaxy").
* Nouns with non-standard final endings (except ''chlǣvānem'') are declined by unpacking the vowel through regular saṃdhi and applying the resulting declension to the newfound root, with regular saṃdhi. The most common such nouns are ''gos'' "ford, crossing of a small river" (ga-us; gen.sg. ''ge'' (ga-i), pl. ''gaus'' (ga-aus)) and ''khaim'' "goose" (khā-im; pl. ''khaik'' (khā-īk)).
* ''švas'' "animal (including humans)" pluralizes as ''švai'', as if it were a h-noun; all cases except for direct and vocative are however regular.
===Irregular vocatives===
Five very common words have common, irregular, vocative forms:
* ''ñæltah'' "(male's) sister" — ''ñæli'' or ''ñæl''
* ''glūkam'' "(female's) brother" — ''galū''
* ''meinā'' "mother" — ''mā'' or ''mē''
* ''bunā'' "father" — ''bā'' or ''vā''
* ''udhyāras'' "Comrade" — ''udhyā'' (rarely ''udhyār'')
===Use of the plural===
Chlouvānem sometimes uses the singular in contexts where English uses the plural:
* Nouns are always singular after numerals (except, optionally, ''dani'' (two), which they can also be dual after), ''sora'' (some), ''grāṇa'' (any), ''gu'' (no), ''guviṣam'' (no other), ''taili'' (many, much), ''širē'' (more), ''kaili'' (most), and ''ṣubha'' (few, little).
** After ''yaiva'', the difference in the noun's number expresses a distinction much like the one between English "every" and "all": ''yaiva kita'' "every house", ''yaiva kitai'' "all houses".
* When referring to existence or availability of something, that something is always singular, e.g. ''dvārma širēmįs virā'' "there are chairs in the room". It may be plural if topicalized, but the overall meaning of the sentence changes - e.g. ''širēmeyi mæn dvārma virā'' "the chairs are in the room".
* When referring to a single person, ''dhāna'' (hand), ''mešīn'' (eye), and ''minnūlya'' (ear), and often also ''junai'' (foot) (more rarely for ''pājya'' (leg) and ''molnya'' (arm)) are typically singular and not dual - e.g. ''nanau mešīp mešute'' "I see it with my eyes" (lit. "with my eye"). In fact, they might be translated as "a person's hands/eyes/ears", given that dual forms are often used to mean e.g. "both hands of two people" and the plural ones for e.g. "many people's hands".
* ''junyoe'' (indoor slippers), ''rapūda'' ((thick) shoes), ''mæska'' (boots), and all types of shoes are also used in the singular to refer to a pair of them. The main exception is ''varṇaigīk'' (straw rope sandals), which is a plurale tantum.
Duals and plurals of given names have the meaning of an associative plural, i.e. ''Kālomījñai'' "Kālomīyeh and people in/of her group".
==Verbs (''daradhaus'')==
: ''Main article: [[Chlouvānem/Verbs|Chlouvānem verbs]]''
The Chlouvānem verb (''daradhūs'', pl. ''daradhaus'') is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.
==Pronouns (''hailihalenī'')==
The system of personal pronouns of modern Standard Chlouvānem is quite complex due to the honorific system. In modern Chlouvānem, the category of "pronouns" isn't actually syntactically differentiated from other nouns (except for being used anaphorically), and only some of them - the inherited pronouns from Proto-Lahob and Archaic Chlouvānem - follow a declension different from the one of nouns.
The main reason for the complexity of the pronominal system is that there are many possible variants for each person, depending on the formality of the context, the two-way rank difference between speaker and listener, or the three-way rank difference between the speaker, the listener, and the addressee. Some particular forms are also chosen depending on gender.


===Perfect Indicative===
The fact that there is no syntactical difference between the morphological pronouns and those that are nouns also means that every word used pronominally, including given names, requires that person's verbal concord, i.e. a given name used as a second-person pronoun will be used in concordance with a second-person verb. In the following list, words not marked as being inflected according to pronominal declension are inflected as nouns. However, '''yamei''' and '''lāma''' are honorific adpositions which do not decline; the title or given name used with them declines instead.
The perfect is formed with the same terminations for all verbs. The particularity of this tense is that it uses a special stem, formed by prefixing the root vowel (shortened and with the basic root ablaut) to the stem. Examples:
* ''nāmvake'' “to crush, press” = ''nāmv- → anāmv-''
* ''khlunāke'' “to search, look for” = ''khlu- → ukhlu-''
* ''hilkake'' “to dye, colour” = ''hilk- → ihilk-''
* ''męlike'' “to give” = ''męlь → emęlь-''
'''æ''' uses '''i'''; '''o''' and '''ṛ''' use '''a'''; diphthongs usually only take their first component, exceptions being '''ai''' (→ e) and '''au''' (→ o):
* ''dældake'' “to speak” = ''dæld- → idæld-''
* ''kolkake'' “to be acid” = ''kolk- → akolk-''
* ''tṛlake'' “to know, understand” = ''tṛl- → atṛl-''
* ''yaudake'' “to catch” = ''yaud- → oyaud-''
* ''laitake'' “to row” = ''lait- → elait-''


Causative stems with ablaut have a full reduplication, using the first consonant plus the basic vowel grade, like ''miš- → maiš- → mimaiš-''.
===List of personal pronouns and pronoun-equivalents===
====First person singular (I, me)====
* '''lili''' (pronominal declension): the morphological inherited pronoun and the most neutral. It is overall the most used, especially in the non-direct cases, but there are alternatives for very informal, childish, slang, and humble speech.
* '''emmā''': the humble speech word for "person", sometimes used in humble speech.
* '''demi''' (pronominal declension): literally "oneself", the reflexive pronoun; used in informal speech but conveying a sense of distance.
* Given name: used in childish speech and in certain slang forms, considered rude or uneducated otherwise.
* '''lilyā hulineh''': literally "my woman", informal or semi-formal, implies superiority.
* '''paralonį emmā''': literally "the person [humble] who is a disciple" or "I, [your] disciple". Used almost exclusively in writing, by students or pupils when talking to their professors or teachers.
* '''lilyā jāyim''' (in Archaic Chlouvānem only); literally "my girl", implying humbleness. Notably used by the Chlamiṣvatrā to refer to herself throughout the Holy Books.


A few verbs have irregular stems:
====Second person singular (You)====
* ''lilke'' “to live” = ''lælī-''
* Given name plus '''lāma''': the general polite form. '''lāma''' can be replaced by an appropriate title.
* ''dṛke'' “to do” = ''dadrā-''
* '''yamei''' + given name + '''lāma''': similar to the above, but more polite, typically used for people of much higher rank or public officials.
* '''yamei''' + title: very polite, alternative to the above two.
* Appropriate honorific formula: the most polite usage, usually progressively reduced to (''yamei'') given name + ''lāma'' or ''yamei'' + title during the course of a conversation<ref>This is due to many honorific formulae being quite long - for example, the standard honorific formula when talking to an Inquisitor is (''lallāmaha'') [matronymic] ''yamei murkadhāna'' [given name] ''lāma''.</ref>.
* Given name + '''tanta''': same politeness as ''lāma'', used respectfully towards lower-ranked people, for example workers and colleague with less experience, soldiers of lower rank, employees, apprentices, and (from seventh class onwards) by teachers towards their students.
* Given name alone: used in semi-formal speech between (equal ranked) colleagues and friends with a moderate degree of acquaintance. Can be or is rude otherwise. Note that it is considered especially rude to use the given name (or any other form of the personal name) towards older family members, or family members of the same generation who are not siblings (e.g. brothers/sisters-in-law, unless they're close friends).
* [[Chlouvānem/Names#Informal_names_.28laltihalen.C4.AB.29|Informal name]]: used in informal speech among friends, siblings (and possibly cousins<ref>With cousins, whether the informal or the given name is used depends on how close they are; with first cousins using the informal name is nearly universal, while with farther cousins the given name may be more common.</ref>), partners, and all family members of a younger generation.
* Kinship term alone: used for older family members or non-siblings (excluding cousins) of the same generation.
* '''sāmi''' (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun used in informal speech. Often replaced by the given name or by the hypocoristic form.
* '''nami''' (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun of formal speech towards higher ranked people. Often used (and even more often in non-core forms such as the genitive '''namyā'''), but it is also common to use the given name + ''lāma'' formula instead.
* '''tami''' (pronominal declension): morphological pronoun of formal speech towards equal ranked people. Often used alternatively to the given name (with or without ''lāma''), even in the same conversation.
* '''rami''' (pronominal declension): morphological formal pronoun for lower ranked people; same usage pattern as ''tami''.
* '''udhyāras''': translatable as "Comrade" and introduced during the Kaiṣamā era, it is a formal second-person pronoun used for people in situations transcending social rank. It is particularly used among political activists, volunteers in any organization, or in cooperative activities distinct from one's usual work. It is also the preferred option when one has no information about the addressed person, or as a general second person pronoun not referring to any particular person.
* '''ṣari''': quite old-fashioned (but still actively used by older people), used by guests towards homeowners (or innkeepers) and by soldiers towards their superiors.
* '''ūttuka''' (mostly historical except for the Northeast): similar to '''ṣari''' but mostly used by servants towards their superiors or landowners; rapidly disappeared because of the Kaiṣamā era reforms except for the Northeast, where it was used in most contexts ''ṣari'' was elsewhere.
* '''blikā'''; an endearing term for "girl", used by sisters among themselves.
* '''lorkhās'''; male counterpart to ''blikā''.
* Informal name + '''cuca''': endearing form used in informal speech by parents towards their children.
* '''nūrya''', literally "kid, child": used in formal instances by parents towards their children.


Regular forms (3rd person singular and plural are the same for all verbs):
The following pronouns are mostly used for specific people, and only as reductions of other formulae:
{| class="wikitable"
* '''aveṣyotariri nami''': literally "You excellent one"; extremely formal locution for non-religious superiors several ranks ahead.
* '''gopūrṭham''': used for public/religious and military officials.
* '''gopūrṭhami brausa''': used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
* '''yobrausa''': same as ''gopūrṭhami brausa''.
* '''lalla yobrausa''': used for the Great Inquisitor.
 
With second-person pronouns, the possessives used are in nearly every case those of the corresponding morphological pronouns; however, in very informal speech, it is not uncommon to use the genitive of the informal name or of pronoun-equivalents such as ''blikā'' or ''lorkhās''.
 
====Third person singular====
Chlouvānem does not have any morphological third person pronoun; the demonstratives are used instead for non-human referents. For human referents, however, it is considered extremely rude to address them using a demonstratives. The choice of pronoun in the third person is especially complex because not just the relative rank of speaker and listener should be kept in mind, but also the rank of the addressee relative to both the speaker and the listener.
 
All titles listed in the section [[#Honorific titles|"Honorific titles"]] may be freely used with and without names. Furthermore, it is common in not excessively formal speech to use ''nāḍima'' (honorific word for "mother") for all female older relatives - of previous generations, not older siblings - of the interlocutor and similarly ''tamvāram'' (honorific for "father") for male older relatives.
 
'''udhyāras''', equivalent to "Comrade", is in contemporary Chlouvānem the least controversial third person pronoun, at least the only one that is never considered rude to use. However, depending on the situation, other pronouns may be more appropriate.
 
=====Reference table=====
The following table is meant as a ''non-exhaustive'' reference for the ''most common'' ways used to refer to third person human referents in different situations, excluding titles:
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg" style="textalign:center"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press"<br/>(exterior) !! dældake “to speak”<br/>(interior)
! colspan=2 | If... !! Speaker is higher than Listener !! Speaker is equal to Listener !! Speaker is lower than Listener
|-
|-
| 1SG || anāmv'''am''' || idæld'''iram'''
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is higher than... !! both Speaker and Listener
| ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam'' || ''(yamei)'' (name) ''suntam/sintam(/lāma)'' || ''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam''
|-
|-
| 2SG || anāmv'''es''' || idæld'''ires'''
! Listener,<br/>but lower than or equal to Speaker
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei lātiṃṣin''<br/>(name) ''lāma'' || / || /
|-
|-
| 3SG || anāmv'''a''' || idæld'''irā'''
! Speaker,<br/>but lower than or equal to Listener
| / || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''
|-
|-
| 1DU || anāmv'''onda''' || idæld'''irunda'''
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is equal to... !! Listener
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''tanta''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam''
|-
|-
| 2DU || anāmv'''odes''' || idæld'''irudes'''
! both Speaker and Listener
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''<br/> (name) ''lāma''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''tanta'' || /
|-
|-
| 3DU || anāmv'''ot''' || idæld'''irut'''
! Speaker
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''
|-
|-
| 1PL || anāmv'''amia''' || idæld'''iramia'''
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is lower than...  !! Listener
| ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || / || /
|-
|-
| 2PL || anāmv'''asia''' || idæld'''irasia'''
! both Speaker and Listener
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || /
|-
|-
| 3PL || anāmv'''a''' || idæld'''irā'''
! Speaker
| / || / || (name) ''lāma''<br/> ''udhyāras''
|}
|}


Causative forms:
====Dual pronouns====
{| class="wikitable"
====Plural pronouns====
|-
====Other personal pronouns====
! Person !! nāmvake "to make crush, press"<br/>(exterior) !! mišake "to learn; to show each other"<br/>(interior)
 
|-
====Pronominal declension====
| 1SG || anāmv'''ixam''' || mimaiš'''erxam'''
The pronominal declension has two variants: one used for the first person pronouns and another for the 2nd person ones. First person pronouns are the most archaic: they have a single-phoneme stem in all cases bar the direct, and a different stem in the direct case ('''lili''', derived from the original pronoun *li, in the singular, and suppletive '''amūt''' and '''amūvi''' in the dual and plural respectively).<br/>The second person pronouns are a Pre-Chlouvānem innovation, from the original short stem attached to the demonstrative ''ami'', and therefore they follow that word's declension. However, the original short stems are kept as alternative, shorter forms, for the accusative, ergative, and dative cases. Second-person plural pronouns exist, but are virtually unused outside of Archaic Chlouvānem.
|-
| 2SG || anāmv'''ixes''' || mimaiš'''erxes'''
|-
| 3SG || anāmv'''ixa''' || mimaiš'''erxa'''
|-
| 1DU || anāmv'''ixunda''' || mimaiš'''erxunda'''
|-
| 2DU || anāmv'''ixudes''' || mimaiš'''erxudes'''
|-
| 3DU || anāmv'''ixut''' || mimaiš'''erxut'''
|-
| 1PL || anāmv'''ixmia''' || mimaiš'''erxmia'''
|-
| 2PL || anāmv'''inxia''' || mimaiš'''erinxia'''
|-
| 3PL || anāmv'''ixa''' || mimaiš'''erxa'''
|}


=== Future indicative ===
All ergative singular forms in ''-ei'' have literary variants in ''-eis'' (cf. ''emeis'', ergative of ''emibe'' "one").
The future tense does not vary between conjugations, and the stem is always the one used in the infinitive.


Regular forms:
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press"<br/>(exterior) !! dældake “to speak”<br/>(interior)
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''iṣyam''' || dæld'''eriṣyam'''
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''iṣyes''' || dæld'''eriṣyes'''
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''iṣya''' || dæld'''eriṣya'''
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''iṣṭām''' || dæld'''eriṣṭām'''
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''iṣṭās''' || dæld'''eriṣṭās'''
! colspan=4 | !! Direct !! Accusative !! Ergative !!  Genitive !! Translative !! Exessive !! Essive !!  Dative !! Ablative !! Locative !! Instrumental
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''iṣṭāvo''' || dæld'''eriṣṭāvo'''
! rowspan=5 | Singular !! colspan=3 | 1st person
| '''lili''' || lū || lei || lyai<br/>lilyā || lan || lat || lįs || lum || ląu || lēn || lāni
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''iṣmāmi''' || dæld'''eriṣmāmi'''
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
| '''sāmi''' || sāmyū<br/>sū || sāmī<br/>sei || sāmī || sāmīn || sāmīt || sāmįs || sāmūm<br/>som || sāmų || sāmǣ || sāmūni
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''iṣmāsi''' || dæld'''eriṣmāsi'''
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
| '''nami''' || namyū<br/>nū || namī<br/>nei || namī || namīn || namīt || namįs || namūm<br/>num || namų || namǣ || namūni
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''iṣmāta''' || dæld'''eriṣmāta'''
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
|}
| '''tami''' || tamyū<br/>tū || tamī<br/>tei || tamī || tamīn || tamīt || tamįs || tamūm<br/>tum || tamų || tamǣ || tamūni
 
Causative forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to make crush, press"<br/>(exterior) !! mišake "to learn; to show each other"<br/>(interior)
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
| '''rami''' || ramyū<br/>nū || ramī<br/>nei || ramī || ramīn || ramīt || ramįs || ramūm<br/>rum || ramų || ramǣ || ramūṇi
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''axhiṣyam''' || maiš'''irxhiṣyam'''
! colspan=4 | Reflexive pronoun
| '''demi''' || jū || jei || jai<br/>demyā || jen || jet || jįs || jum || jąu || jēn || jāni
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''axhiṣyes''' || maiš'''irxhiṣyes'''
! rowspan=5 | Dual !! colspan=3 | 1st person
| '''amūt''' || lūṣa || lūra || lūva || lūh || lūbhan || lūnne || lūh || lūbhan || lūnne || lūbhan
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''axhiṣya''' || maiš'''irxhiṣya'''
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
| '''sāmīt''' || sāmīṣa<br/>seṣa || sāmīra<br/>sera || sāmīva || sāmirį || sāmibhan || sāminne || sāmirį<br/>seh || sāmibhan || sāminne || sāmibhan
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''axhiṣṭām''' || maiš'''irxhiṣṭām'''
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
| '''namīt''' || namīṣa<br/>nīṣa || namīra<br/>nira || namīva || namirį || namibhan || naminne || namirį<br/>nih || namibhan || naminne || namibhan
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''axhiṣṭās''' || maiš'''irxhiṣṭās'''
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
| '''tamīt''' || tamīṣa<br/>tīṣa || tamīra<br/>tira || tamīva || tamirį || tamibhan || taminne || tamirį<br/>tih || tamibhan || taminne || tamibhan
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''axhiṣṭāvo''' || maiš'''irxhiṣṭāvo'''
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
| '''ramīt''' || ramīṣa<br/>rīṣa || ramīra<br/>rira || ramīva || ramirį || ramibhan || raminne || ramirį<br/>rih || ramibhan || raminne || ramibhan
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''axhiṣmāmi''' || maiš'''irxhiṣmāmi'''
! Plural !! colspan=3 | 1st person
|-
| '''amūvi''' || laih || lān || lumi || lemān || lenīs || lāra || lisām || lenīs || lelīm || lenīka
| 2PL || nāmv'''axhiṣmāsi''' || maiš'''irxhiṣmāsi'''
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''axhiṣmāta''' || maiš'''irxhiṣmāta'''
|}
|}


=== Voice marking ===
====Honorific titles====
Chlouvānem has seven voices, marked by affixes added, in unprefixed verbs, at the end of the verb. As the patient-trigger voice (common voice in interior verbs) is unmarked, the six voice markers are:
''→ See also: [[Chlouvānem/Names#Using_names|Chlouvānem names § Using names]]''
* '''-ça''' for agent-trigger voice (in exterior verbs only);
* '''-kæ''' for benefactive-trigger voice;
* '''-tū''' ('''-tur''' non-finally) for antibenefactive-trigger voice;
* '''-pan''' for locative-trigger voice;
* '''-mea''' for instrumental-trigger voice;
* '''-ūsi''' for dative-trigger voice.
Examples of voice marking are ''męliė'' (he/she/it is given) — ''męliėça'' (he/she/it gives) — ''męliėkæ'' (something is given for him/her/it) — ''męliėtū'' (something is given against him/her/it) — ''męliėpan'' (something is given in him/her/it) — ''męliėmea'' (something is given with him/her/it) — ''męliegūsi'' (something is given to him/her/it).


In prefixed verbs, voice marking is a bit different as the voice marker is inserted between the prefix and the stem, thus forms like ''vīvaiyųlė'' (he/she/it is eaten too much) ''vīvaiçayųlė'' (he/she/it eats too much). Saṃdhi is applied if needed, e.g. "something is eaten for him/her/it directly from a tree" is ''taktæyųlė'' (morphemically ''tad--yųlė'', verb ''tadyųlake'').
Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective ''yamei'' is often added to many of them - especially ''lāma'' - and is mandatory in other ones.
* '''lāma''' - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, ''lāma'' is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. ''Namihūlša lāma''); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then ''lāma'' comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša''). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with ''lāma'' (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma'') are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
* '''tanta''' - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students. Also used by militars towards lower-ranked soldiers.
* '''suntam''' (regionally also ''sintam'') - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
* '''lallāmaha''' - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with ''yamei''. Inquisitors may also be referred to as ''lallāmaha + <small>matronymic</small> + yamei + <small>given name</small> + murkadhāna (lāma)''
* '''jūlin''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used for people who work in one's home but are not part of the family.
* '''tallam''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used by men for unmarried women whom they know somewhat well. Currently less frequently used than it was up to about 10 years ago.
* '''jāmilšīreh''' - used in military contexts towards higher-ranked people, or by common people towards military commanders in service.
* '''udhyā(ras)''' - neutral but respectful title of address, often used when generally speaking and without knowing who the listener is. Sometimes used, when in a plural sense, in the form '''yamei dāvudhyāre'''. In its neutralness relative to rank, it can be compared with the Soviet-era use of ''товарищ''. It is also how high-ranked Inquisitors and most monks address the general public.<br/>Note that ''udhyāras'' is the direct form, ''udhyā'' the irregular vocative.
* '''pūrivāla''' - an impersonal term of address used in written language, towards unfamiliar people never met personally. Often used as ''yamei'' [name] ''pūrivāla''.
* '''cuca''' is not strictly an honorific, as it pertains to more colloquial forms of speech, but it works the same way. It has a diminutive and endearing meaning, not unlike Japanese ''-chan''. In formal speech, it is often used towards and when speaking about children.
 
=====Occupations commonly used as titles=====
* '''camitorai''' — head of a company (usually as [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma'')
* '''kauchlærīn''' (voc.: ''kauchlærī'') — professor (in universities, seminaries, institutions, and work schools)
* '''tatnāmęlīn''' (voc.: ''tatnāmęlī'') — teacher (in first and basic schools)
 
=====Official titles=====
Where not noted, the formula is [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] [title] ''lāma''.


===The subjunctive mood===
* '''brausamailenya''' — Baptist — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''brausamailenia lāma''.
The subjunctive mood only distinguishes aspects and not tense; it is formed by special terminations and has exterior, interior, regular and causative forms.
* '''camimurkadhāna''' — Great Inquisitor — rendered as ''širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''camimurkadhāna lāma''.
* '''camitorai''' — president (of diocesan parliaments or executives or of foreign countries). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic (if Chlouvānem)] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma''.
* '''plušamelīs''' (voc.: ''plušamelī'') — Prefect (head of an Office (''plušamila'') of the Inquisition). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''plušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''gatvā''' — leader/head/president/mayor — preceded by the genitive of the respective administration (''ṣramāṇa'' "province", ''lalka'' "circuit", ''hālgāra'' "district", ''marta'' "city"…).
* '''hurdagīn''' — Head Monk (head of a monastery) — rendered as ''kaili brausire yamei [name] hurdagīn lāma'' (+ monastery name-<small>GEN</small>)<ref>Many head monks have their own unique titles based on their monastery. For example the head monk of the Vādhaṃšvāti Lake Monastery is not referred as ''[…] hurdagīn lāma vādhaṃšvāti ga gūltayi'' but as ''[…] laliājuniāmiti jāṇi camilālta lāma'', literally "Great Guardian of the Field of the Night Bloom".</ref>
* '''rākṣaṇa''' — Bishop (head of a diocese) — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [(surname +) name] ''rākṣaṇa lāma'' (+ diocese name-<small>GEN</small>).
* '''lallaplušamelīs''' (voc.: ''lallaplušamelī'') — High Prefect (head of the Table of Offices (''flušamaili eṇāh'', the executive branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''taili aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallaplušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''lallamurkadhāna''' — High Inquisitor (one of the 612 members of the Inquisitorial Conclave (''murkadhānumi lanedāmeh'', the legislative branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallamurkadhāna lāma''.
* '''ñæltryam''' — monk.
* '''nīrvakṣari''' (voc.: ''nīrvakṣarī'') — Eparch (head of an Eparchy).


The subjunctive is fairly regular for all verbs, using (except in the causative conjugation) the most basic form of the root — that is, without nā/nī suffixes and in basic grade ablaut; the only exceptions being inverse ablauting roots which use their weakened form (e.g. valde uses uld- and not vald-).
Note that the full titles are used generally at the first mention only. For example, ''Martayināvi yamei murkadhāna Læhimausa lāma'' becomes afterwards either ''yamei murkadhāna'' or ''yamei Læhimausa lāma''. With the Great Inquisitor, this does not usually get shorter than ''širē aveṣyotārire yamei lallāmaha'' ([Her] Respectable Most Excellent Highness) or ''širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha camimurkadhāna'' ([Her] Most Excellent Highness, the Great Inquisitor).
3rd person singular, 2nd plural, and 3rd plural, are identical in all verbs.


====Imperfective aspect====
===Correlatives===
Regular:
Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing ten types (proximal, medial, distal, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press”<br/>(exterior) !! dældake "to speak”<br/>(interior)
! Category ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal !! Interrogative !! Negative !! Ass. exist. !! Elect. exist. !! Universal !! Positive altern. !! Negative altern.
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''up''' || dæld'''immup'''
! Attributive
|-
| rowspan=2 | ''nenē''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>this (one) || rowspan=2 | ''nunū''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (near you) || rowspan=2 | ''nanā''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (over there) || rowspan=2 | ''yanū?''<br/>what?, which (one) ? || ''gu''<br/>no || ''sora''<br/>some || ''grāṇa''<br/>any || rowspan=2 | ''yaiva''<br/>every(thing) || ''viṣam''<br/>another, other || ''guviṣam''<br/>no other
| 2SG || nāmv'''eap''' || dæld'''immep'''
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''āsi''' || dæld'''irāsi'''
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''umbu''' || dæld'''irumbu'''
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''umbe''' || dæld'''irumbe'''
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''umbap''' || dæld'''irumbap'''
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''icham''' || dæld'''ilcham'''
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''āsi''' || dæld'''irāsi'''
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''āsi''' || dæld'''irāsi'''
|}
 
Causative:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! mišake “to show”<br/>(exterior) !! mišake “to learn; to show each other”<br/>(interior)
! Thing
| ''gomi''<br/>nothing || ''sorami''<br/>something || ''grāṇami''<br/>anything || ''viṣāmi''<br/>something else || ''guviṣāmi''<br/>nothing else
|-
|-
| 1SG || maiš'''axhup''' || maiš'''irxhup'''
! Person
| ''·evita''<br/>this one || ''·utvita''<br/>that one (near you) || ''·ātvita''<br/>that one (over there) || ''yavita?''<br/>who? || ''guvita''<br/>no one || ''soraita''<br/>someone || ''grāmvita''<br/>anyone || ''yaivita''<br/>everyone || ''viṣvita''<br/>someone else || ''guviṣvita''<br/>no one else
|-
|-
| 2SG || maiš'''axheap''' || maiš'''irxheap'''
! Time
| ''emiya''<br/>now || ''utiya''<br/>then || ''ātiya''<br/>then (remote) || ''yamiya?''<br/>when? || ''gumiya''<br/>never || ''soramiya''<br/>sometime, somewhen || ''grāmiya''<br/>anytime, whenever || ''yaivmiya''<br/>always, everytime || ''viṣmiya''<br/>sometime else || ''guviṣmiya''<br/>never else
|-
|-
| 3SG || maiš'''axhāsi''' || maiš'''irxhāsi'''
! Place
| ''·ejulā''<br/>here || ''·uñjulā''<br/>there || ''·āñjulā''<br/>over there || ''yajulā?''<br/>where? || ''gujulā''<br/>nowhere || ''sorajulā''<br/>somewhere || ''grāñjulā''<br/>anywhere || ''yavijulā''<br/>everywhere || ''viñjulā''<br/>elsewhere || ''guviñjulā''<br/>nowhere else
|-
|-
| 1DU || maiš'''axhumbu''' || maiš'''irxhumbu'''
! Destination
| ''·ejulyom''<br/>hither || ''·uñjulyom''<br/>thither || ''·āñjulyom''<br/> thither (remote) || ''yajulyom?''<br/>whither? || ''gujulyom''<br/>nowhither || ''sorajulyom''<br/>somewhither || ''grāñjulyom''<br/>anywhither || ''yavijulyom''<br/>everywhither || ''viñjulyom''<br/>elsewhither || ''guviñjulyom''<br/>nowhither else
|-
|-
| 2DU || maiš'''axhumbe''' || maiš'''irxhumbe'''
! Source
| ''·ejulų''<br/>hence || ''·uñjulų''<br/>thence || ''·āñjulų''<br/> thence (remote) || ''yajulų?''<br/>whence? || ''gujulų''<br/>nowhence ||  ''sorajulų''<br/>somewhence || ''grāñjulų''<br/>anywhence || ''yavijulų''<br/>everywhence || ''viñjulų''<br/>elsewhence || ''guviñjulų''<br/>nowhence else
|-
|-
| 3DU || maiš'''axhumbap''' || maiš'''irxhumbap'''
! Manner
| ''elīce''<br/>thus, hereby || ''ūlīce''<br/>thereby || ''ālīce''<br/>thereby; that other way || ''yalīce?''<br/>how? || ''gulīce''<br/>no way || ''soralīce''<br/>somehow || ''grāṃlīce''<br/>anyhow || ''yaivlīce''<br/>everyway || ''viṣlīce''<br/>otherwise || ''guviṣlīce''<br/>no other way
|-
|-
| 1PL || maiš'''axicham''' || maiš'''irxicham'''
! Reason
| ''emena''<br/>herefore || ''utmena''<br/>therefore || ''ātmena''<br/>therefore; for that other reason || ''yamenat?''<br/>why? || ''gumena''<br/>for no reason || ''soramena''<br/>somewhy || ''grāmena''<br/>whyever, for any reason || ''yaivmena''<br/>for every reason || ''viṣmena''<br/>for another reason || ''guviṣmena''<br/>for no other reason
|-
|-
| 2PL || maiš'''axhāsi''' || maiš'''irxhāsi'''
! Quality
| ''esmā''<br/>this kind || ''utsmā''<br/>that kind || ''ātsmā''<br/>that other kind || ''yasmāt?''<br/>which kind? || ''gusmā''<br/>no kind || ''sorasmā''<br/>some kind || ''grāṇismā''<br/>any kind || ''yavismā''<br/>every kind || ''viṣasmā''<br/>another kind || ''guviṣasmā''<br/>no other kind
|-
|-
| 3PL || maiš'''axhāsi''' || maiš'''irxhāsi'''
! Quantity
| ''enūḍa''<br/>this much || ''utnūḍa''<br/>that much || ''ātnūḍa''<br/>that much (remote) || ''yanūḍat?''<br/>how much? || ''gunūḍa''<br/>none || ''soraṇūḍa''<br/>some of it || ''grāṇūḍa''<br/>any much || ''yaivnūḍa''<br/>all of it || ''viṣṇūḍa''<br/>another quantity || ''guviṣṇūḍa''<br/>no other quantity
|}
|}


====Perfective aspect====
Note that in common speach ''ālīce'' and ''ūlīce'' as well as ''ātmena'' and ''utmena'' are basically interchangeable. The <small>QUALITY</small> correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. ''lajlęs grāṇismā'' "any kind of chair".<br/><small>THING</small> and <small>PERSON</small> correlatives decline for case and, in the case of ''evita'', ''utvita'', and ''ātvita'', also for number (1h declension: ''evita'', acc. sg. ''evitu'', dir. pl. ''evitai'', dat. pl. ''evitesām''…). <small>QUALITY</small> and <small>QUANTITY</small> correlatives also decline for case.
Regular:
 
{| class="wikitable"
Not to be confused with their literal English translations are ''yaivemibe'' (or ''yaiva emibe'') "each, every" (literally "everyone") - which is most often attributive only in Chlouvānem - and especially ''sora emibe'', literally "someone", which has a completely different meaning: ''sora emibe'' denotes "some single subjects, considered as single entities, hence inherently plural and taking plural verbs: ''sora emibe draikate'' "some single subjects did it" ≠ ''soraita dṛkte'' "someone did it".
|-
 
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press"<br/>(interior) !! dældake "to speak”<br/>(exterior)
Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number:
: ''gomīt~guvitāt'' "neither";
: ''grāṇamīt~grāmvitāt'' "either";
: ''yaivāt~yaivitāt'' "both";
: ''viṣāmāt~viṣvitāt'' "the other one".
 
Further correlatives not included in the above table:
: ''yambā?'' (whose?)
: ''smāmi'' (such a...) <small>(archaic, literary)</small>
 
====Positional demonstratives====
Chlouvānem has a large number of demonstratives, as they are integrated with the system of [[Chlouvānem/Positional_and_motion_verbs#Positional_verbs_.28jalyadaradhaus.29|positional verbs]], combining a general proximal-medial-distal distinction with positional prefixes, further localizing them in space. Only a subset of 10 out of the 24 positional prefixes are used to build demonstratives; the ones with a ∅- prefix correspond to most of the unused ones, and may be translated as "this/that one in front/ahead/in the middle" when a disambiguation from another one is needed. The same ten prefixes (except for ''įs-'') are also used together with the <small>PERSON</small> series (with the same logic), and with the <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> correlatives, which act as adverbial anaphoras of positional and motion verbs. This results in forms like ''kamyejulā'' "here, around" or ''māhāñjulyom'' "thither (remote), rightwards".
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''atup''' || dæld'''iṭṭup'''
! Prefix ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''ateap''' || dæld'''iṭṭeap'''
! ∅- (ahead)
| ''nenē''<br/>this one ahead || ''nunū''<br/>that one (near you) ahead || ''nanā''<br/>that one ahead
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''etāsi''' || dæld'''iṭṭāsi'''
! ān- (above)
| ''āninē''<br/>this one above || ''ānnū''<br/>that one (near you) above || ''ānnā''<br/>that one above
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''atumbu''' || dæld'''iṭṭumbu'''
! šu- (below)
| ''šunē''<br/>this one below || ''šūnū''<br/>that one (near you) below || ''šonā''<br/>that one below
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''atumbe''' || dæld'''iṭṭumbe'''
! įs- (hanging)
| ''įsinē''<br/>this one hanging || ''įsunū''<br/>that one (near you) hanging || ''įsanā''<br/>that one hanging
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''atumbap''' || dæld'''iṭṭumbap'''
! na(ñ)- (inside)
| ''najinē''<br/>this one inside || ''najunū''<br/>that one (near you) inside || ''najanā''<br/>that one inside
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''añcham''' || dæld'''ireñcham'''
! kau- (outside)
| ''kaunē''<br/>this one outside || ''kaunū''<br/>that one (near you) outside || ''kaunā''<br/>that one outside
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''etāsi''' || dæld'''iṭṭāsi'''
! kami- (around)
| ''kaminē''<br/>this one around || ''kamyunū''<br/>that one (near you) around || ''kamyanā''<br/>that one around
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''etāsi''' || dæld'''iṭṭāsi'''
! pri- (behind)
|}
| ''prinē''<br/>this one behind || ''prinū''<br/>that one (near you) behind || ''prinā''<br/>that one behind
 
Causative:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! mišake “to show”<br/>(causative) !! mišake “to learn; to show each other”<br/>(causative)
! vai- (beside; in the corner)<br/><small>(''sāṭ-'' for the main meaning)</small>
| ''vainē''<br/>this one beside || ''vayunū''<br/>that one (near you) beside || ''vayanā''<br/>that one beside
|-
|-
| 1SG || maiš'''axhetup''' || maiš'''irxhetup'''
! vyā- (left)
| ''vyāɂinē''<br/>this one to the left || ''vyāɂunū''<br/>that one (near you) to the left || ''vyāɂanā''<br/>that one to the left
|-
|-
| 2SG || maiš'''axhetep''' || maiš'''irxhetep'''
! māha- (right)
|-
| ''māhenē''<br/>this one to the right || ''māhonū''<br/>that one (near you) to the right || ''māhānā''<br/>that one to the right
| 3SG || maiš'''axhetāsi''' || maiš'''irxhetāsi'''
|-
| 1DU || maiš'''axhetumbu''' || maiš'''irxhetumbu'''
|-
| 2DU || maiš'''axhetumbe''' || maiš'''irxhetumbe'''
|-
| 3DU || maiš'''axhetumbap''' || maiš'''irxhetumbap'''
|-
| 1PL || maiš'''axeñcham''' || maiš'''irxeñcham'''
|-
| 2PL || maiš'''axhetāsi''' || maiš'''irxhetāsi'''
|-
| 3PL || maiš'''axhetāsi''' || maiš'''irxhetāsi'''
|}
|}
The ''įs-'' forms may also be used for things lying on people's hands.


===The hypothetical mood===
The forms for the <small>PERSON</small>, <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> series are mostly formed through regular saṃdhi (with the partial exception of the ''na(ñ)-'' and ''vyā-'' prefixes):
The hypothetical mood is mainly used in ''if'' constructions (e.g. ''yųlatṛ'' "if it is eaten") and, like the subjunctive, only conjugates for aspect. As all terminations are vocalic, all conjugations form it the same way, starting from the root.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
 
====Imperfective aspect====
Regular:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press"<br/>(interior) !! dældake "to speak”<br/>(exterior)
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''atiam''' || dæld'''irtam'''
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''aça''' || dæld'''irça'''
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''atṛ''' || dæld'''irtṛ'''
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''adītim''' || dæld'''irdītim'''
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''adītis''' || dæld'''irdītis'''
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''adītṛ''' || dæld'''irdītṛ'''
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''antim''' || dæld'''iratim'''
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''antis''' || dæld'''iratis'''
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''antṛ''' || dæld'''iratṛ'''
! Prefix ↓ / Base → !! ''·evita<br/>·ejulā<br/>·ejulyom<br/>·ejulų'' !! ''·utvita<br/>·uñjulā<br/>·uñjulyom<br/>·uñjulų'' !! ''·ātvita<br/>·āñjulā<br/>·āñjulyom<br/>·āñjulų''
|}
 
Causative:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! mišake “to show”<br/>(causative) !! mišake “to learn; to show each other”<br/>(causative)
! ∅- (ahead)
| ''evita'' || ''utvita'' || ''ātvita''
|-
|-
| 1SG || maiš'''axhitam''' || maiš'''irxhitam'''
! ān- (above)
| ''ānevita'' || ''ānutvita'' || ''ānātvita''
|-
|-
| 2SG || maiš'''axhiça''' || maiš'''irxhiça'''
! šu- (below)
| ''švevita'' || ''šūtvita'' || ''švātvita''
|-
|-
| 3SG || maiš'''axhitṛ''' || maiš'''irxhitṛ'''
! na(ñ)- (inside)
| ''naivita'' || ''notvita'' || ''nātvita''
|-
|-
| 1DU || maiš'''axhidītim''' || maiš'''irxhidītim'''
! kau- (outside)
| ''kāvevita'' || ''kāvutvita'' || ''kāvātvita''
|-
|-
| 2DU || maiš'''axhidītis''' || maiš'''irxhidītis'''
! kami- (around)
| ''kamyevitai'' || ''kamyutvitai'' || ''kamyātvitai''
|-
|-
| 3DU || maiš'''axhidītṛ''' || maiš'''irxhidītṛ'''
! pri- (behind)
| ''pryevita'' || ''pryutvita'' || ''pryātvita''
|-
|-
| 1PL || maiš'''axhintim''' || maiš'''irxhintim'''
! vai- (beside, in the corner)
| ''vāyevita'' || ''vāyutvita'' || ''vāyātvita''
|-
|-
| 2PL || maiš'''axhintis''' || maiš'''irxhintis'''
! vyā- (left)
| ''vyāɂevita'' || ''vyāɂutvita'' || ''vyāɂātvita''
|-
|-
| 3PL || maiš'''axhintṛ''' || maiš'''irxhintṛ'''
! māha- (right)
| ''māhaivita'' || ''māhotvita'' || ''māhātvita''
|}
|}
Note that, in the <small>PERSON</small> series, the ''kami-'' forms are only used with a plural meaning, as reflected in the table above.


====Perfective aspect====
====Declensions of correlatives and possessives====
Regular:
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! nāmvake "to crush, press"<br/>(interior) !! dældake "to speak”<br/>(exterior)
! rowspan=2 | Case || ā-paradigm !! ē-paradigm !! ū-paradigm !! t-paradigm
|-
|-
| 1SG || nāmv'''āttiam''' || dæld'''ertiam'''
! <small>All possessives, ''nanā'' and other distals,<br/> ''yambā?'', ''ami'', correlatives in ''-i''<ref>e.g. ''sorami'', ''grāṇami''…</ref></small> !! <small>''nenē'' and other proximals</small> !! <small>''nunū'', and other medials, ''yanū?''</small> !! <small>''yasmāt?'' and ''yanūḍat?''</small>
|-
|-
| 2SG || nāmv'''ānça''' || dæld'''eraça'''
! Direct<br/>Vocative
| '''lilyā''' || '''nenē''' || '''nunū''' || '''yasmāt'''
|-
|-
| 3SG || nāmv'''ātara''' || dæld'''eratra'''
! Accusative
| lilyau || nenyu || nunūyu || yasmau
|-
|-
| 1DU || nāmv'''āndītim''' || dæld'''eradītim'''
! Ergative
| lilye || nenye || nunūye || yasmātei
|-
|-
| 2DU || nāmv'''āndītis''' || dæld'''eradītis'''
! Genitive
| lilyai || neniai || nunūyai || yasmai
|-
|-
| 3DU || nāmv'''āndītara''' || dæld'''eradītra'''
! Translative
| lilyān || nenēn || nunūn || yasmān
|-
|-
| 1PL || nāmv'''ātatim''' || dæld'''ertatim'''
! Exessive
| lilyāt || nenēt || nunūt || yasmātat
|-
|-
| 2PL || nāmv'''ātatis''' || dæld'''ertatis'''
! Essive
| lilyą || nenę || nunų || yasmātą
|-
|-
| 3PL || nāmv'''ātatra''' || dæld'''ertatra'''
! Dative
|}
| lilyåh || nenǣh || nunǣh || yasmātom
 
Causative:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! mišake “to show”<br/>(causative) !! mišake “to learn; to show each other”<br/>(causative)
! Ablative
| lilyąu || nenēhu || nunūvu || yasmąu
|-
|-
| 1SG || maiš'''axhettiam''' || maiš'''irxhettiam'''
! Locative
| lilǣ || neniǣ || nunūvǣ || yasmātǣ
|-
|-
| 2SG || maiš'''axhença''' || maiš'''irxhença'''
! Instrumental
|-
| lileni || nenēni || nunauni || yasmaini
| 3SG || maiš'''axhetara''' || maiš'''irxhetara'''
|-
| 1DU || maiš'''axhendītim''' || maiš'''irxhendītim'''
|-
| 2DU || maiš'''axhendītis''' || maiš'''irxhendītis'''
|-
| 3DU || maiš'''axhendītara''' || maiš'''irxhendītara'''
|-
| 1PL || maiš'''axhetatim''' || maiš'''irxhetatim'''
|-
| 2PL || maiš'''axhetatis''' || maiš'''irxhetatis'''
|-
| 3PL || maiš'''axhetatra''' || maiš'''irxhetatra'''
|}
|}


===The optative and propositive moods===
<!-- ==Honorifics==
Optative and propositive moods are made starting from the same stem; these stem use the same terminations as regular (a-type verbs) present for the imperfective aspect and regular past for the perfective; propositive mood uses the imperative ones.
===Honorific pronouns===
====Second person====
The rules for second person pronouns are mostly fairly easy. There are usually two contexts: formal and informal.  


The stem is formed by taking the root with vowel lengthening and adding '''-eina-''' after consonants ('''-ouna-''' after '''l''') and '''-vūna-''' after vowels. Note that, while adding terminations, a is deleted between a single sonorant and a single non-sonorant consonant (e.g. 1sg propositive causative ''-einxhiṣam'' < ''-ein-a-xhiṣam'')
Formal pronouns are three and (in contemporary Chlouvānem) invariable for gender, but they vary for relative rank instead: '''nami''' is used towards a superior, '''tami''' towards one of the same rank, and '''ravi''' towards a lower ranked person (until around 6350, ''nani'' was strictly feminine and ''ravi'' strictly masculine, and the rules for all three varied also according to the relative genders). '''nanak''', '''tanak''', and '''raṇak''' are their respective dual forms.<br/>
Plural second person pronouns are usually two: '''yakaliyātam''' is used towards the representative of a specifically defined group - an institution or a company -, while '''yavyāta''' (but also, in not extremely formal styles, ''nami'') is used for less defined groups.


Example (''nāmvake'' “to crush, press”):
There are, however, more formal second-person pronouns with a limited use. All of these (here listed in Latin alphabetical order), unless noted, are morphologically nouns, but they are used with second person verbs anyway:
* Imperfective: exterior ''nāmveinu'', ''nāmveini'', ''nāmveinė'', … interior ''nāmveiniru'', …; causative ext. ''nāmveinaxhā'', …; caus. int. ''nāmveinirxhā'', …
* '''aveṣyotariri nami''' (locution with the pronoun ''nami'') is sometimes used towards the highest ranked non-religious superiors, if they are several ranks ahead: examples include commanders of a military brigade or presidents of a company. However, ''nami'' is in most cases respectful enough; it is however invariably used in the set phrase ''lālyu nanyau aveṣyotariri yaccechlašute nami'' "I humbly ask for your forgiveness".
* Perfective: ext. ''nāmveinau'', ''nāmveinei'', ''nāmveinitь'', … int. ''nāmveinirau'', …; caus. ext. ''nāmveinaxhlou'', ; caus. int. ''nāmveinirxhlou'',
* '''gopūrṭham''' is often used towards public/religious and military officials.
* Propositive: ext. ''nāmveinikṣam'', ''nāmveinikṣa'', ''nāmveinikṣai'', … int. ''nāmveinikuru'', …; caus. ext. ''nāmveinxhiṣam'', …; caus. int. ''nāmveinxhiuru'', ...
* '''gopūrṭhami brausa''' (or '''yobrausa''') are used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
* '''lalla yobrausa''' is used exclusively for the Great Inquisitor.
* '''ṣari''', nowadays mostly old-fashioned, was used by guests towards homeowners and also by soldiers towards their superiors. It also meant, aside from being a pronoun, "landowner" or "head of a non-religious state"; in contemporary Chlouvānem it mostly only survives as a vocative expression towards homeowners when used by guests<ref>It also survives as a morpheme in some words, most notably ''ṣarivāṇa'' "state, country".</ref>.
* '''ūttuka''' is today only used in parts of the Northeast (aside by fictional characters in historical settings), but until about 6300 was a common pronoun word used by servants towards their superiors, particularly landowners (it thus partially overlapped with ''ṣari'').
* '''yobrausa''' — see ''gopūrṭhami brausa'' above.


===The desiderative mood===


It is also important to note that it's increasingly common to simply use the vocative formula - given name plus ''lāma'' - instead of any pronoun in formal context: when speaking to a superior named Lārtāvi Vaihātiai ''Lælithiam'', in order to say a sentence like "have you already done (it)?", ''nami nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' and ''lælicham lāma nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' are both just as correct. The pronoun forms are more commonly used in other cases, particularly in the genitive.<br/>Note that ''lāma'' itself does <small>NOT</small> decline: only the noun does – e.g. ''lælichamom lāma lę emęlya'' "it has been given by me to you/Mr. Lælithiam".
The desiderative mood, unlike the optative, hypothetical, and subjunctive moods, conjugates in all tenses and aspects just like the indicative; the difference being the special stem it uses, formed with reduplication of the root plus '''-s''' (except for '''-ora-''' and '''-ьouš-''' verbs). The resulting stem conjugates as any root verb.


Reduplication adds the first consonant of the verb (except prefixes) and its first vowel (always oral short).There are however some special rules followed in reduplicating:
In '''informal''' contexts, the only basic morphological second-person pronoun is '''sāmi''', which has the dual form '''sanak''' and uses '''nami''' as the plural form (with plural agreement on verbs). However, there may be even more informal contexts where other nouns may be used: the prototypical example is among siblings, where '''blikā''' (dual ''blikāt'', plural ''blikai''), an endearing term for girls (think of Japanese ''-chan'' or ''-tan'') is used as a pronoun for and among sisters — e.g. ''blikā meyom umuṣeste tane<ref>''tane'' is a colloquial contraction of ''dām'' (interrogative particle) and ''nane'' (emphatic tag question particle).</ref>?'' meaning "did you ask mum or not?"; as for all nouns standing for pronouns, this is not a vocative expression as it declines for case - e.g. ''blikom emęliaṃte nāṭ!'' "I've already given it to you!"; other such pro-nouns used among siblings are '''lorkhās''' (for and among brothers; literally "guy", can be rude outside this context), '''nājhali''' (non-binary equivalent to "girl" and "boy" — somewhat rarer as even in general use it's a more neutral term than either ''blikā'' or ''lorkhās''), and even '''samin''' (literally "kid"). [[Chlouvānem/Names#Informal_names_.28laltihalen.C4.AB.29|Informal names]] are also sometimes used instead of pronouns among siblings, and they're more often than not used that way among close friends and ''kaleyai''<ref>A ''kaleya'' is a "spiritual friend" in Chlouvānem culture — this word can be translated with "best friend", but it also evokes particular religious meanings.</ref>.
* Aspirated stops are always reduplicated as unaspirated;
* '''g-''' is always reduplicated as '''h-''', except for a few irregular verbs;
* '''h-''' is reduplicated as '''k-''';
* '''k-''' as '''š-''';

* '''f-''' as '''p-''';
* '''l-''' in the initial clusters '''lk-''', '''lkh-''', '''lg-''', or '''lgh-''' reduplicates as '''n-'''.
* Initial clusters which begin with '''s-''', '''ṣ-''', '''š-''', or '''v-''' use the first consonant which is not one of them (but '''šv-''' reduplicates as '''š-''');

* Verbs with ablaut always have middle-grade ablaut; '''ṛ''' reduplicates as '''a''';

* Inverse-ablaut verbs have the consonant of the unreduced root but the reduced vowel;
* Roots beginning with vowels are regular, reduplicating the otherwise allophonic initial '''ʔ'''.
* Prefixes are added before the reduplicated root.
Final added '''-s''' has some special saṃdhi rules, too (in addition to the usual ones):
* '''-d-s''' and '''-dh-s''' both become '''-ts''' (always written so and never as *ç);
* After voiced stops, '''-s''' becomes '''-r''' and aspirated stops lose aspiration. '''-j-s''' and '''-jh-s''' both become '''-jl''';
* '''-š-s''' becomes '''-kṣ''';
* '''-y-s''' becomes '''-š''';
* '''-l-s''' becomes '''-lь''' when prevocalic and '''-lš''' when preconsonantal, but '''-rl-s''' always becomes '''-relь-'''.
Causative forms just add the causative endings, without further modifying the stem.


'''-ora-''' and '''-ьeiš-''' verbs use '''-oreka-''' and '''-ьeišca-''' respectively, without other modifications, but they're often substituted by ''infinitive + daudike'' constructions. In many of the northeastern and northwestern lands of the Inquisition, this analytic construction is used instead of the synthetic desiderative in almost any case.
====Third person====
In Chlouvānem, the third person pronouns – which are the demonstrative sets, most commonly the distal ''nanā'' – are not used for people; the name of the person referred to with the appropriate honorific title is used instead.


Examples of desiderative mood stems are:

Repetition of names is usually not considered strange in Chlouvānem, but there are a few ways to avoid excessive repetition. The most natural one is obviously to state the person once at the beginning as the topic and then have all following verbs agree with it through the trigger system.
* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)”, root ''peith-'' → ''pe-peith-s'' → ''pepeits-
''
* ''lgutake'' “to buy”, root ''lgut-'' → ''nu-lgot-s'' → ''nulgots-''
* ''khlunāke'' “to search, look for”, root ''khlu-'' → ''ku-khlu-s'' → ''kukhlus-
''
* ''nilyake'' “to think”, root ''nily-'' → ''ni-nely-s'' → ''ninelš-''
* ''tṛlake'' “to do”, root ''tṛl-'' → ''ta-tarl-s'' > ''tatarelь-''
* ''valde'' “to open”, root ''vald-'' → ''v-uld-s'' > ''vults-''




A few verbs have completely irregular stems:
Especially in contemporary Chlouvānem, the rank-neutral ''udhyāras'' (cf. "Comrade") is increasingly commonly used as a generic third person pronoun, though only after stating the name before.
* ''gyake'' “to be”: ''muñj-''
* ''lilke'' “to live”: ''lėlikṣ-''
* ''męlike'' “to give”: ''mimęñ-
''
* ''milke'' “to take”: ''mūṃchl-''.


===The necessitative mood===
===Honorific particles===
The necessitative mood is formed and conjugates much like the desiderative; it uses a stem formed by reduplication and adding '''-asya-''', with normal saṃdhi changes.
There are a few honorific particles - mostly of Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi origin - that are used to make names or nouns honorific:
* '''īvai''' makes a verb humble, and is put after a verb, too.
* '''nami''' denotes respect towards the trigger of the verb. It was common in the past alongside the honorific verb ''tilah'', but today it rarely used.
* '''yo-''' is a prefix for things pertaining to a honourable person, often used together with a verb with '''nami'''.
* '''dau-''' is a prefix that makes nouns honorific. -->


Examples:
==Numerals (''māltsāk'') ==
* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)”, → ''pepeithasya-''
Chlouvānem is one of the few human Calemerian languages - together with all other [[Lahob languages]] and a few ones of the southern hemisphere, as well as others like [[Qualdomelic#Numerals|Qualdomelic]] or vernaculars of the Inquisition which have had considerable Chlouvānem influence - with a pure duodecimal number system.
* ''khlunāke'' “to search, look for” → ''kukhlūvsya-''
* ''nilyake'' “to think” → ''ninelyasya-''
* ''valde'' “to open” → ''vuldasya-''


===The potential mood===
Numbers (sg ''māltsām'', pl. ''māltsāk'') have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. 1-4 have separate adverbial multiplicative forms, while all other ones have an invariable form used both as adverbial and 'adjectival' multiplicatives. Cardinals from 1 to Ɛ and their compounds decline for case (see below); collectives, multiplicatives, and fractionaries always decline, while ordinals are only declined if used without an accompanying noun. Distributives do not decline.
The potential mood also conjugates in all tenses and aspects and has a stem formed with initial reduplication. It is formed by adding '''-(e)nā-''' to the root and behaves as a fourth conjugation verb, adding an epenthetic -n before vocalic endings. Note that ''-r-nā-'' (like e.g. in all ''-ora-'' verbs) becomes '''-rṇā-''' due to saṃdhi.


Examples: ''peithake'' → ''pepeithnā-'' ; ''gṇyauke'' → ''gagṇyaunā-'' ; ''nilyake'' → ''ninelyenā-''.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
 
A special case of saṃdhi occurs in roots which end in a single '''-g''' or '''-k''': this consonant becomes '''-gh''' and the '''-n''' in the suffix becomes retroflex, e.g. ''mūmikke'' "to dance", root ''mūmik-'' > ''mumūmighṇā-'' ; ''dilge'' “to pour", root ''dig-'' > ''dideghṇā-''.
 
===The permissive mood===
The permissive mood also conjugates in all tenses and aspects and is formed, without reduplication, by vowel lengthening and adding '''-ippu-''' before consonantal endings and '''-īpr-''' before vocalic ones. Note that in the present tense, dual terminations use ''-ippu-'' and the ''-dā-'' ending (not ''-odā-''); for the third plural, ''-ippuyąt'' is the commonly used form: ''-ipryąt'' is attested but extremely archaic.
 
Examples: ''mišake'' → ''mīšippu-'' > ''mīšipru'' "I am allowed to see", ''mīšippum'' “I was allowed to see”.
 
Bisyllabic roots which have as their second syllable an unstressed vowel between two consonants that may form an allowed cluster (thus sonorant-vowel-stop/fricative, except ''-m-velar'') lose this vowel while adding the suffix, e.g. ''hañilke'' > ''hūlñippu-'' ('''-ñl-''' → '''-lñ-''' is a fairly regular saṃdhi change).
 
===Secondary moods: evidentiality===
The four secondary moods expressing evidentiality are formed in two different ways. One of them has a special set of endings, while the other three add a morpheme to the verb. They are only used in the indicative, desiderative, necessitative, permissive, and potential moods, plus in first person imperatives.
 
The ''visual evidential'' is made by adding '''-mī''' at the end of the verb, e.g. ''yąlėmī'' "it is [being] eaten (I see it)", ''yąlėçamī'' "(s)he eats (I see it)". The ending is actually a worn down version of ''mešė'', meaning "it is seen".
 
The ''first inferential'', which refers to any non-visual inference that is probably true (often translatable with "apparently", "looks like"), is formed by special endings, which replace the normal ones (example with ''pūnake'' "to work"):
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! !! Present !! Past !! Perfect !! Future
! Digit<sub>12</sub> !! <small>Base 10</small> !! Cardinal !! Ordinal !! Collective !! Distributive !! Adv./Multiplicative !! Fractionary
|-
|-
| 1SG || pūn'''itasu''' || pūn'''itto''' || upūn'''itenim''' || pūn'''išenim'''
! 0
| 0 || '''ajrā''' || <small>''(ajrāyende)''</small> || rowspan=2 | — || <small>''(ajrehaicē)''</small> || <small>''(māgajrā)''</small> || —
|-
|-
| 2SG || pūna'''se''' || pūn'''itte''' || upūn'''itenis''' || pūn'''išenis'''
! 1
| 1 || '''emibe'''<br/>''emi'' || lahīla || emibhaicē || māgemibe <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>emibarvīm || lahīlvāṭ
|-
|-
| 3SG || pūna'''te''' || pūn'''itti''' || upūn'''itena''' || pūn'''išena'''
! 2
| 2 || '''dani'''|| hælinaika || danyatām || danihaicē || māgdani <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>danirvīm || hælinaivāṭ
|-
|-
| 1DU || pūna'''dāsu''' || pūna'''daitu''' || upūn'''itanda''' || pūn'''iṣṭāsu'''
! 3
| 3 || '''pāmvi''' || pāmvende || pāmvyatām || pāmvihaicē || māmpāmvi <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>pāmvirvīm || pāmvendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 2DU || pūna'''dāse''' || pūna'''daiti''' || upūn'''itandes''' || pūn'''iṣṭāse'''
! 4
| 4 || '''nęlte''' || nęltende || nęltitām || nęltehaicē || māgnęlte <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>nęltarvīm || nęltendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 3DU || pūna'''dātte''' || pūna'''daite''' || upūn'''itanit''' || pūn'''iṣṭātte'''
! 5
| 5 || '''šulka''' || šulkende || šulkatām || šulkhaicē || šulkarvīm || šulkendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 1PL || pūn'''itami''' || pūn'''ichlīm''' || upūn'''itemna''' || pūn'''iṣyāmna'''
! 6
| 6 || '''tulūɂa''' || tulūɂende || tulūɂatām || tulūɂihaicē || tulūrvīm || tulūɂendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 2PL || pūn'''itai''' || pūn'''ichlīs''' || upūn'''iteṃša''' || pūn'''iṣyāṃša'''
! 7
| 7 || '''chīka''' || chīcænde || chīcætām || chīcihaicē || chīkarvīm || chīcændvāṭ
|-
|-
| 3PL || pūn'''itet''' || pūn'''itāl''' || upūn'''itena''' || pūn'''iṣyāna'''
! 8
|}
| 8 || '''mbula''' || mbulende || mbulatām || mbulhaicē || mbularvīm || mbulendvāṭ
Interior forms add these endings after ''-ir-'' (e.g. ''dældirte'' "(s)he apparently speaks"); causative forms add them after ''-axh-'' for interior verbs and ''-iraxh-'' for exterior ones, e.g. ''maišaxhite'' "(s)he apparently shows", ''maiširaxhite'' "(s)he apparently learns".
 
The ''second inferential'' has a similar function to the first inferential, but the situation is unlikely to be true (translatable e.g. with "might/apparently... but probably don't/doesn't"); it is formed by adding '''-mū''' after the first inferential endings, e.g. ''pūnatemū'' "(s)he might be working, but probably isn't". This is a worn down version of ''mbu gu'' (or not).
 
The ''reported'' evidential marks something the speaker does not know first hand; it is formed by adding '''-kye''' after the normal endings, e.g. ''pūnėkye'' "[I was told/I heard] (s)he works". The ending is a worn down version of ''kulė'' (it is said).
 
=== The consequential secondary moods===
The two consequential secondary moods can actually be tertiary moods, as they can be added to evidential secondary moods too.
 
The consequential mood of cause is formed by adding '''-ę''' + '''pian(e)-''' to the verb stem. For example ''pūnu'' → ''pūnępianu'' (given that I work, ...); ''pupūṃśi'' → ''pupūṃsępiani'' (given that you want to work, ...), or ''pūnitti'' → ''pūnępianitti'' (given that, apparently, (s)he worked, ...).
 
The consequential mood of opposition is similarly formed by adding '''-ę''' + '''gām(u)-''' to the verb stem. For example ''pūnu'' → ''pūnęgāmu'' (even if I work, ...); ''pupūṃśi'' → ''pupūṃsęgāmi'' (even if you want to work, ...), or ''pūnitti'' → ''pūnęgāmitti'' (even if, apparently, (s)he worked, ...).
 
===The interrogative secondary mood===
The interrogative mood is formed in a different way compared to the other secondary moods. It adds '''-i''' to the verb stem, then all personal endings, then (in unprefixed verbs) those marking voice, and finally '''-thā''' at the very end. For example: ''pūnyethā''? (does (s)he work?), ''yųliyątthā''? (are they being eaten?), ''yųliyątçathā''? (do they eat?).
 
===Participles and adverbials===
'''Participles''' are formed by suffixing the appropriate set of participle endings to the stem. The set marks the tense/aspect combination; the stem may be in indicative, necessitative, desiderative, permissive, or potential mood, plus any secondary evidential mood.
 
The endings are (in patient-trigger/common voice):
* Present: exterior '''-susas''', ''-susam'', ''-susah'' — interior '''-sūnis''', ''-sūnim'', ''-sūneh''
* Past: exterior '''-kyas''', ''-kyam'', ''-kyah'' — interior '''-kinis''', ''-kinim'', ''-kineh''
* Perfect: exterior '''-cās''', ''-cām'', ''-cāh'' — interior '''-cænas''', ''-cænam'', ''-cænah''
* Future: exterior '''-iṣvas''', ''-iṣvam'', ''-iṣvah'' — interior '''-iṣunis''', ''-iṣunim'', ''-iṣuneh''
 
Voice endings are inserted after the participle, but after all prefixes in prefixed stems. Saṃdhi is fairly regular, but direct case ''-s'' is deleted except with the dative-trigger affix. Examples: ''męlьsusas'', ''męlьsusaça'' but ''primęlьsusas'', ''priçamęlьsusas''.
 
Note that voice endings, if final, are always at the end, even if the participle is inflected for case: direct ''męlьsusakæ'' (the one benefacted by giving) but dative ''męlьsusuikæ'' (to the one benefacted by giving).
 
'''Adverbials''' are formed just like participles by adding a set of endings to the stem. There are two types of adverbials: '''homofocals''', used when the trigger of the adverbial and of the main verb are the same, and '''heterofocals''', used when they are different.
* Present: homofocal '''-lie''' (ext), '''-līne''' (int) — heterofocal '''-nikai''' (ext), '''-ninėk''' (int)
* Past: homofocal '''-lūte''' (ext), '''-lūnde''' (int) — heterofocal '''-nakte''' (ext), '''-nalget''' (int)
* Perfect: homofocal '''-līse''', (ext) '''-līmen''' (int) — heterofocal '''-nikṣe''' (ext), '''-nikñe''' (int)
* Future: homofocal '''-iṣre''' (ext), '''-iṣrāṇi''' (int) — heterofocal '''-iṣṇei''' (ext), '''-iṣāṇin''' (int).
 
Like participles, adverbials have voice affixes after them, but before the root in prefixed verbs. A palatalized consonant becomes a consonant followed by '''i'''. Examples: ''męlilie'', ''męlilieça'', ''primęlilie'', ''priçamęlilie''.
 
===Irregular verbs===
Chlouvānem has eight major irregular verbs, plus other three with peculiar irregularities. The eight major irregular verbs all have different stems in either past and perfect or both; the verb ''gyake'' (to be) is extremely irregular due to suppletion.<br/>The other seven major suppletive verbs are (regular stems are <small>in smaller size</small>):
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Verb !! Present stem (without ablaut) !! Past stem !! Perfect stem
! 9
| 9 || '''moja''' || mojende || mojatām || mojihaicē || mojarvīm || mojendvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''einerke'' (to float (multidir.)) || einer- || paiṇṣ- || iʔīneṣ-
! ᘔ
| 10 || '''tålda''' || tåldende || tåldatām || tåldihaicē || tåldarvīm || tåldendvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''flulke'' (to go, walk (monodir.)) || flun- || māṃs-a- || thåln-
! Ɛ
| 11 || '''vælden''' || vældinde || vælditām || vældihaicē || vældirvīm || vældindvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''keṃšake'' (to use) || caṃš-a- || keṃš-a- || <small>ikeṃš-a-</small>
! 10
| 12 || '''māmei''' || māminde || māmintām || māmeihaicē || māmairvīm || māmindvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''khilyake'' (to write) || khily-a- || paṃšy-a- || <small>ikhily-a-</small>
! 11
| 13 || '''emibumaye''' || emibumayinde || emibumaintām || emibumaihaicē || emibumairvīm || emibumayindvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''milke'' (to take, seize, catch, capture) || milūk-/milk- || milk- || ilak-
! 12
| 14 || '''danimaye''' || danimayinde || danimaintām || danimaihaicē || danimairvim || danimayindvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''mṛcce'' (to run (monodir.)) || mṛc- || pañc- || <small>amṛc-</small>
! 13
| 15 || '''pamihælī''' || pamihælīnde || pamihælītām || pamihælīhaicē || pamihælīrvīm || pamihælīndvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''yahike'' (to read; <small>''arch.:'' to understand</small>) || yahь- || taiši- || ašahь-
! 14
|}
| 16 || '''māminęlte'''|| māminęltende || māminęltitām || māminęltehaicē || māminęltarvīm || māmiynęltendvāṭ
Note that ''paiṇṣ-'', ''māṃṣ-'', ''paṃšy-'', ''pañc-'', and ''taiši-'' all use the '''present''' endings instead of the '''past''' ones.
 
Further irregularities are found in the present indicative and subjunctive for a total of five verbs:
* The singular present indicative forms of ''flulke'' are regular ''flonu'' for 1st person but then irregular 2nd and 3rd ''flin'' and ''fliven'' respectively.
* ''milke'' uses the stem ''milk-'' also in the singular present indicative: ''milku'', ''milki'', ''milkė''.
* The three verbs ''mālake'' (keep together), ''yacce'' (to ask, to request (humble)), and ''chlašake'' (to do (humble)) have the irregular 1st person singular present subjunctive forms ''målip'', ''yåšip'', and ''chlåšip'' respectively.
 
A few verbs have irregular stems in some moods:
* ''flulke'' and ''męlike'' have the irregular optative stems ''fleina-'' and ''męliouna-'' (instead of expected *fluneina- and *męlieina-).
 
====The verb "to be" (gyake)====
The verb "to be" is suppletive as it uses various different stems (from Proto-Lahob ''*gəjó'', ''*woŋ—*uŋ'', ''*mōws'' respectively) and irregularly — for example, the future indicative is morphologically a present.
 
Note that the indicative present is very rarely used, as the copula is usually dropped in most cases; when used with the meaning of "to have" (e.g. ''lili mæn tulūʔa yambras uñyąt'' "I have six pears" (lit.: I <small>TOPIC</small> six pears are)) it is considered better not to drop it, but it is often done nevertheless in common speech.
 
=====Indicative mood=====
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Person !! Present !! Past !! Perfect !! Future
|-
| 1SG || valu || mos || egyam || mavū
|-
|-
| 2SG || vali || moçi || egyes || mavei
! 15
| 17 || '''māmišulka''' || māmišulkende || māmišulkatām || māmišulkhaicē || māmišulkarvīm || māmišulkendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 3SG || væl || mitь || egya || mavė
! 16
| 18 || '''māmivælka''' || māmivælkende || māmivælkatām || māmivælkihaicē || māmivælkarvīm || māmivælkendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 1DU || undām || mordam || egyonda || maudām
! 17
| 19 || '''māmichīka''' || māmichīcænde || māmichīcætām || māmichīcihaicē || māmichīkarvīm || māmichīcændvāṭ
|-
|-
| 2DU || undās || mordas || egyodes || maudās
! 18
| 20 || '''māmimbula''' || māmimbulende || māmimbulyatām || māmimbulhaicē || māmimbularvīm || māmimbulendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 3DU || undau || mordu || egyot || maudāvo
! 19
| 21 || '''māmimoja''' || māmimojende || māmimojatām || māmimojihaicē || māmimojarvīm || māmimojendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 1PL || ummi || molīm || egyamia || maumui
! 1ᘔ
| 22 || '''māmitålda''' || māmitåldende || māmitåldatām || māmitåldihaicē || māmitåldarvīm || māmitåldendvāṭ
|-
|-
| 2PL || ulki || molīs || egyasia || maukui
! 1Ɛ
| 23 || '''māmivælden''' || māmivældinde || māmivælditām || māmivældihaicē || māmivældirvīm || māmivældindvāṭ
|-
|-
| 3PL || uñyąt || moli || egya || mavyąt
! 20
| 24 || '''hælmāmei''' || hælmāminde || hælmāmintām || hælmāmeihaicē || hælmāmairvīm || hælmāmindvāṭ
|}
|}
As for the two forms for one, ''emi'' is used in disjunctive counting (e.g. count-ins or countdowns) while ''emibe'' is used elsewhere. Compounds always have the full form, i.e. forms such as *hælmāmyemi do not exist.<br/>Some compound words, especially technical and scientific ones, use [[Lällshag]] morphemes for the quantities from 1 to ᘔ (though from 5 onwards they're rarer): ''mån-''&nbsp;1, ''yūn-''&nbsp;2, ''lyāš-''&nbsp;3, ''alan-''&nbsp;4, ''tamb-''&nbsp;5, ''jiruṇ-'' or ''ciruṇ-''&nbsp;6, ''tulyæn-''&nbsp;7, ''neim-''&nbsp;8, ''šid-''&nbsp;9, ''abar-''&nbsp;ᘔ.
Numbers from 20<sub>12</sub> above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes, like 21<sub>12</sub> <small>(25<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''hælmāmyemibe'', and then ''hælmāmidani'', ''hælmāmipāmvi'', and so on. Note that other compounds with 6 use -tulūɂa and not -vælka as in 16<sub>12</sub>.<br/>
The other dozens are:
: '''30''' <small>(36<sub>10</sub>)</small> pāmvimāmei
: '''40''' <small>(48<sub>10</sub>)</small> nęltemāmei
: '''50''' <small>(60<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulkmāmei
: '''60''' <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> vælknihæla
: '''70''' <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmyāvælka (regionally ''chīcæmāmei'', particularly in the East)
: '''80''' <small>(96<sub>10</sub>)</small> mbulmāmei
: '''90''' <small>(108<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojemāmei
: '''ᘔ0''' <small>(120<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldimāmei
: '''Ɛ0''' <small>(132<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmimīram
: and '''100''' <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> nihæla.
The apparent irregularities in the words for 60<sub>12</sub>, 70<sub>12</sub>, and Ɛ0<sub>12</sub> are explained by etymology: ''vælka'' is the reflex of PLB *wewənko, which meant “half”, thus ''vælknihæla'' is “half hundred” and ''māmyāvælka'' is “twelve on half”; ''māmimīram'' is literally “twelve [less] from ahead”. 13<sub>12</sub> originally meant "one finger/three (''pāmvi'', the word for three, also meant "finger" in PLB (*pāmwəj) - whence also the Chlouvānem word for "finger", ''pamuvis'' (< PLB *pamwəjis)) in the second [dozen]", where the ''-hælī'' part is a worn form of ''hælinaika''.


=====Other primary moods=====
Numbers from 100<sub>12</sub> to ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are still compounds, e.g. ''nihælaimibe'', ''nihæladani'', and so on. Note that 160<sub>12</sub> is most commonly ''nihæltulūɂa'', but the more literary form ''nihælvælka'' may still be heard.<br/>
All other primary mood formations use irregular stems, except for the subjunctive, hypothetical, and imperative which are the only ones using ''gya-'' as in the infinitive: ''jeiv-a-'' for the optative and propositive, ''muñj-a-'' for the desiderative, ''mokṣy-a-'' for the necessitative, ''ginā-'' for the potential and ''maippu-/maipr-'' for the permissive.
The other dozenal hundreds are:
: '''200''' <small>(288<sub>10</sub>)</small> daninihæla
: '''300''' <small>(432<sub>10</sub>)</small>  pāmvinihæla
: '''400''' <small>(576<sub>10</sub>)</small>  nęltenihæla
: '''500''' <small>(720<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulknihæla
: '''600''' <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> tulūnihæla
: '''700''' <small>(1008<sub>10</sub>)</small> chīcænihæla
: '''800''' <small>(1152<sub>10</sub>)</small> mbulnihæla
: '''900''' <small>(1296<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojanihæla
: '''ᘔ00''' <small>(1440<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldanihæla
: '''Ɛ00''' <small>(1584<sub>10</sub>)</small> vældenihæla.
'''1.000''' <small>(1728<sub>10</sub>)</small> is ''tildhā'' and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. '''1.001''' ''tildhā emibe'', '''6.2ᘔ9''' <small>(10785<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''tulūɂa tildhā daninihælatåldimāmimoja''.<br/>
Note that 2.000<sub>12</sub> may be either one of ''tildhāt'', ''dani tildhā'', or (only emphatically) ''dani tildhāt''.


Present tense or imperfective aspect of all other primary moods included as examples in this table:
The other divisions - numbers over ƐƐ.ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are based on groups of two digits: the two most commonly used ones in common speech are '''1.00.000''' <small>(248.832<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''raicē'' - and '''1.00.00.000''' <small>(35.831.808<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''lallaraicē''.
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Person !! Imperative !! Subjunctive !! Hypothetical !! Optative !! Propositive !! Desiderative !! Necessitative !! Potential !! Permissive
|-
| 1SG || gyekṣam || gyop || gyatiam || jeivu || jeivikṣam || muñju || mokṣyu || ginau || maipru
|-
| 2SG || gyekṣa || gyayeap || gyaça || jeivi || jeivikṣa || muñji || mokṣyi || ginai || maipri
|-
| 3SG || gyekṣai || gyāsi || gyatṛ || jeivė || jeivikṣai || muñje || mokṣyė || ginai || maiprė
|-
| 1DU || — || gyombu || gyadītim || jeivodām || — || muñjodām || mokṣyodām || ginaudām || maippudām
|-
| 2DU || — || gyombe || gyadītis || jeivodās || — || muñjodās || mokṣyodās || ginaudās || maippudās
|-
| 3DU || — || gyombap || gyadītṛ || jeivodāvo || — || muñjodāvo || mokṣyodāvo || ginaudāvo || maippudāvo
|-
| 1PL || gyekṣumi || gyecham || gyantim || jeivamui || jeivikṣumi || muñjamui || mokṣyamui || gināmui || maippumui
|-
| 2PL || gyekṣus || gyāsi || gyantis || jeivakui || jeivikṣus || muñjakui || mokṣyakui || ginākui || maippukui
|-
| 3PL || gyekṣat || gyāsi || gyantṛ || jeivyąt || jeivikṣat || muñjyąt || mokṣyąt || gināyąt || maippuyąt<br/><small>''maipryąt'' attested but archaic</small>
|}


===Analytic constructions and auxiliary verbs===
The next two groups have their separate words, but are quantities rarely used in common speech: '''1.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>9</sup>) <small>(5.159.780.352<sub>10</sub>)</small> is a ''taiskaucis'' and '''1.00.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>11</sup>) <small>(743.008.370.688<sub>10</sub>)</small> a ''lallataiskaucis''. The words ''khorādi'' (12<sup>7</sup>, i.e. synonym of lallaraicē), ''yaṣmūn'' (12<sup>11</sup>, i.e. lallataiskaucis), ''iriakas'' (12<sup>13</sup>), ''mairāṇa'' or ''lalleriakas'' (12<sup>15</sup>), ''nirāvah'' (12<sup>17</sup>), and ''sṝva'' or ''lallanirāvah'' (12<sup>19</sup>) were introduced in Classical-era texts, but are almost never used today. However, they form the base for the scientific measurement system's prefixes.
Chlouvānem uses many analytic constructions - including auxiliary and compound verbs - in order to convey some shades of meaning. Most of these use either a participle or the infinitive as the form of the lexical verb:
* ''perfect participle'' in the needed voice + ''gyake'' in the past or future tense: compound construction used for pluperfect and future perfect. It is not wrong to use it with a present tense, but the meaning does not change from the bare perfect.<br/> Note that, for the pluperfect, the bare perfect is often used instead, both in literature as in common speech.
** ''uyųlcąça mos'' "I had eaten"
** ''uyųlcąça mavū'' "I will have eaten"
* ''present participle'' in the needed voice + ''gyake'' in the needed tense: compound construction used for the progressive aspect in the three tenses (present, past, future). In the present, the form of ''gyake'' is omitted for the third person, or for all persons if a pronoun is present.
** ''yųlasusąça valu'' "I am eating"
** ''yųlasusąça mos'' "I was eating"
** ''yųlasusąça mavū'' "I will be eating"
* ''infinitive'' + ''ñeaʔake'' (to be used to): compound construction used for a habitual action in present, past, or future tense. It is not used with motion verbs in the present, as the multidirectional verb already unambiguously has this meaning.
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñeaʔuça'' "I am used to read every evening"
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñeaʔaṃça'' "I used to read every evening"
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñeaʔiṣyaṃça'' "I will be used to read every evening"
* ''infinitive'' + ''nartaflulke'' (to reach): to come to X, to end up X-ing, to result in X-ing
** ''yųlakenartaçafliven'' "(s)he ended up eating"
** ''lañšorakenartaflunirųt'' "they ended up marrying each other"
* ''infinitive'' (or more formally ''perfect participle'') + ''kitte'' (to put): to keep X-ed:
** ''valdekitė'' / ''uvaldacās kitė'' "it is kept opened"
* ''infinitive'' + either ''smitiāke'' (to hang from) or ''maitiāke'' (to be in front of): prospective aspect, to be about to X
** ''yųlakesmiçatimu'' "I am about to eat"
** ''yahikemaitimė'' "it is about to be read"
* ''infinitive'' + ''māyammišake'' (to look further away): to let X
** ''yahikemāyaṃçamešuisė'' "I let you read"
* ''infinitive'' + ''mālchake'' (to run (multidirectional)): to keep X-ing (less formal alternative to ''trān-'' prefixed verbs)
**  ''yahikemālchuçait'' "I keep reading it" (synonym of ''trānçayahivet'')


==Pronouns==
Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with ''-ende'' (''-inde'' after ''-m'' or for Ɛ<sub>12</sub>) for ordinals, ''-tām'' for collectives, ''-haicē'' for distributives, ''-rvīm'' for adverbials/multiplicatives (prefixed ''māg-'' for the separate adverbial forms), and ''-endvāṭ/-indvāṭ'' for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-2 retain all irregular suppletive forms, e.g. ''hælmāmilahīla'' 21<sub>12</sub>st (25<sub>10</sub>th); ''hælmāmihælinaika'' 22<sub>12</sub>nd (26<sub>10</sub>th).
Chlouvānem has a series of pronouns which are irregular when compared to other nouns, yet they follow a mostly similar pattern among themselves. As with nouns and adjectives, in Chlouvānem there is mostly no difference between possessive and demonstrative pronouns and adjectives. Note that ''pronouns'' here are defined as a morphological category, as there are many pronominal locutions or nouns acting as pronouns in the Chlouvānem honorific system. Familiar and neutral styles of Chlouvānem speech use these only.


Standard Chlouvānem as spoken today uses the following pronouns:
Finally, there are few other cardinals commonly used in speech: ''vālhælya'' , ''vālpāmvya'' , ''vālnęlca'' , ''vālšulca'' , and ''vāltulūya'' . The forms ''vālchīca'', ''vālambulya'' (or ''vālumbulya''), and ''vālmojya'' are used in telling the time only and obsolete otherwise, while other similar forms are sparingly attested in older mathematical texts, but periphrastical constructions such as ''tulūɂa hælinaivāṭ no'' (or, sometimes, ''- vælka no'') are more commonly heard and used nowadays. A form that, however, is sometimes found up to the present day is ''vālhælnihæla'', meaning 160<sub>12</sub> (216<sub>10</sub>), i.e. one dozenal hundred and a half.
* 1st person '''lili''' (sg.), '''lileidi''' (dual), and '''mayin''' (pl.).
* 2nd person '''sāmi''' (sg.), '''sāmeidi''' (dual), and '''nagin''' (pl.).
* 3rd person ''parrot'' '''tami''' (sg.), '''tameidi''' (dual), and '''taṃšān''' (pl.).
* 3rd person ''dragon'' '''tayuši''' (sg.) and '''taimāsi''' (pl.), and 3rd person ''lotus'' '''tayumi''' (sg.) and '''taimām''' (pl.) — they are only distinct from the ''parrot'' forms in direct, accusative, and ergative; ''tameidi'' is used as dual for all three genders.
* Reflexive '''demi''' (mandatory for 3rd person, commonly used also for 1st and 2nd).


The pronouns doubling as adjectives are:
====Use of fractionary numbers====
* Three demonstrative series, all declining for gender but not for number: proximal '''nenė''' (parrot), '''nenayes''' (dragon), '''nenayem''' (lotus); medial '''nunū''' (p.), '''numves''' (d.), '''numvem''' (l.); distal '''nanā''' (p.), '''nanās''' (d.), '''nanām''' (l.).
Fractionary numbers (except ''vāl-'' ones) are used to express non-integers just like any other quantity. Simple ones such as 0,6 (½) are the basic fractionary number - in this case ''hælinaivāṭ'' (note that, outside mathematics, ''danyāmita'' is the preferred term for "half", both in metaphorical (''lilyā viṣam danyāmita'' "my other half") and non-metaphorical uses (''alāvi danyāmita'' "half of the bottle")); other examples are 0,3 (¼) ''nęltendvāṭ'' and 0,4 () ''pāmvendvāṭ''.<br/>
* The possessives: '''liliā''' (''lilem, liles''); '''meyā''' (''meyem, meyes''); '''sāmiā''' (''sāmim, sāmes''); '''negā''' (''negem, neges''); '''tamiā''' (''tamim, tames''); '''tašñā''' (''tašñem, tašñes''); '''demiā''' (''demim, demes'').
With more complex fractions, the smallest part (negative power of twelve) is stated - the three commonly found are 1/12 (''māmindvāṭ''), 1/144 (''nihælendvāṭ''), and 1/1728 (''tildhaindvāṭ''). For example, 0,82 is ''mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ'' and 0,7ᘔ6 is ''chīcænihælamāmimīraṃtulūɂa tildhaindvāṭ''; sometimes, "0, then" (mīram) may be added: ''ajrā mīram mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ''.
<small>Note that both the demonstrative and the possessives are often not declined for gender in common speech in certain areas, most notably the densely populated area of the Lower Plains, including ''Līlasuṃghāṇa, Līlta, Galiākina, Ilėnimarta'', and a few areas near ''Līṭhalyinām'', ''Talliė'', and ''Lāltaṣveya'' — an area inhabited by around 100 million people. This also happens in and near ''Līlikanāna'', fourth largest city of the Inquisition, largest in the Far East.</small>


In addition, '''yani''' is an emphatic pronoun not properly part of common speech (''demi'' is used instead) but sometimes found in high style. Archaic Chlouvānem had a demonstrative series consisting of proximal '''ami''' (''em, es''), medial '''uteni''' (''utam, utas''), and distal '''āteni''' (''ātam, ātas''), which declined in use throughout Classical times, when they were replaced by the newer ''nenė — nunū — nanā'' forms.
With a non-fractionary portion that is not zero, instead of ''mīram'', ''smurā'' (full, integer) is used - e.g. 2,307 is usually said as ''dani smurā pāmvinihælchīka tildhaindvāṭ''.


=== Personal pronouns ===
====Declensions of cardinal numbers====
'''Singular'''
Some cardinal numbers are declined for case, but this is usually only done in formal Chlouvānem. In informal Chlouvānem, either only ''emibe'' is declined, or are all numerals up to ''vælden'', plus ''nihæla''. Compounds of these are usually not declined. The words ''tildhā'', ''(lalla)raicē'', and ''(lalla)taiskaucis'' are always declined, but they are fully nouns.
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! 1sg !! Singular !! 2sg !! Singular !! refl !! Singular
! rowspan=2 | Case !! rowspan=2 | ''emibe'' !! Dual paradigm !! i-paradigm !! a-paradigm !! en-paradigm
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || '''lili''' || || '''sāmi''' || || '''demi'''
! <small>''dani''</small> !! ''pāmvi'', ''nęlte''</small><ref>''nęlte'' has the stem ''nęlc-'' wherever ''pāmvi'' has ''-vy-'', i.e. accusatives ''pāmvyu, nęlcu''.</ref> !! <small>5 to 10<ref>''chīka'' has the stem ''chīcæ-'' before consonants.</ref></small> !! <small>''vælden'' only</small>
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || læl (-æl) || || saim (-isė) || || deim (-idė)
! Direct<br/>Vocative
| '''emibe''' || '''dani''' || '''pāmvi''' || '''šulka''' || '''vælden'''
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || lį (-elī) || || sąi (-ąsī) || || dęi (-ędī)
! Accusative
| emiyu || daneṣa || pāmvyu || šulku || vældu
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || liliā || || sāmiā || || demiā
! Ergative
| emeis || daneya || pāmvyes || šulkes || vældes
|-
|-
| '''Translative''' || liñ || || sāñ || || deñ
! Genitive
| emibī || dañva || pāmvi<ref>''nęlte'' has the form ''nęlci''.</ref> || šulki || vældi
|-
|-
| '''Exessive''' || litь || || sātь || || detь
! Translative
| emiban || danaus || pāmvin || šulkan || vældanna
|-
|-
| '''Essive''' || lęsь || || sąsь || || dęsь
! Exessive
| emibat || danebhan || pāmvit || šulkat || vældanta
|-
|-
| '''Dative''' || liū || || sāyū || || deyū
! Essive
| emibą || danīgin || pāmvyą || šulką || vældąs
|-
|-
| '''Ablative''' || lųu || || sāhų || || dehų
! Dative
| emibå || danaus || pāmvyå || šulkå || vældå
|-
|-
| '''Locative''' || liė || || sāyė || || deyė
! Ablative
|}
| emiyų || danebhan || pāmvyų || šulkų || vældų
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! (parrot) !! Singular !! (dragon) !! Singular !! (lotus) !! Singular
! Locative
| emiye || danīgin || pāmvye || šulke || vælde
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || '''tami''' || || '''tayuši''' || || '''tayumi'''
! Instrumental
|-
| emīp || danebhan || pāmvip || šulkip || vældampa
| '''Accusative''' || taim (-et) || || temuis (-et) || || temum (-et)
|}
|-
 
| '''Ergative''' || tę (-) || || tęvis (-) || || tęvum (-)
=== Use of numerals===
'''Cardinal numerals''' may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.
* In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put '''before''' the noun and the noun is always '''singular''' (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. ''emibe yujam'' (one lotus flower); ''dani māra'' (two mango fruits); ''pāmvi haloe'' (three names), ''vælden ñaiṭa'' (eleven stars), and so on.
* If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in '''genitive singular''' instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: ''yujami emibe'' (one lotus flower), ''māri dani'' (two mango fruits), ''haleni pāmvi'' (three names), ''ñaiṭi vælden'' (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. ''marti pāmvi'' (three cities) but ''marte pāmvye'' (in the three cities).<br/>This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
* "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: ''dani māra'' or ''māri dani'' are both as correct as ''dani mārāt'' and ''māreva dani'' - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning; the dual form alone does not give particular emphasis to the number, while using the numeral, at least in formal styles, already gives more emphasis (intermediate to the two abovementioned forms). Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.
 
Note, though, the structure "''nihæle'' + genitive of a noun + a cardinal numeral", used for expressing percentage (dozenally), e.g. ''nihæle laili hælmāmei'' "20% of people".
 
'''Ordinal numerals''' are regular attributive adjective-like words that precede nouns - e.g. ''hælinaika kita'' "second house". They do not decline if are used together with a noun, but they can also be used alone (e.g. ''hælinaika'' "the second one"), in which case they decline for case and number, as if they were ''-eh'' nouns (''-a'' for 1st and 2nd), e.g. ''mojendesām ukulate'' "it has been told to those in ninth position".
 
'''Collective numerals''' (which decline as regular ''-ām'' nouns) are most commonly found with the meaning of "a group consisting of X ...", therefore implying greater cohesiveness than using the cardinal number implies. A common example of the subtle meaning change is between the sentences ''chīka lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a cardinal) and ''chīcætām lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a collective): both mean "seven ''lalāruṇai'' hit", but in the latter sentence the action is implied to be a coordinate act of all seven animals, while in the former they either hit randomly or the coordination of the action is not specified (or not specification-worthy). This is also the most common meaning with pluralia tantum, as commonly heard with ethnonyms (which are all plural only in Chlouvānem), e.g. ''šulkatām chlǣvānem'' "[a group of] five Chlouvānem people".<br/>
They can also be found, context-dependent, used with the meaning of "all X of..." - in a sentence such as e.g. ''mbulatām lejīn dilu liju lilejlaikate'' "all eight singers wanted to sing the same song" - or with the meaning of "X sets of" with singularia tantum - e.g. ''pāmvyatām hærṣūs'' "three pairs of lips" (but note that colloquial Chlouvānem increasingly often uses the cardinals here, e.g. ''pāmvi hærṣūs'').<br/>
The collective numerals for 0 and 1 (''ajrāṇṭām'' and ''emibutām'' respectively) are not included in the table above because they do not exist in practical use; however, they are sporadically found in poetry and literature, referring to people and with the meaning of "a group where only one/no one is ...", e.g. ''ajrāṇṭām tadhusmausīn'' "a group where no one is honest". Similarly, collectives for ''vāl-'' numbers (e.g. ''vālpāmvyantām'' "a group consisting of 2½ ...") exist, but are virtually unused. ''danyatām'', like ''dani'', may be use together with either a singular or a dual noun.
 
In some cases, the choice between a collective and a cardinal is stylistic. While for example concepts such as "we are..." or "I have ... children" do normally use the collective (e.g. ''tulūɂatām ñæltah jalim'' "we are six sisters/a group of six reciprocal brothers and sisters"; ''lili mæn nęltitām nūrya'' "I have four children"), even if using a cardinal isn't wrong, in a sentence such as "there are X people" both versions are found, with the collective-using sentence (e.g. ''dvārma vælditāmą lilęs virā'' "in the room there are eleven people") being perceived as more formal than the more colloquially heard cardinal-using version (i.e. ''dvārma vældąs lilęs virā'').
 
'''Distributive numerals''' are indeclinable adjective-like words, and have the meaning of "X each": ''pāmvihaicē titē męlyāhai'' "three pens each are given"; ''lili lilyā ñæltah no tulūɂihaicē karjhañī alau ulgutarate'' "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in ''titē'' (pencil) and ''alūs'' (acc. ''alau'') "bottle", just like after cardinal and collective numerals.
 
'''Adverbial numerals''' are adverbs with the meaning of "X times" and '''multiplicative numbers''' are adjective-like words (that can also be used alone) with the meaning of "X times as large"; numbers from 1 to 4 have both forms, while all other ones (except 0) have only the multiplicative one, which is used for both meanings. Examples: ''pāmvirvīm yąloe'' "triple meal/a meal three times as large"; ''āsena māgdani'' "twice a month"; ''āsena mbularvīm'' "eight times a month".<br/>
Zero only has an adverbial form (''māgajrā''), which is however only used in reading multiplications and powers, e.g. 3 * 0 ''māgajrā pāmvi'', 9<sup>0</sup> ''māgajrā demǣ moja''.
 
'''Fractionary numerals''' are always used in the noun.<small>GEN</small> numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with ''-vaḍa'' in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + ''vaḍa'', meaning Xth part, e.g. ''hælinaika vaḍa'' (the second part) → ''hælinaivāṭ''). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: ''marti hælinaivāṭ'' "half of the city" ; ''alāvi nęltendvāṭ'' "one fourth of the bottle" ; ''babhrāmi tulūɂendvaḍe'' "in one sixth of the country".
 
===Basic maths===
* 1 + 2 = 3
: emibe ''širē'' dani pāmvyå ''lunade'' (1.<small>DIR</small>. more. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''širē'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''širē'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
* 3 - 2 = 1
: pāmvi ''isan'' dani emibå ''lunade'' (3.<small>DIR</small>. minus. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 1-<small>DAT</small> go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''isan'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''isan'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
* 3 * 2 = 6
: ''māgdani'' pāmvi tulūɂå ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. 3.<small>DIR</small>. 6-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
* 6 : 2 = 3
: ''hælinaivadęs'' tulūɂa pāmvyå ''liven'' (2.<small>FRACTION-ESS</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small> 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>FRACTIONARY-</small>B<sup>ESS</sup> A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
* 6<sup>2</sup> = 30 (36<sub>10</sub>)
: ''māgdani demǣ'' tulūɂa pāmvimāmei ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. <small>REFL.GEN-LOC</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small>. 30<sub>12</sub>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B ''demǣ'' A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
 
===Reified numerals===
Reified numerals, or numerals used as nouns, have a special form, which is actually the numeral with the common noun-forming suffix ''-as'' added (with regular saṃdhi). These numerals are used most notably for:
* In order to refer to the digits themselves (''danyas'' "the digit 2");
* Things named with numbers (''tulūɂās'' "[tram/bus/etc] number 6");
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Year dozens (''vælknihælē'' "the 60<sub>12</sub>s = the 3860<sub>12</sub>s);
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Age ranges by the dozen (''hælmāmeyē'' "20<sub>12</sub>ies" = the age range from the start of one's 20<sub>12</sub>th year to the end of one's 2Ɛth);
* School marks - note that there's no uniform system in the Inquisition (''nęltayas'' "a grade 4" (passing grade in the most widespread system for non-higher education in the Inquisition, ranging from 1 (''emibayas''), worst, to 7 (''chīkās''), best));
* A group of X people - a reification of collective numerals (''pāmvyas'' "a trio").
 
Note that there are some terms which use numerals as roots but aren't considered reified numbers (also because of their rather inconsistent meanings); the most common examples include ''danyāmita'' (half) and ''māmyāmita'' (dozen).
 
===Units of Measurement===
Chlouvānem units of measurement (''lęlgīs'', pl. ''lęlgais'') are divided in popular units (''leilausirena lęlgais'') and scientific units (''tarlausirena lęlgais''). Scientific units, while understood, are rarely found outside of scientific contexts if corresponding popular units exist, while popular units are found in daily usage. Popular units follow however a measurement standard introduced in the year 36Ɛ7 <small>(6187<sub>10</sub>)</small> and updated several times in the following two centuries, in order to give a single understood measure for all units whose names and definitions varied across the many countries of the Chlouvānem cultural space.<br/>It is also to be noted that Calemerian scientific units have internationally unified definitions for their base units but are substantially different between the Western and the Eastern world as Western countries use them with a decimal system, while the Eastern countries (the Inquisition, most of the former Kaiṣamā, and Greater Skyrdagor) use them with a duodecimal system.
 
====Length====
The ''tyuta'', ''nakūrum'', and ''garaṇa'' are known but rarely used; the ''vālpāmvyās'' is rarely written as a separate measure, but isn't uncommon in speech.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || tamiā || || tamiā || || tamiā
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
|-
| '''Translative''' || tañ || || tañ || || tañ
! lūj
| lūjla <small>(ABL)</small> || <small>Point, tip</small> || ⅛ tyu || ~3.09639 mm
|-
|-
| '''Exessive''' || tatь || || tatь || || tatь
! tyu
| tyuta || <small>Short (dialectal)</small> || ⅓ ka || ~2.47711 cm
|-
|-
| '''Essive''' || tąsь || || tąsь || || tąsь
! ka
| katis || <small>Finger</small> || ⅓ mā || ~7.43133 cm
|-
|-
| '''Dative''' || tayū || || tayū || || tayū
! mā
| '''mākoba''' || <small>Span</small> || ''(base unit)'' || 22.294 cm
|-
|-
| '''Ablative''' || tahų || || tahų || || tahų
|-
|-
| '''Locative''' || tayė || || tayė || || tayė
! pā
|}
| pājya || <small>Leg</small> || 4 mā || 89.176 cm
'''Dual'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! 1du !! Dual !! 1du !! Dual !! 1du !! Dual
! vāl
| vālpāmvyās<br/>vālpāmvya pājya || <small>Two and a half legs</small> || 2+½ pā || 2.2294 m
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || '''lileidi''' || || '''sāmeidi''' || || '''tameidi'''
! nak
| nakūrum || <small>Rod</small> || 8 pā || 7.13408 m
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || lildū || || sādhū || || tadhū
! cān
| cāṃtrūh || <small>Section (A. Yodhvaši)</small> || 140 (192<sub>10</sub>) pā || 171.21792 m
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || lilden || || sādhen || || tadhen
! vai
| vaiṣrya || <small>Plough</small> || 8 cān<br/>ᘔ80 <small>(1536<sub>10</sub>)</small> pā || 1369.7434 m — 1.36974 km
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || lildes || || sādhes || || tadhes
! gar
|-
| garaṇa || <small>Hour</small> || 34 <small>(40<sub>10</sub>)</small> cān || 6848.72 m — 6.84872 km
| '''Translative''' || lildoh || || sādhoh || || tadhoh
|-
| '''Exessive''' || lildās || || sādhās || || tadhās
|-
| '''Essive''' || lildūn || || sādhūn || || tadhūn
|-
| '''Dative''' || lildotь || || sādhotь || || tadhotь
|-
| '''Ablative''' || lildīs || || sādhīs || || tadhīs
|-
| '''Locative''' || lildīm || || sādhīm || || tadhīm
|}
|}
'''Plural'''
 
{| class="wikitable"
<!-- ====Area====
The ''våṇṭa'' may or may not be written as a separate measure. A measure of 1 ''jāṇa'' and 700 ''dvāmāryai'' may be written as ''1 jā.700 (dvā)'' (most commonly) or as ''1 jā.1.100 (dvā)''.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! 1sg !! Plural !! 2sg !! Plural
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || '''mayin''' || || '''nagin'''
! sǣ
| sǣca || <small>Small, Piece (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 1 nī * 1 nī || 51.95 cm<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || mau (-om) || || nauk (-nok)
! dar
| daryā || <small>unknown; name first used in the Near East</small> || 60 <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> sǣ || 3,740.4 cm<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || mām (-mām) || || nān (-nān)
! re
| relya || <small>Carpet</small> || 3 dar || ~1.12212 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || meyā || || negā
! dvā
| dvāmārya || <small>ultimately from ''dvārma'' (room)</small> || 4 re || ~4.48848 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Translative''' || mėñ || || naca
! vå
| våṇṭa || <small>probably from a Tamukāyi word meaning "fence(d)"</small> || 600 <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> dvā — ½ jā || ~3,878.0467 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Exessive''' || mėtь || || natь
! jā
| jāṇa || <small>Field</small> || 1,000 <small>(1,728<sub>10</sub>)</small> do — 2 vå || ~7,756.0934 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
| '''Essive''' || mėsь || || nasь
! e
|-
| ekram || <small>Expanse (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 100 <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> jā || ~1.1168 km<sup>2</sup>
| '''Dative''' || mayū || || nagū
|-
| '''Ablative''' || mahų || || nalhų
|-
| '''Locative''' || mayė || || najė
|}
|}
{| class="wikitable"
 
====Weight (and mass)====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! (parrot) !! Plural !! (dragon) !! Plural !! (lotus) !! Plural
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
|-
| '''Direct''' || '''taṃšān''' || || '''taimām''' || || '''taimāsi'''
! vaj
| vaji || <small>dimin. from ''vaḍa'' (part)</small> || 1/100 <small>(1/144<sub>10</sub>)</small> dū || ~51.79398 mg
|-
|-
| '''Accusative''' || tamnū || || temnūm || || temnuis
! dū
| dūdha || <small>Seed</small> || ⅙ lit || ~7.45833 g
|-
|-
| '''Ergative''' || tamān || || temaum || || temais
! lit
| litveh || <small>Cut (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || ¼ aut || 44.75 g
|-
|-
| '''Genitive''' || tašñā || || tašñā || || tašñā
! aut
| '''auṭikā''' || <small>probably an augmentative from PLB *wutərus<ref>cf. ''ūtarṇ-'' "heavy" and ''ūṭrus'' "load"</ref></small> || ''(base unit)'' || 179 g
|-
|-
| '''Translative''' || tašiñ || || tašiñ || || tašiñ
! tū
| tulūɂendā || <small>ultimately from ''tulūɂendes'' (sixth)</small> || 6 aut || 1,074 g
|-
|-
| '''Exessive''' || tašitь || || tašitь || || tašitь
! pau
| paurā || <small>Rock (dialectal)</small> || 70 <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> aut || 12.53 kg
|-
|-
| '''Essive''' || tašisь || || tašisь || || tašisь
! māp
| māmipaurā || <small>''māmei'' (twelve) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> pau || 150.36 kg
|-
|-
| '''Dative''' || taṃšū || || taṃšū || || taṃšū
! lap
|-
| lallapaurā || <small>''lalla'' (high, further) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> māp || 1,804.32 kg
| '''Ablative''' || tašahų || || tašahų || || tašahų
|-
| '''Locative''' || taṃšė || || taṃšė || || taṃšė
|}
|}


=== Correlatives ===
====Volume====
Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing eleven types (proximal, medial, distal, relative, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Category ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal !! Relative !! Interrogative !! Negative !! Ass. exist. !! Elect. exist. !! Universal !! Positive altern. !! Negative altern.
|-
| Attributive || ''nenė''<br/>this || ''nunū''<br/>that (near you) || ''nanā''<br/>that (over there) || — || ''yananū?''<br/>what?, which? || ''gu''<br/>no || ''nūši''<br/>some || ''læti''<br/>any || ''yaiva''<br/>every || ''viṣam''<br/>another || ''guviṣam''<br/>no other
|-
|-
| Thing || ''nenė''<br/>this one || ''nunū''<br/>that one (near you) || ''nanā''<br/>that one (over there) || ''tejāmi'' || ''yananū?''<br/>what?, which? || ''gvami''<br/>nothing || ''nūšami''<br/>something || ''lætyami''<br/>anything || ''yaiva''<br/>everything || ''viṣāmi''<br/>something else || ''guviṣāmi''<br/>nothing else
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
|-
| Person || ''evita''<br/>this one || ''utvita''<br/>that one (near you) || ''ātvita''<br/>that one (over there) || ''tėvita'' || ''yavita?''<br/>who? || ''guvita''<br/>no one || ''nūšvita''<br/>someone || ''lævita''<br/>anyone || ''yaivita''<br/>everyone || ''viṣvita''<br/>someone else || ''guviṣvita''<br/>no one else
! src
| ṣærcañīh || <small>dimin. from ''ṣarus'' (spoon)</small> || ½ ṣar || ~5.78704 mL
|-
|-
| Time || ''emiya''<br/>now || ''utiya''<br/>then || ''ātiya''<br/>then (remote) || ''tėmiya'' || ''yamiya?''<br/>when? || ''gumiya''<br/>never || ''nūšmiya''<br/>sometime, somewhen || ''lætmiya''<br/>anytime, whenever || ''yaivmiya''<br/>always, everytime || ''viṣmiya''<br/>sometime else || ''guviṣmiya''<br/>never else
! ṣar
| ṣarus || <small>Spoon</small> || ⅓ cel || ~11.57407 mL
|-
|-
| Place || ''ejulā''<br/>here || ''uñjulā''<br/>there || ''āñjulā''<br/>over there || ''tėjulā'' || ''yajulā?''<br/>where? || ''gujulā''<br/>nowhere || ''nūñjulā''<br/>somewhere || ''læjulā''<br/>anywhere || ''yavijulā''<br/>everywhere || ''viñjulā''<br/>elsewhere || ''guviñjulā''<br/>nowhere else
! cel
| celya || <small>Small glass</small> || ⅙ lun || ~34.72222 mL
|-
|-
| Destination || ''ejulåh''<br/>hence || ''uñjulåh''<br/>thence || ''āñjulåh''<br/>thence (remote) || ''tėjulåh'' || ''yajulåh?''<br/>whence? || ''gujulåh''<br/>nowhence || ''nūñjulåh''<br/>somewhence || ''læjulåh''<br/>anywhence || ''yavijulåh''<br/>everywhence || ''viñjulåh''<br/>elsewhence || ''guviñjulåh''<br/>nowhence else
! lun
| luneyāvi || <small>from ''lunai'' (tea)</small> || ⅓ val || ~0.20833 L
|-
|-
| Source || ''ejulųu''<br/>hither || ''uñjulųu''<br/>thither || ''āñjulųu''<br/>thither (remote) || ''tėjulųu'' || ''yajulųu?''<br/>whither? || ''gujulųu''<br/>nowhither || ''nūñjulųu''<br/>somewhither || ''læjulųu''<br/>anywhither || ''yavijulųu''<br/>everywhither || ''viñjulųu''<br/>elsewhither || ''guviñjulųu''<br/>nowhither else
! val
| '''valdhēna''' || <small>Flagon</small> || ''(base unit)''  || 0.625 L
|-
|-
| Manner || ''elīce''<br/>thus, hereby || ''ūlīce''<br/>thereby || ''ālīce''<br/>thereby; that other way || ''tėlīce'' || ''yalīce?''<br/>how? || ''gulīce''<br/>no way || ''nūšlīce''<br/>somehow || ''lælīce''<br/>anyhow || ''yaivlīce''<br/>everyway || ''viṣlīce''<br/>otherwise || ''guviṣlīce''<br/>no other way
! al
| alūs || <small>Bottle</small> || 2+ ⅓ val || ~1.45833 L
|-
|-
| Reason || ''emena''<br/>herefore || ''utmena''<br/>therefore || ''ātmena''<br/>therefore; for that other reason || ''tėmena''  || ''yamenat?''<br/>why? || ''gumena''<br/>for no reason || ''nūšmena''<br/>somewhy || ''lætmena''<br/>whyever, for any reason || ''yaivmena''<br/>for every reason || ''viṣmena''<br/>for another reason || ''guviṣmena''<br/>for no other reason
! då
| dåṣṭis || <small>Bucket</small> || 8 al || ~11.66666 L
|-
|-
| Quality || ''esmā''<br/>this kind || ''uçmā''<br/>that kind || ''āçmā''<br/>that other kind || ''tėsmā'' || ''yasmāt?''<br/>which kind? || ''gusmā''<br/>no kind || ''nūkṣmā''<br/>some kind || ''læsmā''<br/>any kind || ''yavismā''<br/>every kind || ''viṣasmā''<br/>another kind || ''guviṣasmā''<br/>no other kind
! raš
|-
| rašah || <small>Barrel</small> || 16 <small>(18<sub>10</sub>)</small> || ~210 L
| Quantity || ''enūḍa''<br/>this much || ''utnūḍa''<br/>that much || ''ātnūḍa''<br/>that much (remote) || ''tėnūḍa'' || ''yanūḍat?''<br/>how much? || ''gunūḍa''<br/>none || ''nūšinūḍa''<br/>some of it || ''lætnūḍa''<br/>any much || ''yaivnūḍa''<br/>all of it || ''viṣṇūḍa''<br/>another quantity || ''guviṣṇūḍa''<br/>no other quantity
|}
|}


Note that in common speach ''ālīce'' and ''ūlīce'' as well as ''ātmena'' and ''utmena'' are basically interchangeable, except for main clauses in relative structures where only ''ālīce'' and ''ātmena'' are used. The quality correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. ''kadięs læsmā'' "any kind of chair".<br/>Thing and person correlatives decline for case and, in the case of proximal, medial, and distal, also for number. Those which end in ''-i'' decline like pronouns.
There are also two further units for dry measures only:
* the ''purṣa'' ("pot", '''pur'''), equivalent to 1+½ val (~0.9375 L);
* the ''ręnah'' ("jar, urn", '''rę'''), equivalent to 6 pur (~5.625 L).


Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number: ''gvamidi''/''guvitadi'' "neither"; ''lætyamidi''/''lævitadi'' "either"; ''yaivadi''/''yaivitadi'' "both"; ''viṣāmidi''/''viṣvitadi'' "the other one".
The ''egimbladuldāvi'' (egd) is a unit used for measuring engine displacement: 1 egd equals ⅙ val, that is ~0.10416667 L (~104.16667 cc). -->


==Honorifics==
====Temperature====
''(note: this section still needs expansion)''
Temperature measuring in the Chlouvānem world uses the ''Jahārāṭha'' scale (shortened '''ºj'''; named after scientist Ṣastirāvi Jahārāṭha ''Nukthalin''), which is fixed with a zero degree at water freezing temperature at sea level. 100 ºj is the rough boiling temperature of water, but, being a duodecimal scale, it is 100<sub>12</sub> (144<sub>10</sub>), thus 1 ºj equals 25/36 of a degree Celsius, or 1 ºC = 1.44 ºj.<br/>The median body temperature of a Calemerian human (which is slightly lower than for terrestrial humans) is of 41 ºj <small>(49<sub>10</sub>)</small>, thus  ~34.0278 ºC.


===Honorific pronouns===
====Time====
There are many different pronouns used for second and third person in honorific speech. The rules for using them are mostly dictated by the distance between the two speakers, and, for third persons, the relative distance between them.<br/> Note that ''female'' and ''male'' is still a relic of traditional Chlouvānem society; nonbinary people, unless clearly towards the feminine end of the spectrum, are usually treated as women if they are of higher rank and as men if they are of lower rank. Also note that ''plural'' pronouns are also used for ''dual'' number.
''See also: [[Chlouvānem/Calendar_and_time#The_Chlouvānem_calendar|Chlouvānem Calendar and time § the Chlouvānem calendar]]
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
Second person generally used these pronouns:
* '''sāmi''', the morphological pronoun, is used in familiar registers and between females or between males if they are not strangers and they're all of the same rank or of similar age.
* '''nujyā''' is used by females for all strangers and for male of the same rank as them; males use it for male strangers and males of higher rank.
* '''yonujyā''' is a somewhat more formal alternative to ''nujyā''.
* '''ṭaniā''' is used by females for all non-stranger females of higher rank. Males use it for all females except close friends and relatives.
* '''yomyė''' is a moderately familiar pronoun, kinda intermediate between ''sāmi'' and ''ṭaniā/nujyā''.
* '''uṣṭām''' is used by females for people of lower rank, and by males for lower rank males.
* '''gopūrṭham''' is an extremely formal pronoun, used with public officials.
** '''(go)pūrṭhami brausa''' or '''yo-brausa''' is used for the highest ranked Inquisitors and for the Baptist.
*** '''lalla yo-brausa''' is used exclusively for the Great Inquisitor.
* '''ya-kaleyuṭhā''' is a ''plural'' pronoun, used when speaking to a representative of a specifically defined group (institution or company).
* '''yavyāta''' is a ''plural'' pronoun used for generic, less defined groups.
 
Third person pronouns vary according to whether the third person referent is higher, lower, or equal to the second person, and for each of these cases the relative rank of first and second person further determine which pronoun should be used. In some cases, a third person feminine person requires a different pronoun from a masculine one.<br/> Note that all forms here are for singular pronouns; unless noted they're all nouns (except ''tami'') and they are pluralized regularly if needed.
 
If 3S is higher than 2S and...
* ...1S is lower than 2S, '''lalla yañša''' is used.
* ...1S is equal to 2S, '''lalla yañša''' is used, or just '''tami''' in familiar registers.
* ...1S is higher than 2S, then:
** if 3S is lower than 1S, '''āte-liluyani''' (inflects as the pronoun ''yani'') is used invariably if 1S is female; for male 3S only if 1S is male too.
** if 3S is lower than 1S, '''yañša''' is used for female 3S by male 1S; it is optional by female 1S.
** if 3S is equal to 1S, '''yo-yardam''' is used.
** if 3S is higher than 1S, '''lallayuṭhā''' is used (rarely pluralized even if referring to a plural subject).
If 3S is equal to 2S and...
* ...1S is lower than both, '''yo-yardam''' is used.
* ...1S is equal to both, '''kemura''' is used, or just '''tami''' in familiar registers.
* ...1S is higher than both, '''yardam''' is used.
If 3S is lower than 2S and...
* ...1S is also lower than 2S, '''tami''' is invariably used by females and by 1S males for 3S males; '''ui-hulyn''' is used by 1S males for 3S females.
* ...1S is equal to 2S, '''kemura''' is used, or just '''tami''' in familiar registers.
* ...1S is higher than both, '''kemura''' is used for all 3S males and usually by 1S females for 3S females; '''yañsa''' is mandatory by 1S males for 3S females, and optional by 1S females.
 
Note that familiar registers (which often include code-switching between Chlouvānem and a local vernacular), when used, may override any convention: as an extreme example, any very close friend or relative of the Great Inquisitor would refer to her as ''sāmi'' (and not ''lalla yo-brausa''); however this is obviously only possible in private contexts (while same-ranked people may use a familiar register in public - e.g. on the workplace).
 
===Honorific titles===
Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective ''yamei'' is often added to many of them - especially ''lāma'' - and is mandatory in other ones.
* '''lāma''' - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, ''lāma'' is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. ''Namihūlša lāma''); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then ''lāma'' comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša''). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with ''lāma'' (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma'') are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
* '''tanta''' - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students.
* '''suntam''' (regionally also ''sintam'') - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
* '''lallāmaha''' - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with ''yamei''. Inquisitors may also be referred to as ''lallāmaha + <small>matronymic</small> + yamei + <small>given name</small> + murkadhāna (lāma)''
 
Two special formulas are used for the most important people in the Inquisition:
* ''aveṣyotāra lallāmaha'' + matronymic + ''yamei'' + surname + given name + ''brausamailenia lāma'' for the Baptist (roughly "[Her]<ref>Since the laws on gender equality of 4E 56 (77 years ago), the role of Baptist, the second most important in the Inquisition, may be held by a male, but so far no male person has ever been Baptist. On the other hand, only females may be Great Inquisitors.</ref> Excellent Highness, Baptist ...");
* ''nanū aveṣyotāra lallāmaha'' + matronymic + ''yamei'' + surname + given name + ''camimurkadhāna lāma'' for the Great Inquisitor ("[Her] Most Excellent Highness, Great Inquisitor ...").
 
==Numerals - Mālūye ==
 
Chlouvānem has a decimal numeral system which has however a base-5 sub-base for some numbers (mainly 5 and 11-19) and a base-20 borrowed one for the tens.
 
Numbers (sg. ''mālūyas'', pl. ''mālūye'') have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. Cardinal 1, 2, and 3 are declinable adjectives, as are all ordinal and collective ones; 1-4 have separate adverbial forms, while all other ones have an invariable adjective used as multiplicative and a derived adverb used as adverbial. All distributive, fractionary, and cardinal (except 1-3) numbers are invariable.
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Digit !! Cardinal !! Ordinal !! Collective !! Distributive !! Adv./Multiplicative !! Fractionary
! English !! Chlouvānem !! Equivalent to !! rough Earthly approximation
|-
|-
| 0 || '''ajrā''' || <small>''(ajrāyendes)''</small> || <small>''(ajrājes)''</small> || <small>''(ajrehaicė)''</small> || <small>''(lājrā)''</small> || —
! Year
| heirah || 418 Calemerian days || 609.6 Earth days
|-
|-
| 1 || '''leil'''<br/>leilum<br/>leila || lahīlas || leilajāsis || leiluhaicė || leilahæl / lāleil<br/><small>(lāleilum, lāleila)</small> || lahīlvāṭ
! Day
| lairē || 28<sub>12</sub> (32<sub>10</sub>) hours || ~35 hours
|-
|-
| 2 || '''dani'''<br/>danīm<br/>danīh || hælinaikas || daniajāsis || danihaicė || danihæl / lādani<br/><small>(lādanīm, lādanīh)</small> || hælinaivāṭ
! Hour
| garaṇa || 3 hælmāmyai<br/>60<sub>12</sub> (72<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~65 min ~37 sec
|-
|-
| 3 || '''tarvas'''<br/>tarvam<br/>tarvė || tarvendes || tarvajāsis || tarvihaicė || tarvahæl / lātarvas<br/><small>(lātarvam, lātarvė)</small> || tarvendvāṭ
! <small>''group of "minutes"''</small>
| hælmāmya || 20<sub>12</sub> (24<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~21 min ~52 sec
|-
|-
| 4 || '''nahė''' || nahėbindes || nahėñjāsis || nahėbihaicė || nahėbihæl / lānahė || nahėbindvāṭ
! "Minute"
| raila || ''(base unit)'' || ~54.6805 sec
|-
|-
| 5 || '''švā''' || švājindes || švāyajāsis || švehaicė || lāšvā || švajindvāṭ
! "Second"
| namišoe || 1/40<sub>12</sub> (1/48<sub>10</sub>) raila  || ~1.8986 sec
|-
|-
| 6 || '''tulūʔa''' || tulūʔendes || tulūʔajāsis || tulūʔihaicė || lātulūʔa || tulūʔendvāṭ
! <small>1/12 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) māmendvāṭ || 1/10<sub>12</sub> (1/12<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.1582 sec
|-
|-
| 7 || '''chīka''' || chīkendes || chīkajāsis || chīcihaicė || lāchīka || chīkendvāṭ
! <small>1/144 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) nihælendvāṭ || 1/100<sub>12</sub> (1/144<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.0131 sec
|-
|-
| 8 || '''teitė''' || teitendes || teitajāsis || teitehaicė || lāteitė || teitendvāṭ
! <small>1/1728 of a "second"</small>
|-
| (namišeni) tildhaindvāṭ || 1/1000<sub>12</sub> (1/1728<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~1.0987 ms
| 9 || '''moja''' || mojendes || mojajāsis || mojihaicė || lāmoja || mojendvāṭ
|}
|-
 
| 10 || '''naʔikām''' || naʔikāmindes || naʔikāñjes || naʔikāhaicė || lānaʔikām || naʔikāmindvāṭ
====Other units====
|-
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
| 11 || '''lelišvatī''' || lelišvatīlindes || lelišvatījes || lelišvatīhaicė || lālelišvatī || lelišvatīlindvāṭ
|-
| 12 || '''danešvatī''' || danešvatīlindes || danešvatījes || danešvatīhaicė || lādanešvatī || danešvatīlindvāṭ
|-
| 13 || '''tarošvati''' || tarošvatīlindes || tarošvatījes || tarošvatīhaicė || lātarošvatī || tarošvatīlindvāṭ
|-
| 14 || '''nahėšvatī''' || nahėšvatīlindes || nahėšvatījes || nahėšvatīhaicė || lānahėšvatī || nahėšvatīlindvāṭ
|-
| 15 || '''švāmašvatī''' || švāmašvatīlindes || švāmašvatījes || švāmašvatīhaicė || lāšvāmašvatī || švāmašvatīlindvāṭ
|-
| 16 || '''tulūšvatī''' || tulūšvatīlindes || tulūšvatījes || tulūšvatīhaicė || lātulūšvatī || tulūšvatīlindvāṭ
|-
| 17 || '''chīcæšvatī''' || chīcæšvatīlindes || chīcæšvatījes || chīcæšvatīhaicė || lāchīcæšvatī || chīcæšvatīlindvāṭ
|-
|-
| 18 || '''teitašvatī''' || teitašvatīlindes || teitašvatījes || teitašvatīhaicė || lāteitašvatī || teitašvatīlindvāṭ
! !! Chlouvānem !! Symbol !! rough Earthly approximation
|-
|-
| 19 || '''moješvatī''' || moješvatīlindes || moješvatījes || moješvatīhaicė || lāmoješvatī || moješvatīlindvāṭ
! frequency
| lūnaji || lnj || ~0.526704 Hz
|-
|-
| 20 || '''ekāma''' || ekāmendes || ekāmajāsis || ekāṃhaicė || laikāma || ekāmendvāṭ
! voltage
| chulgān || chg || 1 V
|}
|}


Numbers from 20 above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes. The other teens are: '''30''' ṣurakāma, '''40''' kaṭṭakāma, '''50''' caicukāma, '''60''' lęmba, '''70''' yūlkakāma, '''80''' yonllikāma, '''90''' jāṣyakāma, and '''100''' cambė.<br/>
==Particles (''remīk'')==
Examples of compounding: 21 ''ekāṃleil'', 22 ''ekāṃdani'', 37 ''ṣurakāñchīka'', 53 ''caicukāntarvas'', etc. Note that ''cambė'' declines as a noun, and numbers from 101 above are written separately and without saṃdhi, e.g. 101 ''cambė leil''.
Traditional Chlouvānem grammar only recognizes a single part of speech called "particles" (''remīn'', literally "helper(s)") which includes conjunctions, postpositions, and interjections. However, these three are recognized as subsets of particles - here translated as "conjunctive particles" (''natemālāhai remīn''), "accompanying particles", i.e. postpositions (''ūtimāhai remīn''), and "exclamatory particles" (''pigdilanah nali remīn'').


The hundreds are '''200''' ejamva, '''300''' ṣurjamva, '''400''' kañjamva, '''500''' caiñjamva, '''600''' morjamva, '''700''' yūlujamva, '''800''' yolljamva, '''900''' jāṣijamva.<br/>
Many Chlouvānem particles are grammaticalized usages of other words, some of them no longer being used in their original meaning in contemporary use (e.g. ''varve'').
'''1000''' is ''yoyakta'' and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. '''6249''' ''tulūʔa yoyakta ejamva kaṭṭakāmmoja''.


The other divisions are based on groups of two digits: the two ones used in common speech are '''1.00.000''' - an ''ėjma'' - and '''1.00.00.000''' - a ''pārṇa''. Greater numbers only have specific names in scientific contexts: '''1.00.00.00.000''' is a ''virjasa'' and '''1.00.00.00.00.000''' a ''kālga'' - colloquially they are ''cambė pārṇa'' and ''naʔikām yoyakta pārṇa'' respectively.
===Conjunctive particles===
Conjunctive particles may not stand syntactically alone and, with a few exceptions, don't require any particular case of a noun. Most of them function, or are also used, as conjunctions between sentences.


Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with ''-endes'' (''-indes'' after ''-m'') for ordinals, ''-jāsis'' for collectives, ''-haicė'' for distributives, ''lā-'' for adverbials/multiplicatives, and ''-endvāṭ/-indvāṭ'' for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-4 retain all irregularities (suppletive forms, gender, and the stem ''nahėb-'' in four), e.g. ''ekāṃhælinaikas'' 22nd.
* '''jahān''' — anyway (conjunction or second position adverb)
* '''lai''' — inclusive or
* '''las''' — and (in incomplete listings, cf. ''no'' and ''sama''); it follows the noun it refers to, and in listings with more than two nouns it follows every noun except for the first. Not used to conjoin sentences.
* '''lenta''' — "together (with)", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage. When pospositive, it is more emphatic than ''lā''. Adverbially, ''gimmālsiṭ'' is more common.
* '''mailiven''' — so, thus, therefore (grammaticalized use of <small>go_forward.UNIDIR.PRES.IND.EXP.3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.</small>)
* '''mbu''' — exclusive or
* '''mešē''' — given that (grammaticalized use of <small>see.PRES.IND-EXP-3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.</small>)
* '''najelai''' — maybe. Originally the archaic potential form of ''najalle'' (to happen). Sentence-final, requires a verb in the subjunctive mood, e.g. ''yahatite najelai'' "maybe I'll read it".
* '''nānim''' — almost; if used with nouns, requires essive case.
* '''ni''' — but (in second position)
* '''no''' — and (in complete listings, cf. ''las''); same placement as ''las''. Also used to conjoin sentences, but ''sama'' is preferred, especially when there are different subjects (triggered arguments).
* '''nyąu''' — because, for, as (cf. ''''); ''amyąu'' in the Classical era, i.e. the ablative of the former demonstrative ''ami''.
:: Used sentence-finally: ''aganą lā įstyāk nyąu yųlake pañcekte'' "as (s)he was hungry, (s)he started eating." In lone sentences, e.g. answers, ''tī'' is preferred: ''aganą tī įstyāk'' "because (s)he was hungry."
* '''paṣe''' — furthermore
* '''pū''' — if (and '''pūmbu''' "whether") - see [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Conditional_sentences|Chlouvānem syntax § Conditional sentences]]
* '''sama''' ('''sam''' before vowels) — and (between sentences only, cf. ''las'' and ''no'')
* '''širē''' — also, too (only between sentences, cf. ''tan''). A different use of the adverb meaning "more".
* '''tadye''' — despite that (between sentences), cf. ''tatta''.
* '''tan''' — also, too; used adverbially and between sentences (where, however, ''širē'' is more common).
* '''tatta''' — despite, even though; requires a noun in the essive case or a subjunctive verb (e.g. ''gu talunīs ša tatta dadrā'' "even though you didn't come, it has been done."). Colloquially, it is also used anaphorically, instead of ''tadye''; however, it is considered bad style in formal language.
* '''varve''' — instead of; requires genitive case or subjunctive mood. Originally the locative singular of ''varva'' "form", no longer used in contemporary Chlouvānem.
** '''samvarve''' — on the other hand, whereas
* '''vivāmi''' — "too much", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage.
* '''væse''' — while, in the meantime; "during (the)" with nouns. Requires a verb in the subjunctive mood or a noun in the essive (or, meaning-dependant, exessive or translative) case.


=== Using numerals ===
===Accompanying particles (i.e. postpositions)===
Cardinal numerals may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.
These particles can never stand alone, do not conjoin sentences, and nearly always require a particular noun case.
* In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put '''before''' the noun and the noun is always '''singular''' (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. ''leilum yujam'' (a lotus flower); ''danīh māra'' (two mango fruits); ''tarvas haloe'' (three names), ''lelišvatī ñaiṭa'' (eleven stars), and so on.
* If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in '''genitive singular''' instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: ''yujami leilum'' (one lotus flower), ''māri danīh'' (two mango fruits), ''halenies tarvas'' (three names), ''ñaiṭi lelišvatī'' (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. ''marti tarvė'' (three cities) but ''marte tarviyė'' (in the three cities).<br/>This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
* "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: ''danīh māra'' or ''māri danīh'' are both as correct as ''danīh māradi'' and ''māradais danīh'' - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning. Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.


Ordinals, collectives, and multiplicatives are simply used as declinable adjectives, but collectives and multiplicatives are always singular (optionally dual for ''daniajāsis'' and ''lādani''). e.g. ''hælinaikah kita'' "second house", ''teitajāsim lejīn'' "all eight singers", ''lātarvas yąloe'' "triple meal/a meal three times as large". Bare multiplicatives may carry either the meaning of "repeated X times" or "X times as large", but the latter is most commonly specified with a comparison (''en'') or by context.
* '''bīs''' — between; from ... until, in expressions of time. Comes after both nouns in essive case: ''šurājęs nyūramyęs bīs'' "between [[Contionary:šurājah|Šurājah]] and [[Contionary:nyūramyah|Nyūramyah]]".
* '''bisikita''' — except for; requires subjunctive mood or essive case. Grammaticalized usage of <small>put_aside-EXP-IND.PERF.3.PATIENT.EXTERIOR</small>. (e.g. ''nītedarāhai lailąs bisikita nalunya upulsma'' "entrance is forbidden, except for involved people" → "authorized personnel only")
* '''dam''' — interrogative particle in polar questions, put after the verb (e.g. ''daltah vi dam?'' "is it a fish?")
* '''e''' — like. Requires essive case with nouns and subjunctive mood with verbs.
* '''ga''' — adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles or proper names, but not honorifics), e.g. ''Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta'' "Līlasuṃghāṇa city" or ''Tāllahārya ga maita'' "Tāllahārya river".
*: Mostly in poetry (for metrical reasons), or Archaic and Early Classical Chlouvānem prose (e.g. in the Lileṃsasarum, or many Yunyalīlti holy books), ''ga'' is used to conjoin attributive verbs to nouns, e.g. ''lei imiša ga švas'' "the animal seen by me". Already in parts of the Lileṃsasarum the decading usage of the particle in this sense is to be noted, as often it is only used to conjoin exterior verbs to nouns, but not interior ones.
* '''gu(n) ~ ša''' — negative circumposition used around verbs, e.g. ''gu yuyųlsegde ša'' "(s)he does not want to eat". The first element is ''gun'' before vowels; the ''ša'' element is omitted if the verb is attributive.
* '''lā''' — with (comitative); requires essive case (e.g. ''lilyą ñæltęs lā'' "with my sister"). The Archaic Chlouvānem form was ''lapi''.
* '''lut''' — used with expressions of time: means "ago" if used with ablative case (''nęlcų heirų lut'' "four years ago"), "for/since" if with essive case (''nęlcą heiręs lut'' "for four years").
* '''mei''' and '''go''' — "yes" and "no", used according to the polarity of the question; i.e. ''mei'' denotes the statement is true ("yes" to affirmative questions, "no" to negative questions), while ''go'' denotes the statement is false ("no" to affirmative questions, "yes" to negative questions).
* '''mæn''' — [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Use of the topic|marks a topic which otherwise has no role in the sentence]].
* '''nali''' — benefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the benefited argument when the verb is not in benefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "in order to", with a nuance of hope (the bare subjunctive already carries the "in order to" meaning).
* '''nin''' — after, with ablative or subjunctive (''nęlcų heirų nin'' "after four years")
* '''pa''' — on, of, concerning, on the subject of, about. Requires a direct case noun (e.g. ''vāṇatarlā pa naviṣya'' "book about botany") or a subjunctive mood verb (e.g. ''šūñjulā drētte pa nīdhāḍirdya'' "the two of us are talking about what (s)he did down there").
* '''ras''' — antibenefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the anti-benefited argument when the verb is not in antibenefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "to avoid X".
* '''sām''' — different meanings depending on case:
:: ablative, in expressions of time: "in ... time" (at the end of a certain period), or "by": ''nęlcų heirų sām'' "in four years' time, four years for now"; ''šurājų sām'' "by [[Contionary:šurājah|Šurājah]]";
:: translative (rarely essive), in expressions of time: "in/for/until" (within, during a certain period): ''nęltin heiran sām'' "for the coming four years" (or ''nęlcą heiręs sām''); ''ājvan sām'' "until dawn";
:: dative case, with places: "until, as far as": ''līlasuṃghāṇa ṣrāvamaila ga keikom sām'' "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Ṣrāvamaila Station")
:: subjunctive verb: "until": ''primęlirī sām'' "until he/she/it comes back".
* '''šut''' — before, with ablative or subjunctive (''nęlcų heirų šut'' "four years before").
* '''vādį''' — without, with essive or subjunctive. Unlike English, it cannot be used anaphorically.


Distributives are indeclinable adjectives, and have the meaning of "X each": ''tarvihaicė titė męlyąt'' "three pens each are given"; ''lili liliā ñæltah no tulūʔihaicė kolecañi alau ulgutamiaça'' "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in ''titė'' (pencil) and ''alūs'' (gen. ''alau'') "bottle".
===Correlative particles===
 
Chlouvānem does not have correlative conjunctions as English does, because they are translated in different ways:
Fractionary numerals are always used in the noun.<small>GEN</small> numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with ''-vaḍa'' in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + ''vaḍa'', meaning Xth part, e.g. ''hælinaikah vaḍa'' (the second part) → ''hælinaivāṭ''). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: ''marti hælinaivāṭ'' "half of the city" ; ''alāvi nahėbindvāṭ'' "one fourth of the bottle" ; ''bhæli tulūʔendvaḍe'' "in one sixth of the country".
* English "both... and..." is most commonly translated as ''X Y no tan'' ("X, and also Y"), e.g. ''jādāh lañekaica no tan nanau draikate'' "both Jādāh and Lañekaica did that".
 
*: Alternatively, the forms ''X Y no peiṃsiṭ'' ("X, and the same for Y") or ''X ..., Y peiṃsiṭ'' ("X ..., and Y the same") are also widespread, e.g. ''jādāh lañekaica no peiṃsiṭ nanau draikate''; ''nāneh lei uyųla, māra peiṃsiṭ'' "I have eaten both the bread and the mango".
==Particles==
* English "neither... nor..." is translated by the same structures as "both... and...", but negative. In the most common usage, ''tan'' is omitted:
The numerous particles in the Chlouvānem language have various uses, including coordinating conjunctions, semantic, and pragmatic particles. Most of them (except a few conjunctions) follow the word they modify. Here they are listed in Latin alphabetical order:
*: ''jādāh lañekaica no (tan) nanau gu draikate ša'' "neither Jādāh nor Lañekaica did that"; ''nāneh lei gun uyųla ša, māra peiṃsiṭ'' "I have eaten neither the bread nor the mango".
* '''e''' translates "like"; it requires essive case with nouns (in formal speech; while bare essive most properly has the meaning "as X" instead of "like X", colloquially it is used both ways) and subjunctive mood with realis verbs (other moods are used for their meaning).
* "either... or..." is easily translated by the exclusive or (''mbu''). It is commonly only used after the second term, but it can be put after every term for emphasis:
* '''en''' usually requires accusative case and translates to English "than" in comparisons.
*: ''jādāh (mbu) lañekaica mbu nanau dṛkte'' either Jādah or Lañekaica did it. (note the singular verb)
* '''eri''' means "even", marking a positive emphasis and used with positive sentences (e.g. ''hūnakumi dældān eri dældire'' "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi<ref>Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjātia.</ref>")
* '''fras''' marks the antibenefactive argument outside of antibenefactive-trigger voice, or "to avoid X" with a subjunctive mood verb.
* '''ga''' is an adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles; the only exceptions being honorifics), such as ''Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta'' (Līlasuṃghāṇa city, or "city of Līlasuṃghāṇa") or ''Tāllahāria ga maita'' (Tāllahāria river).
* '''gāri''' means "not even", being the opposite of ''eri'', marking a negative emphasis in negative sentences (e.g. ''chāra chlouvānumi dældān gāri gu dældire ša'' "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
* '''golat''' translates "meanwhile" or "on the other hand".
* '''gu(n) — ša''' is a circumfix around verbs used to negate it, e.g. ''gu yuyųlsėça ša'' "(s)he doesn't want to eat").
* '''laha''' means "only, just", e.g. ''lārvājuṣui laha flonu'' "I'm only going to the temple".
* '''lapi''' means "with"; when used in instrumental sense it requires ergative case, while the comitative sense requires the essive.
* '''leah''' translates "already", with a noun in essive case or a verb in the semantically correct mood.
* '''mbu''' means "or"; placement with nouns is the same as ''no''/''çei'', and with verbs it's often the same as ''sama''.
* '''mei''' and '''go''' are the Chlouvānem words for "yes" and "no" respectively; their use is however different from English, as they are used according to the polarity of the question: ''mei'' answers "yes" to affirmative questions and "no" to negative questions; ''go'' answers "no" to affirmative questions and "yes" to negative questions.
* '''menni''' translates "because, for". If there's a following main clause, then it's the last word in the subordinate of reason (this use is synonymous to the consequential secondary verbal mood of cause); if it's a lone sentence (an answer), then it is usually at the ''second'' place in the sentence, after the verbal trigger (e.g. ''tami menni yuyųlsėça'' "because (s)he wants to eat").
* '''mæn''' [[Chlouvānem#Use of the topic|marks the topic]] which otherwise has no role in the sentence (often used inside larger conversations, e.g. ''lili mæn yulte kåmbe'' (mine/as for me (echoing a previous sentence), [it is] in the bright yellow backpack; OR: as for me, [I keep it] in...)).
* '''nali''', when used with a noun in direct case, marks the benefactive argument in any voice except benefactive-trigger. When used with a verb in subjunctive mood, it means "in order to", with a nuance of hope (when compared to the bare subjunctive, which already has that meaning).
* '''nānim''' translates "almost", with a noun in essive case or a verb in the semantically correct mood.
* '''natte''' translates "until", with a noun in translative case (or dative case for places, meaning "as far as")<ref>Compare ''ājvan natte'' "until dawn" and ''līlasuṃghāṇa kahėrimaila ga keikui natte'' "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Kahėrimaila Station".</ref> or a verb in the subjunctive.
* '''ni''' translates "but" as a coordinating conjunction.
* '''no''' translates English "and" when between nouns and when denoting a complete listing; for incomplete listings (e.g. "X and Y and so on") the particle '''çei''' is used. Both follow the noun they refer to, and in listings with more than two nouns they follow every noun except the first. They can also translate "and" between verbs, but ''sama'' is preferred between sentences, especially with different subjects (e.g. ''yąluça moluça no'' "I eat and drink", either ''mėlitu yąluça kolecañu moluça no'' or ''mėlitu yąluça sama kolecañu moluça'' "I eat curry and drink kvas", but most often ''mėlitu yąluça sama liliā ñæltah kolecañu molėça'' "I eat curry and my sister drinks kvas". Note that ''mėlitu yąluça liliā ñæltah kolecañu molėça no'' is still correct, but mostly found in literary or very formal language).
* '''pa''' translates "on, of, about; concerning, on the subject of", and requires a noun direct case or a verb in subjunctive mood.
* '''sama''' translates "and" as a coordinating conjunction between sentences. If the following word starts with a vowel, it is shortened to '''sam''''.
* '''tora''' translates "also", "too", usually before the verb (e.g. ''tora uyųlaṃçait'' "I've eaten that too"); note that "also" as a conjunction between two sentences is usually translated with ''nanū'' (more).
** '''tora gu''' is a particle-adjective locution translating "not even", and is put before the noun it refers to;
** '''tora no''', after the noun, translates "even" - e.g. ''tami tora no dadrāçait'' "even he has done it it").
 
===Paired particles===
The paired particles in Chlouvānem are:
* '''gu''' X '''tora gu''' Y '''no''' — translating "neither X nor Y"; e.g. ''gu jādāh tora gu lañekaica no drāliçait'' "neither Jādāh nor Lañekaica did it".
* X '''jusęe''' Y '''mbu''' — translating "either X or Y". ''jusęe'' is a worn-down form of ''jususęe'', adverb form of ''jususas'', present participle of ''gyake'' (to be). e.g. ''jādāh jusęe lañekaica mbu drāliçait'' "either Jādāh or Lañekaica did it".
* X '''jusęe''' Y '''tora no''' — translating "both X and Y"; e.g. ''jādāh jusęe lañekaica tora no drāliçait'' "both Jādāh and Lañekaica did it".


===Emphatic particles===
===Emphatic particles===
A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:
A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:
* '''å''' expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. ''å viṣęe dadrāça'' "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / ''viṣęe dadrāça å'' "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
* '''anā''' is an introductory particle (e.g. "so")
* '''å''' expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. ''å vikṣiṭ dadrāte'' "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / ''vikṣiṭ dadrā å'' "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
* '''dā''' gives the sentence, especially a command or a proposition, an informal tone - cf. German "mal" or Italian "un po'", e.g. ''najire nanau mešute dā'' "I'll just see what happens"; ''peithos dā'' "just calm down and take a walk around here."
* '''e''' is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
* '''e''' is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
* '''nane''' is a tag question, e.g. ''camiyūs vilьthā nane?'' "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
* '''eri''' means "even", marking a positive emphasis (e.g. ''hūnakumi dhāḍan eri dhāḍire'' "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi<ref>Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjaiṭa.</ref>")
* '''noihā''' is a tag question much like ''nane'', but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. ''flære dryāvetçathā noihā?'' "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
* '''gāri''' means "not even", being the opposite of ''eri'', marking a negative emphasis (e.g. ''hulābdān chlǣvānumi dhāḍan gāri dhāḍire'' "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
* '''sāṭ''' expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. ''tę taim draukæ sāṭ'' "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
* '''nā''', a generic filler (cf. "I mean"), often combined with ''e''. e.g. ''nā (e) nenēt nāṭ tarliru!'' "I mean, I already know this!"
* '''tau''' emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. ''lārvājuṣe mos tau'' "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; ''kitui vasau tau'' "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
* '''nane''' is a tag question, e.g. ''camiyūs vi dam nane?'' "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
* '''tva''' puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. ''nenėyu daudiuça tati ukulaṃça tva!'' "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"
* '''nimā''' is an introductory particle, same as ''anā''.
* '''naihā''' is a tag question much like ''nane'', but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. ''lære draute dam naihā?'' "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
* '''pos''' is a filler with a meaning similar to ''tau'', but it is more properly translated as emphasizing that the speaker considers the statement as a general truth or a widely accepted thing, e.g. ''ālīce jeldegde pos'' "yeah, everybody knows (s)he acts that way/does that kind of things."
* '''sāṭ''' expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. ''tamye tamyu draukæ sāṭ'' "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
* '''tau''' emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. ''lārvājuṣe ēk tau'' "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; ''kitui vasau tau'' "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
* '''tva''' puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. ''nenēyu daudyute tati ukulaṃte tva!'' "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"


==Derivational morphology - Kokampeithauseh maivāndarāmita==
==Derivational morphology (''vāmbeithausire maivāndarāmita'')==
Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.
Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.
===Compounds===
Chlouvānem, like Sanskrit, has four main types of compound words (''tadmaiva'', pl. ''tadmaivai''), called in Chlouvānem grammar ''emibądanīs'' (dvandva), ''ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva'' (avyayībhāva), ''nīdhvakādhūs'' (tatpuruṣa), and ''kaudhvakādhūs'' (bahuvrīhi).


===Nouns===
====Dvandva (''emibądanīs'')====
The first type of compounds is ''emibądanīs'' type (also called ''no ga tadmaiva''), corresponding to dvandva compounds. In ''emibądanais'', all words in the compound are taken with the concrete idea they represent. As hinted to by the alternative name, these compounds effectively substitute an "X Y no" (X and Y), compressing it into a single word.
: ''tēneh ukyā no'' "a branch and a trunk" → ''tēnayukyāt'' "branch and trunk"
Dvandva compounds are formed by removing the direct case ''-s'' or ''-h'' marker from the word, lengthening all resulting final vowels (i.e. for all words not ending in ''-oe, -ai, -m'', or ''-n''), and joining with saṃdhi the second word; the second word is then inflected in the dual (if the word semantically refers to two things) or in the plural (if it refers to three or more things - see the next example).
: ''tēneh nūlyai no'' "a branch and leaves" → ''tēnēnūlyai'' "branch(es) and leaves"
Note that, if the dvandva is plural, there is no indication of how many elements of each component are present:
: ''lalāruṇāt voltām no'' "two lalāruṇai (<small>DU</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
: ''lalāruṇai voltām no'' "lalāruṇai (<small>PL</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
: ''lalāruṇa voltāk no'' "a lalāruṇa (<small>SG</small>) and sheep (<small>PL</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
The identification of how many individual lalāruṇai and sheep is lost in the compound, however, we know from the plural number that there must be at least three animals; otherwise, the dvandva would be dual:
: ''lalāruṇa voltām no'' "a lalāruṇa (<small>SG</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltīvā'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>DU</small>)
Dvandva made of three or more elements can, obviously, only be plural:
: ''lalāruṇa voltām no jorai no'' "a lalāruṇa, a sheep, and a goat" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāñjorāye'' "lalārunai, sheep, and goats"
In the most formal registers of Chlouvānem, it is not uncommon to find dvandva compounds made of several elements:
: ''lācāh kraṣṭāmita no lillāmita no demigretas no lelyēmita no'' "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family" → ''lācākraṣṭāmitālillāmitādemigretālelyēmitai'' "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family"
 
====Avyayībhāva (''ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva'')====
Avyayībhāva compounds, in Chlouvānem ''ṭvādaradhausirāhe tadmaivai'' ("adverbial compounds"), are not as productive as the other types and, in fact, except for a few words they're mostly limited to Archaic and Classical Chlouvānem; despite being based on the latter, modern Chlouvānem does not use them productively (but see ''nīpenai'' below).<br/>These compounds generally have a first element which is a particle (or a verbal prefix), and the second element is a noun which is either left uninflected in the direct singular or, more commonly, in the two Archaic Chlouvānem adverbializing cases: the instrumental plural or the locative singular.
: ''sam + jildas'' "after + act" → *sañjildas → ''sañjilde'' "consequently"
: ''naš(e) + sṝva'' "full, complete + extent" → *nakṣṝva → ''nakṣṝve'' "as much as possible"
: ''væse + vāyam'' "while + image, form" → ''væsvāyam'' or ''væsvāyaṃrīka'' "thus, therefore"
: ''paṣ(e) + vāyam'' "beyond + image, form" → ''paṣvāyam'' "in addition, furthermore"
: ''maibu + jallas'' "enough + condition" → *maibujallas → ''maibujalle'' "as needed"
: ''nī'' + ''penai'' "within + net" → ''nīpenai'' "online" (generally considered the only modern Chlouvānem avyayībhāva)
 
A particular kind of avyayībhāva is the ''-ṣati'' class, whose particularity derives from having a first element which is a declinable word (a possessive determiner); however, they're still adverbs and therefore uninflected:
: ''lilyā ṣati'' "my way" → ''lilyāṣati'' "from my point of view; in my opinion; my way"
: ''sāmyā ṣati'' "your way" → ''sāmyāṣati'' "from your point of view; in your opinion; your way"
 
====Tatpuruṣa (''nīdhvakādhūs'')====
Tatpuruṣa compounds (''nīdhvakādhūs'' "with meaning inside", pl. ''nīdhvakādhaus'') are likely the most common overall in Chlouvānem, and are the preferred way of crafting new words. These are endocentric compounds, the last element, the head of the compound, is modified by the previous element(s), which can be of any part of speech. Usually, the tatpuruṣa replaces genitive "X of Y", agentive "X which does Y", benefactive "X for Y", locative "X in Y", instrumental "X with Y", or sometimes copular structures "X which is (also) Y" (corresponding to Sanskrit karmadhāraya compounds) or "X made of Y".<br/>
The determining elements are generally uninflected.
: ''vāṇumi tarlā'' "study of plants" → ''vāṇatarlā'' "botany"
: ''vāṇatarlom kaminairīveyē lila'' "a person studying botany" (semantic agent) → ''vāṇatarlālila'' "botanist"
: ''mordhē cūlla'' "carriage that flies" → ''mordhacūlla'' "airplane"
: ''aṣṭre nali hatsunā'' "brush for teeth" → ''aṣṭṛhatsunā'' "toothbrush"
: ''nanāye līlta'' "path in the jungle" → ''nanailīlta'' "jungle path"
: ''nijogāp konanah'' "shooting with bow" → ''nijogākonanah'' "archery"
: ''munnęs ḍūṇā'' "a telephone which is a computer" → ''munnaḍūṇā'' "smartphone"
: ''javilenīs mayābi'' "wine made from apples" → ''javilmayābi'' "cider"
 
====Bahuvrīhi (''kaudhvakādhūs'')====
Bahuvrīhi compounds (''kaudhvakādhūs'' "with meaning outside", pl. ''kaudhvakādhaus'') are also quite common Chlouvānem words; they are exocentric compounds where none of the elements is the head of the compound, or, all elements are qualifiers. They replace structures like "[someone/something] with X which is/are Y" or "[sm/st] whose X is/are Y"; it could even be generalized to "[sm/st] whose [tatpuruṣa compound]":
: ''murkire dhānęs lā lila'' "person with black hands" → ''murkadhāna'' "Inquisitor"
: ''yųlgis nali javyęs lā dvārma'' "room with fire for food" → ''yųljavyāh'' "kitchen"<ref>Synchronically, this analysis is correct; however, this word was likely first crafted as a tatpuruṣa, i.e. "a fire for food" (''yųlgis nali javyāh''), before kitchens were rooms.</ref>
 
===Noun-forming morphemes===
'''-a''' (unstressed) or '''-ā''' (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. '''ṛ''' in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.<br/>
'''-a''' (unstressed) or '''-ā''' (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. '''ṛ''' in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.<br/>
* ''dṛ'' (to do, to make) → ''dara'' (activity)<br/>
* ''dṛ'' (to do, to make) → ''dara'' (activity)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lila'' (person; living thing)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lila'' (person; living thing)<br/>
* ''tṛl'' (to know) → ''tarlā'' (science)
* ''tṛl'' (to know) → ''tarlā'' (science)


'''-as''' is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.<br/>
'''-as''' is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.<br/>
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tugas'' (beat)<br/>
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tugas'' (beat)<br/>
* ''jlitiā (jlitim-)''  (be to the right of) → ''jlitimas'' (right)<br/>
* ''māhatyā (māhatim-)''  (be to the right of) → ''māhatimas'' (right)<br/>
* ''āntiā (āntim-)'' (be above, be on) → ''āntimas'' (part above)
* ''āntyā (āntim-)'' (be above, be on) → ''āntimas'' (part above)


'''-ūm''' is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with ''-as''.<br/>
'''-ūm''' is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with ''-as''.
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutūm'' (something bought)<br/>
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutūm'' (something bought)
* ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūm'' (walk)<br/>
* ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūm'' (walk)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvūm'' (sweet taste)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvūm'' (sweet taste)


'''-laukas''' is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.<br/>
'''-(u)kāram''' is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.<br/>In modern coinings, it is also used to denote a division of something.
* ''flun'' (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → ''fluṃlaukas'' (step)<br/>
* ''lun'' (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → ''lulkāram'' (step)
* ''lil'' (to live) (or ''liloe'' (life)) → ''lillaukas'' (moment, instant)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) (or ''liloe'' (life)) → ''lilukāram'' (moment, instant)
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašilaukas'' (raindrop)
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašukāram'' (raindrop)
* ''araṣa'' (atom) → ''araṣkāram'' (subatomic particle)


'''-anah''', with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.<br/>
'''-anah''', with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.<br/>
* ''dig'' (to pour) → ''deganah'' ((act of) pouring)<br/>
* ''dig'' (to pour) → ''deganah'' ((act of) pouring)<br/>
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''mešanah'' (sight)<br/>
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''mešanah'' (sight)<br/>
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotanah'' (shopping)
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotanah'' (shopping)


'''-yāva''' with lengthening denotes a quality.<br/>
'''-na''' ('''-ra''' after ''t'' or ''d''; '''-iyāna''' after ''Cy'', '''-uvāna''' after ''Cv'') with lengthening denotes a quality.<br/>
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālyāva'' (union)<br/>
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālna'' (union)<br/>
* ''hælvė'' (fruit) → ''šaulvyāva'' (fertility) (morphemically //hьaulvyava//)<br/>
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''šaulviyāna'' (fertility) (morphemically //hyaulviyāna//)<br/>
* ''blut'' (to clean) → ''blūtyāva'' (cleanliness)
* ''åbdv'' (to swell, blow up) → ''åbduvāna'' (swollenness, bloatiness)
* Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an adjective (e.g. ''chlærausis'' (easy) → ''chlærausyāva'' (easiness)) and in a few exceptions (e.g. ''lalla'' (high) → ''lalliyāva'' (highness, superiority)). ''taugyāva'' (life) has ''au'' because it's derived from ''taugikā'' (heart) and not the bare root ''tug'' (to beat).
* ''blut'' (to clean) → ''blūtra'' (cleanliness)
* Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix, much like in causative verbs (e.g. ''vald'' (to (be) open) → ''uvaldyāva'' (opening, state of being open)).
* Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an ''-aus-'' adjectival verb (e.g. ''chlæraus-'' ((to be) easy) → ''chlærausna'' (easiness)) and in a few exceptions.
* Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix (e.g. ''vald'' (to (be) open) → ''uvaldra'' (opening, state of being open)).


'''-išam''' has the same meaning as ''-yāva'', but it's rarer.<br/>
'''-išam''' has the same meaning as ''-na'', but it's rarer.<br/>
* ''yųlniltas'' (edible) → ''yųlniltešam'' (edibility)<br/>
* ''yųlniltas'' (edible) → ''yųlniltešam'' (edibility)
*  ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvišam'' (sweetness)<br/>
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvišam'' (sweetness)
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''ñailuišam'' (coldness)
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''ñailūvišam'' (coldness)
* ''nevy'' (to model, to give a form) → ''nevīšam'' (plastic) (This word underwent a meaning shift from "modellability" to a common material with that quality, replacing the derived form ''nevīšandhūs'' previously used. "Modellability" is ''nyaviyāna'' in contemporary Chlouvānem.)


'''-āmita''', often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English ''-ism''.<br/>
'''-āmita''' (''-yāmita'' when used with nouns with thematic ''e'' or ''i''), often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English ''-ism''.<br/>
* ''çuliė'' (friend (female)) → ''çuliāmita'' (friendship)<br/>
* ''lalteh'' (friend (female)) → ''laltyāmita'' (friendship)<br/>
*  ''ėmīla'' (tiger) → ''ėmīlāmita'' (nobility (quality); most important people in society<ref>Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.</ref>)<br/>
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlāmita'' (nobility (quality); most important people in society<ref>Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.</ref>)<br/>
*  ''ñæltah'' (sister (for a male)) → ''ñæltāmita'' (brotherhood)
* ''ñæltah'' (sister (male's)) → ''ñæltāmita'' (brotherhood)


'''-ūyas''', with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings.<br/>
'''-tsām''' ('''-utsām''' after ''ñ, š'', and voiced stops except ''d(h)''), with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings, though typically instrumental.
*  ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālūyas'' (number)<br/>
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''māltsām'' (number)
*  ''lij'' (to sing) → ''lejūyas'' (choir)<br/>
* ''lij'' (to sing) → ''lejutsām'' (choir)
*  ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvūyas'' (dessert, cake; something sweet)
* ''dhāḍ'' (to speak) → ''dhāḍutsām'' (voice)
* ''kul'' (to say) → ''kultsām'' (word) (irregular lack of middle-grade ablaut)


'''-rṣūs''' (''-ṛṣūs'' after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.<br/>
'''-rṣūs''' (''-ṛṣūs'' after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.
* ''yaud'' (to catch) → ''yaudṛṣūs'' (trap)<br/>
* ''yaud-'' (to catch) → ''yaudṛṣūs'' (trap)
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''meširṣūs'' (eye <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<ref>Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.</ref><br/>
* ''miš-'' (to see) → ''meširṣūs'' (eye <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<ref>Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.</ref>
* ''hær'' (to kiss) → ''hærṣūs'' (lips (pair of))<br/>
* ''nail-'' (to kiss) → ''nailṛṣūs'' (lips (pair of))


'''-gis''' denotes something used ''for'' doing an action, not always synonymous with ''-rṣūs''. ''-t-gis'' becomes ''-ñjis''.<br/>
'''-gis''' denotes something used ''for'' doing an action, not always synonymous with ''-rṣūs''. ''-t-gis'' becomes ''-ñjis''.
*  ''mešīn'' (eye) → ''mešīlgis'' (glasses (pair of))<br/>
* ''mešīn'' (eye) → ''mešīlgis'' (glasses (pair of))
*  ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tulgis'' (drumstick)<br/>
* ''tug-'' (to beat) → ''tulgis'' (drumstick)
*  ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lguñjis'' (money, currency)
* ''lgut-'' (to buy) → ''lguñjis'' (money, currency)


'''-oe''' (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.<br/>
'''-oe''' (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.
*  ''hal'' (to call) → ''haloe'' (name, noun)<br/>
* ''hal-'' (to call) → ''haloe'' (name, noun)
*  ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithoe'' (development; the way something is carried out)<br/>
* ''mbiṇḍh-'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''mbiṇḍhoe'' (development; the way something is carried out)
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yąloe'' (meal)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yąloe'' (meal)


'''-īn''' plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English ''-er''); usually it is a person, but not always.<br/>
'''-īn''' plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English ''-er''); usually it is a person, but not always.
* ''bhi'' (to take care of; to care for) → ''bhayīn'' (someone who takes care; guardian)<br/>
* ''bhi-'' (to take care of; to care for) → ''bhayīn'' (someone who takes care; guardian)
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''togīn'' (heart)<br/>
* ''tug-'' (to beat) → ''togīn'' (heart)
*  ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotīn'' (buyer)
* ''lgut-'' (to buy) → ''lgotīn'' (buyer)


'''-āvi''' denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.<br/>
'''-āršis''' is a mostly non-productive agentive suffix like ''-īn'', surviving in a few ancient forms as well as some colloquial pejoratives:
*  ''lameṣa'' (coconut palm) → ''laṃṣāvi'' (coconut)<br/>
* ''lęk-'' (to measure) → ''lękāršis'' (surveyor, inspector)
*  ''mešanah'' (sight) → ''mešanąvi'' (knowledge)<br/>
* ''dhīl-'' (to be idle) → ''dhīlāršis'' (lazy ass (pejor.))
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yųlāvi'' (strength <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* ''ēreša'' (teardrop) → ''ērešāršis'' (crybaby (pejor.))


'''-āmis''', with lengthening, means "made of X".<br/>
'''-āvi''' denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.
* ''tāmira'' (rock, stone) → ''tāmirāmis'' (stone tool)<br/>
* ''lameṣa'' (coconut palm) → ''laṃṣāvi'' (coconut)
*  ''tarlā'' (knowledge, science) → ''tārlāmis'' (wisdom)<br/>
* ''mešanah'' (sight) ''mešanąvi'' (knowledge)
*  ''lil'' (to live) → ''līlāmis'' (a blissful place)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yųlāvi'' (strength <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either ''h'', ''s'', or ''m'') do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ''ñariāh'' (mountain) → ''ñariāmis'' (mountainous area)).
* It is also used with surnames of writers, usually as a plurale tantum, in order to derive words meaning "the works of...", e.g. ''yukahināryāvi'' "the works of Lileikhurāvi Yukahināri ''Mæmihūmya''".


'''-ikā''' has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.<br/>
'''-āmis''', with lengthening, means "made of X".
*  ''daša'' (rain) → ''dāšikā'' (monsoon) (irregular lengthening)<br/>
* ''tāmira'' (rock, stone) → ''tāmirāmis'' (stone tool)
*  ''hær'' (to kiss) → ''hærikā'' (love <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<br/>
* ''tarlā'' (knowledge, science) → ''tārlāmis'' (wisdom)
''lalāruṇa'' (giant domestic lizard) → ''lalārauṇikā'' (knight mounting a ''lalāruṇa'')
* ''lil-'' (to live) → ''līlāmis'' (a blissful place)
* Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either ''h'', ''s'', or ''m'') do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ''ñaryāh'' (mountain) → ''ñaryāmis'' (mountainous area)).


'''-dhūs''' means "having X".<br/>
'''-ūneh''' ('''-īneh''' after stems in -Cy-, '''-ēneh''' for nouns in ''-ē''), with middle grade ablaut (rarely strong grade), has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.
*  ''dara'' (activity) → ''daradhūs'' (verb)<br/>
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašūneh'' (monsoon)
*  ''šaṇṭrās'' (field, soil) → ''šaṇṭrādhūs'' (countryside)<br/>
* ''nail-'' (to kiss) → ''nailūneh'' (love <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
*  ''hælvė'' (fruit) → ''hælvidhūs'' (fruiting tree; <small>literary:</small> pregnant woman)
* ''yaiva'' (all) + ''lairē'' (day) → ''yaivlairēṇeh'' (everyday life)
* ''lalāruṇa'' (giant domestic lizard) → ''lalārauṇūneh'' (knight mounting a ''lalāruṇa'')


'''-bān''' and '''-ūrah''' are two roughly equivalent suffixes used for locations. The first one is generally used after vowels, the second after consonants, but it's no strict rule.<br/>
'''-dhūs''' means "having X".
* ''hælvė'' (fruit) → ''hælvėbān'' (orchard)<br/>
* ''dara'' (activity) → ''daradhūs'' (verb)
*  ''lil'' (to live) → ''lilūrah'' (world)<br/>
* ''šaṇṭrās'' (field, soil) → ''šaṇṭrādhūs'' (countryside)
* ''peith'' (to go, to walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūrah'' (passage)
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''hælvidhūs'' (fruiting tree; <small>literary:</small> pregnant woman)


'''-(l)āṇa''' forms a true collective noun:<br/>
'''-bān''' and '''-ūrah''' are two roughly equivalent suffixes used for locations. The first one is generally used after vowels, the second after consonants, but it's no strict rule.
* ''çuliė'' (friend (female)) → ''çulielāṇa'' (group of friends)
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''hælvēbān'' (orchard)
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lilūrah'' (world)
* ''peith'' (to go, to walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūrah'' (passage)
 
'''-(l)āṇa''' forms a true collective noun:
* ''lalteh'' (friend (female)) → ''laltelāṇa'' (group of friends)
* ''jīma'' (character, symbol, letter) → ''jīmalāṇa'' (writing system)
* ''jīma'' (character, symbol, letter) → ''jīmalāṇa'' (writing system)
* ''maiva'' (word) → ''maivalāṇa'' (lexicon)
* ''maiva'' (word) → ''maivalāṇa'' (lexicon)


'''-(l)ænah''' denotes a tree or a plant having a certain fruit<ref>As for all living things, being Calémere a different planet, the given translation is the one of the closest equivalent on Earth.</ref>.<br/>
'''-(l)ænah''' denotes a tree or a plant having a certain fruit<ref>As for all living things, being Calémere a different planet, the given translation is the one of the closest equivalent on Earth.</ref>.
*  ''haiçah'' (pineapple) → ''haiçænah'' (pineapple tree)<br/>
*  ''haisah'' (pineapple) → ''haisænah'' (pineapple tree)
*  ''maʔika'' (uncooked rice) → ''maʔikænah'' (rice plant)<br/>
*  ''maɂika'' (uncooked rice) → ''maɂikænah'' (rice plant)
*  ''šikālas'' (prickly pear) → ''šikālænah'' (prickly pear cactus)
*  ''šikālas'' (prickly pear) → ''šikālænah'' (prickly pear cactus)


'''-yus''' (''-yūs'' if there are only short syllables) is used with toponyms and is one of the most common ways to form denonymal nouns. As many of the nouns these words are derived from are proper nouns and of non-Chlouvānem origin, there are often irregular formations, e.g. using only a part of the original word.<br/>
'''-yūs''' is used with toponyms and is one of the most common ways to form demonyms. As many of the nouns these words are derived from are proper nouns and of non-Chlouvānem origin, there are often irregular formations, e.g. using only a part of the original word.
* ''Līlasuṃghāṇa'' → ''līlasuṃghāṇyus''<br/>
* ''Līlasuṃghāṇa'' → ''līlasuṃghāṇyūs''
* ''Cami'' → ''camiyūs''<br/>
* ''Cami'' → ''camiyūs''
* ''Galiākina'' → ''Galiākyus''
* ''Ajāɂilbādhi'' → ''ajāɂilbādhyūs''
 
'''-mana''' ('''-ana''' after ''CC'' clusters) is often found with the meaning of "that has to be X"; usually, a synonymous word may be formed by ''-s'' derivation from a necessitative stem, but some ''-mana'' words have their own specialized meaning:
* ''ṭvur-'' (to believe) → ''ṭvurmaṇa'' (miracle)
* ''miš-'' (to see) → ''mišmana'' (attraction) (also ''memikṣūs'')
* ''tṛl-'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlmana'' (rule) (not synonymous with ''tartṛlsūs'', meaning "needed knowledge, prerequisite")
 
'''-yai''' (often with lengthening) forms nouns with the meaning of "pertaining to", generally applied to nouns denoting inanimate (but usually concrete) concepts. Such nouns are found in literature with an anaphorical use.<br/>It is commonly found in Chlouvānem surnames. In chemistry, it denotes binary compounds, usually with a dvandva stem.
* ''vīhatam'' (farm) → ''vīhātyai'' (farmer; farm's)
* ''svāṣṭa'' (armor) → ''svāṣṭyai'' (armored knight)
* ''bilumbida'' (sodium) + ''talyelīm'' (chlorine) → ''bilumbītalyelīyai'' (sodium chloride)
 
'''-ceh''', '''-cænah''', and '''-cañīh''' (all often with palatalization of the last consonant) are three different (but with roughly the same meaning) diminutive-forming suffixes; some of them have developed distinct meanings. They can also be compounded, as in '''-cæñ-cañīh''':
* ''nūrya'' (child) → ''nūricænah'' (little child)
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlcañīh'' (cat)
* ''pǣka'' (taste)  → ''pǣcicænah'' (hors d'œuvre, entrée)
 
Similarly, '''-rarā''' (a likely Laiputaši borrowing) is used as an augmentative, but is only found in informal styles.
* ''dårṣa'' (cool, nice) → ''dårṣararā'' (fantastic)
* ''jāmṝṣa'' (dam) → ''jāmṝṣararā'' (a huge dam)
* ''alūs'' (bottle) → ''alūrarā'' (a big bottle)
 
===Verb-forming morphemes===
Denominal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are not formed with derivational suffixes; a "light verb" is attached to the semantic root instead; the semantic root remains invariable but the light verb is conjugated (as a prefixed one). The light verb used are especially ''dṛke'' (to do, make), but also ''jilde'' (to do an action), ''jānake'' (to feel (physical)), and ''gyake'' (to be). Some examples:
* ''āmaya'' (collection) → ''āmayadṛke'' (to collect)
* ''språma'' (glue) → ''språñjilde'' (to glue)
* ''jålkha'' (cold (sensation)) → ''jålkhajānake'' (to be/feel cold)
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''tæñailūgyake'' (to freeze) (note the ''tæ-'' dynamic prefix).
 
The other basic derived formation is the frequentative verb, formed with reduplication (with a long vowel) and '''-ve(y)-''' (''-vi(y)-'' in the past tense<ref>Ex.: ''dṝdaveyute'' "I repetitively do" vs. ''dṝdaviyaute'' "I repetitively did"</ref>). ''-ṛ'' reduplicates as ''ṝ'', but becomes ''a'' in the root.<br/>Due to the common use of this form in modern Chlouvānem, some grammarians consider it as an inflectional category instead of a derivation. Note though that for motion verbs only multidirectional ones have a frequentative form (with iterative meaning); the multidirectionals already act as frequentative forms of the monodirectionals.
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''dṝdave-'' (to repetitively do)
* ''na-jaly-'' (to happen) → ''najājlive-'' (to keep happening; to regularly happen, to occur)<ref>The verb "to happen" does not exist as an iterative.</ref> (''jaly-'' reduplicates as ''jā-jli-'', with the ''i'' from the root ''y'').
* ''-jaly-'' (to be) + various prefixes → ''bījājlive-'' (to cease to be); ''galajājlive-'' (to remain in one place; to visit; to keep being)
* ''tvorg-'' (to fear) → ''totvargve-'' (to fear over and over again) (''tvo-'' reduplicates as ''to-'' instead of ''tva-'').
* ''låvy-'' (to slip) → ''laulavive-'' (to slip around here and there) (''-å-'' reduplicates as ''-au-'' and becomes ''a'' in the root).
Note that ''nairīveke'' conjugates as a frequentative verb, but is not frequentative and does not have frequentative forms.<br/>
Frequentative perfect stems have the ablauted vowel in the reduplication and a long one in the root (cf. ''miš-'', bare frequentative ''mīmišve-'', perfect frequentative ''memīšve-''); both vowels are long for non-ablauted stems (cf. ''nāmv-'', ''nānamve-'', ''nānāmve-'').<br/>
Inverse ablauting roots have similar rules: the bare frequentative uses the reduplication of the nonreduced root and the reduced vowel in the root itself (''vald-'' → va-uld-ve- → ''voldve-''); the frequentative perfect is like the normal frequentative of other verbs, with the long vowel in the reduplication only (''vald-'' → ''vāvaldve-'').
 
In many cases, frequentatives are used with an iterative meaning; the latter, if needed for disambiguation, may be specified by the particle ''dīdān''.


===Verbs===
====Adjectival verbs====
The main denominal verb-forming suffix is '''-ora-''', used mainly with the meaning of "to make/create X" or "to have X":
Adjectival verbs, however, do have some ways to be derived from other parts of speech.
* ''āmaya'' (collection) → ''āmayorake'' (to collect)
* ''yuiça'' (sound) → ''yuiçorake'' (to make a sound)
* ''çuliė'' (friend (f)) → ''çuliyorake'' (to befriend, to become friends with)


'''-ьeiš-''' (alternating with preconsonantal '''-ьeiki-''') forms a verb with the meaning of "to make something X(-like)" or something related to using X:
'''-ūk-ke''' is the most common adjectival verb-forming suffix, denoting something strictly related to an object or a verb. Note that they are all thematic verbs, even if their infinitive is contracted (Archaic Chl. ''-ūkake'' → Classical and Modern ''-ūkke''). Often they are interchangeable with the genitive form of the noun they derived from:
* ''raikas'' (smoke) → ''raiceiške'' (to smoke food)
* ''avyāṣa'' (time) → ''avyāṣūkke'' ([to be] temporal)
* ''lallāmita'' (future) → ''lallāmitieiške'' (to plan)
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlærūkke'' (of the light)
* ''brausa'' (sainthood) → ''brausieiške'' (to sanctify, hallow)
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašūkke'' (rainy, concerning rain)

'''-uy-a-ke''' is a rarer variant of ''-ūk-ke'', most commonly found for qualities related to people, but not exclusively (see third example):
* ''jāyim'' (girl) → ''jāyimuyake'' (girly, girlish)
* ''saṃhāram'' (boy) → ''saṃhāruyake'' (boyish)
* ''irūtākalam'' (atom) → ''irūtāruyake'' (atomic) (the ''-r'' is etymological from Ancient Kūṣṛmāṭhi)


Positional prefixes can be used to derive new, more specific verbs, from other ones; [[Chlouvānem#Positional_prefixes_as_derivational_affixes|see the section under ''Positional verbs'' for more.]]
'''-aus-a-ke''' (rarely '''-us-a-ke''') forms adjectival verbs related to a quality that is applied to some object, but more abstractly related than those formed with ''-ūkke''; sometimes they are only figurative:
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlærausake'' (easy)
* ''pāṇi'' (side) → ''pāṇyausake'' (peripheral, less important)
* ''namęlь'' (to make an effort, to apply oneself, to work harder) → ''namęliausake'' (Stakhanovite)
* Nouns ending in ''-ā'' typically only add '''-sь-''' (''-si-ke''):
** ''laikā'' (innocence) → ''laikāsike'' (innocent)


Prefixes are a common way to form many specific forms of verbs, especially related to how much or how an action is carried out. As all of these derive verbs from other verbs, only the root is given in examples:<br/>
'''-nilt-a-ke''' translates English ''-able'', and the circumfix '''uṣ- -niltake''' translates to "un- -able" or, sometimes, "difficult to X". The rare '''ñǣ- -niltake''' translates as "easy to X".<br/>The ''uṣ-'' prefix has the allomorphs '-'' (before voiced stops), ''uš-'' (before ''c'' and ''ch''), and ''u-'' (before ''l''+consonant); ''uṣ-'' plus any sibilant becomes ''ukṣ-''.
'''ñavu-''' ('''ñau-''' before a nasal, '''v''' or '''r''') forms verbs meaning "a bit more than needed". Verbs whose root has '''' as the main vowel do not ablaut and always have middle-grade ''ar'', except if there is another prefix (see second example):
* ''tṛl'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlniltake'' (understandable) ''uṣṭṛlniltake'' (uncomprehensible; difficult to understand) / ''ñǣtṛlniltake'' (easy to understand)
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''ñavudar-'' (to do something a bit more than needed)
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yųlniltake'' (edible) → ''uṣyųlniltake'' (unedible)
** ''āndṛ-'' (to build, create) ''ñavāndṛ-'' (to build/create a bit more than needed)
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutniltake'' (buyable) → ''ulgutniltake'' (not buyable)
* ''vald-'' (to open) → ''ñauvald-'' (to open a bit more than needed)
* ''flun-'' (to go, walk (monod.)) → ''ñavuflun-'' (to walk somewhat further ahead than needed)


'''vīvai-''' forms verbs meaning "too much"; verbs with '''' always have ''ar'' and are non-ablauting:
'''-ṣeni-ke''' (morph. ''seny-ke'', all root verbs) translates "having X as a quality", usually added to nouns, or "X-like" in some cases; it may be synonymous with the ''-dhūs'' derivative. ''u-'' and ''i-'' stems (thus ''-uh'', ''-ih'', ''-us''...) lengthen that vowel before the suffix.
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''vīvaidar-'' (to do something too much)
* ''rahēlah'' (health) → ''rahēlṣenike'' (healthy)
* ''pugl-'' (to sleep) → ''vīvaipugl-'' (to sleep too much)
* ''nakṣuma'' (music) → ''nakṣuṃṣenike'' (having a musical talent)
* ''flun-'' (to go, walk (monod.)) → ''vīvaiflun-'' (to walk too much ahead)
* ''migmairuh'' (emerald) → ''migmairūṣenike'' (emeraldine, emerald-like)


'''trān-''' ('''trā-''' before voiced stops, nasals, or '''r'''; it combines with a following ''y'' to form ''trāñ-'') forms verbs of repetition or continuative actions, or "to keep X-ing"; verbs with '''' always have ''ar'' and are non-ablauting:
====Compound verbs====
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) ''trādar-'' (to do something repetitively, to keep doing something)
Chlouvānem uses compound verbs as its main method of deriving verbs from nouns. Such "verbs" are actually a nominal root which does not decline followed by a conjugating verb. The verb used influences the meaning that the compound will have:
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) ''trāñųl-'' (to eat repetitively, to keep eating)
* ''dṛke'' (to do) is probably the most commonly used, and may have a meaning of using something (denoted by the nominal root) to treat something else (cf. ''bikṣurdṛke'' "to deodorize" < ''bikṣurga'' "deodorant"), of moving or acting like the nominal root (''yināṃdṛke'' "to protect" < ''yinām'' "protection"), or of simply having or creating something (''āmayadṛke'' "to collect" < ''āmaya'' "collection").
* ''khlu-'' (to search, look for) → ''trālkhlu-'' (to keep searching)
* ''kitte'' (to put) is used for a meaning of addition of the nominal root or its characteristics to something (cf. ''nāmṛkitte'' "to add salt" < ''nāṃra'' "salt).
* ''męlike'' (to give) is sometimes used with the same meaning as ''kitte'' (cf. ''junyāmęlike'' "to plant flowers" < ''junyā'' "flower").
* ''jilde'' (to act) is used for subjects "emitting" or "giving off" something (cf. ''lāhajilde'' "to judge" < ''lāham'' "judgement"), also for subjects possessing (''dhokajilde'' "to mean" < ''dhokam'' "meaning") or undergoing something (''lañšijilde'' "to marry" < ''lañši'' (arch.) braid, wedding), and also for weather phenomena<ref>Rain, specifically, is more commonly used as the subject of the verb ''buñjñake'', meaning "to run" for water (in Chl. rain runs just like a river does).</ref> (''dašajilde'' "to rain" < ''daša'' "rain").
* ''gyake'' (to be) is used, like in one meaning of ''dṛke'', for moving or acting like the nominal root. Typically, it is more for states than actions (the prototypical and most common example is ''pṛšcāṃgyake'' "to be pleasing" < ''pṛšcām'' "something pleasing"<ref>The word ''pṛšcām'' alone is almost never used in contemporary Chlouvānem.</ref>).
* ''jānake'' (to feel) has a meaning partially overlapping with ''jalle'' (and ''dṛke''), particularly marking the "feeling" of a (usually uncontrollable) condition (''jålkhajānake'' "to be cold" < ''jålkha'' "cold").
* ''milke'' (to take) has a varied range of meaning: getting or gathering something (''vīrādhmilke'' "to adopt" < ''vīrādhen'' "orphan";  ''mailьlut(a)milke'' "to take advantage" < ''mailьluta'' "advantage"), also the opposite, taking something away (cf. ''rantamilke'' "to peel (fruits)" < ''rantas'' "peel"), and also overlapping partially with ''kitte'' and ''męlike'' in marking the addition of something or, more, properly, the act of bringing something (''prātamilke'' "to get windy; (''figur.'') to accelerate" < ''prātas'' "wind" - cf. ''prātajilde'' "to be windy").
* ''bismilke'' (to take away) and ''bīdṛke'' (to destroy) are used, more commonly than ''milke'', for the meaning of removing or taking something away: (''ssūbismilke'' "to calm down" < ''ssūgis'' "something that worries"; ''lilembīdṛke'' "(''euphem.'') to kill" < ''liloe'' "life").


'''yavi-''' ('''yav-''' before '''y''') forms resultative verbs, with the meaning of "to finish X-ing" or "to X everything":
Sometimes, the most meaningful element of a compound verb is not otherwise found as a standalone word in Chlouvānem, as in ''pṛšcāṃjalle'' (to like), or ''hārlājmęlike'' (to prefer).
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''yavidṛ'' (to finish, complete (transitive))
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yavyųl'' (to finish eating; to eat everything)
* ''mūmik-'' (to dance) → ''yavimūmik'' (to finish dancing; <small>''idiomatic:''</small> to start working, to get back to work)


'''tæ(m)-''' forms mainly dynamic verbs from stative ones (being often synonymous with their causative patientive forms) and from adjectives. It is also used with nouns, forming verbs with the meaning of "to become a(n) X":
===Prefixes===
* ''murkas'' (black) → ''tæmurk-'' (to become black; <small>''causative:''</small> to make/paint something black)
'''Prefixes''' are a major part of Chlouvānem derivational morphology. Most of them are the same as for positional and motion verbs — [[Chlouvānem#Positional_verbs|for their formation and use,]] [[Chlouvānem#Origin_prefixes|see the related section.]] Most prefixes are used with verbs, and are found with nouns only in derived forms; some of them, however, can be used also or exclusively with nouns and adjectives. Prefixes derive usually from Proto-Lahob, but a few chiefly nominal ones are from Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi words.<br/>
* ''jāyim'' (girl) → ''tæjāyim-'' (to become a girl)
Here follows a complete list of '''all''' prefixes used in Chlouvānem and their meaning. When two prefixes are divided by a wave dash, the first is ''lative'' and the second is ''ablative''; <small>NOM</small> marks meanings of nouns derived with that prefix.
* ''būṃṣ-'' (to be dry; <small>''causative:''</small> to dry something) → ''tæmbūṃṣ-'' (to become dry; <small>''causative:''</small> to dry something (rarely used))


'''nare-''' ('''nar-''' before another prefix) forms verbs with applicative meanings:
====Positional and motional prefixes====
* ''pugl-'' (to sleep) ''narepugl-'' (to sleep during something)
* ''ta- 〜 tų-'' - generic direction

* ''yųl-'' (to eat) ''nareyųl-'' (to have a meal with someone, to go eating with someone)
* ''ān- 〜 yana-'' - on, above
* ''ta-flun-'' (to arrive on foot) ''nartaflun-'' (to reach a place on foot)
* ''šu- 〜 šer-'' - under, below
* ''ṭvā- 〜 ṭus-'' - between
* ''gin- 〜 ją-'' - among
* ''nī- 〜 ani-'' - within/from within inside
* ''ū(b)- 〜 yom-'' - close to
* ''bis- 〜 bara-'' - far, away
* ''tad-'' <small>(''tata-'' before '''l''')</small> ''〜 tasi-'' - attached to; against
* ''įs- 〜 įṣu-'' - hanging
* ''na(ñ)- 〜 nani-'' - inside
* ''kau- 〜 kuvi-'' - outside
* ''viṣ- 〜 vyeṣa-'' - opposite; somewhere else
* ''kami- 〜 kara-'' - around
* ''pri- 〜 prā-'' - behind
* ''mai- 〜 mīram-'' - in front of
* ''vai- 〜 vǣ-'' - in a corner; bordering; at the limit
* ''sāṭ- 〜 ṣlū-'' - next to; along; on the side of
* ''lā(d)- 〜 lo(d)-'' - in the center of
* ''vyā- 〜 veši-'' - left
* ''māha- 〜 mege-'' - right
* ''pid-'' - facing (positional only)
* ''nal-'' - towards the center; inwards; convergent movement
* ''vād-'' - away from the center; outwards; divergent movement


'''min-''' forms transitive verbs from intransitive (mostly dynamic) ones:
====Motional prefixes====
* ''pūn-'' (to work) → ''mimpūn-'' (to work on something)
* ''be- 〜 ter-'' - along the surface
* ''gya-'' (to be) → ''milgya-'' (to experience)
* ''gala- 〜 hali-'' - through, across
* ''peith-'' (to go (multidirectional)) → ''mimpeith-'' (to walk on foot while staying inside a certain place)
* ''naš-'' - completely, until the end; <small>NOM:</small> omni-, pan-, entirely
* ''vod-'' - avoiding
* ''paṣ-'' - ahead, beyond; also <small>NOM:</small> further, again, re-
* ''sam-'' - movement to the following place/person/object in a set; <small>NOM:</small> after, post-


===Adjectives===
====Verbal-only prefixes====
Adjectives are formed from either nouns or verbs by using the following suffixes: All terms are given here in citation form (dragon singular)
* ''tæ(m)-'' - inceptive/inchoative
* ''raš-'' - to do something a bit more than needed (''ral-'' or ''rar-'' before voiced consonants)
* ''yā-'' - too much
* ''iva-'' - completely, also intensive
* ''nare-'' - applicative (''nar-'' before another prefix, cf. the common form ''narta-'' for "to reach"-verbs)
* ''min-'' - transitivizer of intransitive verbs


'''-ūkas''' is the most common adjective-forming suffix, denoting something strictly related to an object or a verb. Often they are interchangeable with the genitive form of the noun they derived from:
====Other prefixes====
* ''avyāṣa'' (time) ''avyāṣūkas'' (temporal)
* ''o-'' - before, pre-, proto-, preceding (''os-'' before vowels)
* ''chlærūm'' (light) ''chlærūkas'' (of the light)
* ''tail-'' - multi-, pluri-
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašūkas'' (rainy, concerning rain)
* ''emib(u)-'' or ''tūt(u)-'' - one, mono-, uni-, homo-
* ''lani-'' - same, fellow
* ''vre-'' - bad
* ''demi-'' - self-


'''-ausis''' (rarely '''-usis''') forms adjectives related to a quality that is applied to some object, but more abstractly related than those formed with ''-ūkas-''; sometimes they are only figurative:
===Specific terms===
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlærausis'' (easy)
Derivational terms considered "specific" are those mostly found in certain jargons. Some of these are applied directly to a Lällshag root instead of a Chlouvānem one:
* ''pāṇi'' (side) → ''pāṇyausis'' (peripheral, less important)
* ''namęlь'' (to make an effort, to apply oneself, to work harder) → ''namęliausis'' (Stakhanovite)


'''-niltas''' translates English ''-able'', and the circumfix '''uṣ- -niltas''' translates to "un- -able" or, sometimes, "difficult to X". The rare '''ñæi- -niltas''' translates as "easy to X".<br/>The ''uṣ-'' prefix has the allomorphs ''ū-'' (before voiced stops), ''uš-'' (before ''c'' and ''ch''), and ''u-'' (before ''l''+consonant); ''uṣ-'' plus any sibilant becomes ''ukṣ-''.
Used in politics and/or the arts:
* ''tṛl'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlniltas'' (understandable) → ''uṣṭṛlniltas'' (uncomprehensible; difficult to understand) / ''ñæitṛlniltas'' (easy to understand)
* '''-nātra''' has two main meanings: ''-ism'' (as in a doctrine) in a political sense, and ''-esque'' in the arts, cf. ''yaivcārṇātra'' "communism" (< ''yaiva'' "all", ''cār-'' "to have"), or ''lānūṣurṇātra'' "in the style of writer Naryejūramāvi Lānūṣurah ''Mæmihomah''".
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yųlniltas'' (edible) ''uṣyųlniltas'' (unedible)
** '''-nātryūs''' (''-nātra-yūs'') is the term for a person that follows such a doctrine or style, cf. ''yaivcārṇātryūs'' "communist"; ''lānūṣurṇātryūs'' "someone whose writing is Lānūṣuraësque".
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutniltas'' (buyable) → ''ulgutniltas'' (not buyable)
** Note that ''lija'' and ''lejīn'' (lit. "song" and "singer") were formerly alternatives to these. They notably remain in ''nāɂahilūṃlija'' "politico-religious doctrine inspired by Great Inquisitor Kælahīmāvi Nāɂahilūma ''Martayinām''; Yunyalīlti religious extremism" and ''nāɂahilūṃlejīn'', as well as in ''arāmilija'' "pacifism".


'''-ṣenis''' translates "having X as a quality", usually added to nouns, or "X-like" in some cases; it may be synonymous with the ''-dhūs'' derivative. ''u-'' and ''i-'' stems (thus ''-uh'', ''-ih'', ''-us''...) lengthen that vowel before the suffix.
Used for medical terminology:
* ''rahėlah'' (health) ''rahėlṣenis'' (healthy)
* '''-gulas''' usually translates "-philia" or "-mania", particularly in medical contexts, e.g. ''ryukagulas'' "masochism" from ''ryuka'' "pain".
* ''nakṣuma'' (music) → ''nakṣuṃṣenis'' (having a musical talent)
** '''-gulašålyē''' is the related term for someone who has that (thus "-philiac" or "-maniac"), e.g. ''ryukagulašålyē'' "masochist".
* ''meimairuh'' (emerald) ''meimairūṣenis'' (emeraldine, emerald-like)
* '''-rauga''' is a generic term used in medicine for names of illnesses or conditions affecting health, e.g. ''gåtnirauga'' "obesity" from ''gåtnake'' "to vomit"; ''skañcrauga'' "insomnia" from ''skañcake'' (to be awake at night).
** '''-raugotis''' is the term for someone affected by a ''-rauga'', e.g. ''skañcraugotis'' "insomniac".
* '''-ītsun''' is a rarer alternative to ''-ræṣka'', e.g. ''vrayobulītsun'' "asplenia" (''vre-'' (bad) + ''obula'' (spleen)), or ''lagukītsun'' "paralysis" (the latter with the root of Lällshag ''gahoke'' (still)).
** '''-ītsunis''' is the corresponding term for affected organisms, e.g. ''vrayobulītsunis'' "aspleniac", ''lagukītsunis'' "paralyzed".
* '''-måkṣan''' is used for inflammatory diseases, cf. "-itis", like ''ṇīṭmåkṣan'' (dermatitis) or ''āḍhyāsnūlimåkṣan'' (meningitis).


The suffixes '''-apus'''/'''-epus''' or '''-ækṣasis'''/'''-īkṣasis''' are sometimes considered, as far as the grammar of everyday Chlouvānem is concerned, ways to derive adjectives from other adjectives. [[Chlouvānem#Comparatives_and_superlatives|As seen in the section about adjectives,]] these are actually the endings of synthetic comparatives and superlatives, which are obsolete in modern Chlouvānem except from the most formal registers.<br/>
====Compounding====
Their classification as derivational suffixes is sometimes made starting from a few forms which have got an additional meaning (often with notable semantic shifts, and usually starting from a single use later generalized) apart from the "more/most X", and they're nowadays used with that meaning (with the comparative being made analytically with ''nanū'').
* '''tarlā''' (knowledge) is used as the head element of compounds, with a meaning like ''-logy'' in English. Sometimes the meaning is only abstracted (see second example) or has changed with time (see third example):
* ''kāmilas'' (blue) → ''kāmilapus'' (healthy) ("blue" is used also in the sense of English "green" as "environmental-friendly"; the semantic shift here has its origin in place descriptions, with "bluer" places being less urbanized and less polluted ones; later the "healthy" meaning was generalized)
** ''babhrām'' (land) → ''babhrātarlā'' (geography)
* ''tāmirūkas'' (rocky) → ''tāmirūkapus'' (difficult)
** ''smoḍ-'' (to count, to enumerate) → ''smoṇḍarlā'' (mathematics)
* ''huliāyausis'' (glowing in the dark; visible as the moon) → ''huliāyausīkṣasis'' (recognizable, easy to recognize)
** ''ladragyalah'' (inn) → ''ladragyaltarlā'' (economics)


===Compounding===
==See also==
* [[Chlouvānem/Syntax|Chlouvānem syntax]]
* [[Chlouvānem/Positional and motion verbs|Chlouvānem positional and motion verbs]]
* [[Chlouvānem/Exterior and interior verbs|Chlouvānem exterior and interior verbs]]


== Notes ==
== Notes ==


[[Category:Chlouvānem]]
[[Category:Chlouvānem]]

Latest revision as of 13:12, 2 September 2021

Chlouvānem is a highly inflected language with a synthetic morphology. Five parts of speech are traditionally distinguished: nouns, verbs, pronouns, numerals, and particles. Throughout the page there will be references to the topics treated in the pages on Chlouvānem syntax, positional and motion verbs, and exterior and interior verbs.


Nouns (halenī)

See Lahob languages § Morphology for diachronical tables and comparisons with sister languages.
See also Chlouvānem syntax § Noun phrase for discussion of case usage.

The Chlouvānem noun (haloe, pl. halenī) is highly inflected - it declines for:


  • Three numbers:
Singular (emibausire smoḍūm)
Dual (danyausire smoḍūm)
Plural (tailyausire smoḍūm)
  • Twelve cases:

Direct (daradhūkire dirūnnevya)
Vocative (halausire dirūnnevya)

Accusative (dṛṣokire dirūnnevya)
Ergative (darinūkire dirūnnevya)
Genitive (cārūkire dirūnnevya)

Translative (najamarcūkire dirūnnevya)

Exessive (nanijamarcūkire dirūnnevya)
Essive (jalausire dirūnnevya)
Dative (męlyausire dirūnnevya)
Ablative (tųlunūkire dirūnnevya)
Locative (yuñcūkire dirūnnevya)
Instrumental (drausire dirūnnevya)

There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. hærūm lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. chlǣvānem, which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to lila (person), e.g. chlǣvānumi lila (a Chlouvānem).

Chlouvānem does not have grammatical gender, and there are only a few natural gender terms. There are thirteen different noun declensions, but most of them only have few small differences. Chlouvānem declensions are predictable from the ending of the direct case noun, and they're categorized depending on their endings as s-, m-, or h-nouns[1]: inside these broad categories, different declensions are distinguished by the thematic vowel of the suffix: a, u, or i for s- and m-nouns, and a, e, u, i for h-nouns.

S-nouns - Sasą lā halenī

There are some traits which are common to all nominal declensions: the vocative is only distinct in the singular; in the dual there is also no distinction between translative and dative, essive and locative, and between exessive, ablative, and instrumental. In the plural, the exessive and ablative also share the same form, as do the essive plural and the ergative dual.

1-s (-as, -ās)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct prātas
"wind"
prātāt prāte
Vocative prātau
Accusative prātu prātāṣa prataih
Ergative prātei prātāya prātān
Genitive prāti prāteva prātumi
Translative prātan prātaus prātāmān
Exessive prātat prātābhan prātenīs
Essive prātą prātigin prātāya
Dative prātom prātaus prātasām
Ablative prātų prātābhan prātenīs
Locative prāte prātigin prātilīm
Instrumental prātap prātābhan prātenīka

2-s (-us, -ūs)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct haɂrus
"squid"
haɂrūt haɂraus
Vocative haɂru
Accusative haɂravu haɂrūṣa haɂravih
Ergative haɂrave haɂrūya haɂrūn
Genitive haɂravi haɂragva haɂrǣmi
Translative haɂrun haɂrugus haɂromān
Exessive haɂrut haɂrobhan haɂruṇīs1
Essive haɂrą haɂrugin haɂrūya
Dative haɂravom haɂrugus haɂrusām
Ablative haɂrų haɂrobhan haɂruṇīs1
Locative haɂrave haɂrugin haɂrulīm
Instrumental haɂrup haɂrobhan haɂruṇīka1

3-s (-is, -īs)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct ḍhogis
"monument"
ḍhogīt ḍhogais
Vocative ḍhogi
Accusative ḍhogayu ḍhogīṣa ḍhogaih
Ergative ḍhogaye ḍhogīya ḍhogīn
Genitive ḍhogayi ḍhogajña ḍhogyumi
Translative ḍhogin ḍhogigus ḍhogemān
Exessive ḍhogit ḍhogebhan ḍhogenīs
Essive ḍhogę ḍhogigin ḍhogīya
Dative ḍhogayom ḍhogigus ḍhogisām
Ablative ḍhogyų ḍhogebhan ḍhogenīs
Locative ḍhogaye ḍhogigin ḍhogilīm
Instrumental ḍhogip ḍhogebhan ḍhoginīka

Table notes:

  1. The ending is -unīs/-unīka; the n shift is a case of regular saṃdhi.

Also note that modern borrowings ending in [s] typically add a further case ending, e.g. Skyrdagor valtasz (nunatak) becomes Chlouvānem valtasas (same meaning), declining as valtasau, valtasu, valtasei...

M-nouns - Mamą lā halenī

1-m (-am, -ām)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct yujam
"lotus"
yujivā yujāk
Vocative yujā
Accusative yujamu yujmes yujmaih
Ergative yujmæ yujmyan yujamūn
Genitive yujami yujmeva yujaṃrān
Translative yujaman yujmį yujamān
Exessive yujamat yujabhan yujmenīs
Essive yujmą yujmenne yujmyan
Dative yujamom yujmį yujaṃsām
Ablative yujamų yujabhan yujmenīs
Locative yujaṃrye yujmenne yujmilīm
Instrumental yujamap yujabhan yujaṃrīka

2-m (-um, -ūm)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct tūlum
"worm"
tūlvivā tūlūk
Vocative tūlve
Accusative tūlumu tūlves tūluyih
Ergative tūluga tūlvyan tūlumūn
Genitive tūlumi tūlveva tūluṃrān
Translative tūluman tūlvį tūlumān
Exessive tūlumat tūlubhan tūlvenīs
Essive tūlų tūlunne tūlvyan
Dative tūlumom tūlvį tūluṃsām
Ablative tūlumų tūlubhan tūlvenīs
Locative tūluṃrye tūlunne tūlulīm
Instrumental tūlumap tūlubhan tūluṃrīka

3-m (-im, -īm)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct jāyim
"girl"
jāyīvā jāyīk
Vocative jāyī
Accusative jāyimu jājñes1 jāyīh
Ergative jājña1 jāyiyan jāyimūn
Genitive jāyimi jājñeva1 jāyiṃran
Translative jāyiman jāyį jāyimān
Exessive jāyimat jāyibhan jājñenīs1
Essive jāyį jāyinne jāyiyan
Dative jāyimom jāyį jāyiṃsam
Ablative jāyimų jāyibhan jājñenīs1
Locative jāyiṃrye jāyinne jāyilīm
Instrumental jāyimap jāyibhan jāyiṃrīka

{ Table notes:

  1. Such forms with -jñ- are underlyingly -y-y- (e.g. jāy-y-esjājñes).

H-nouns - Hahą lā halenī

1-h (-a, -ā, (-ah, -āh), -o1)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct māra
"mango"
mārāt mārai
Vocative māre
Accusative māru mārāṣa māraih
Ergative mārei mārāra mārān
Genitive māri2 māreva mārumi
Translative māran mārarį māremān
Exessive mārat mārabhan mārenīs
Essive māręs māranne mārāra
Dative mārom mārarį māresām
Ablative mārų mārabhan mārenīs
Locative māre māranne mārelīm
Instrumental mārap mārabhan mārenīka

2-h (-ē, -eh, -ǣh3)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct javileh
"apple"
javilyāt javilyai
Vocative javilei
Accusative javilyu javilēṣa javileih
Ergative javilei javilyāra javilyān
Genitive javili javileva4 javilyumi
Translative javilen javilerį javilemān
Exessive javilet javilebhan javilenīs
Essive javilęs javilenne javilyāra
Dative javilyom javilerį javilesām
Ablative javilyų javilebhan javilenīs
Locative javilye javilenne javilelīm
Instrumental javilep javilebhan javilenīka

3-h (-uh, -ūh, -u5)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct ñaɂuh
"fruit skin"
ñaɂūt ñaɂūvi
Vocative ñaɂū
Accusative ñaɂunu ñaɂūṣa ñaɂuyih
Ergative ñaɂuyei ñaɂura ñaɂun
Genitive ñaɂuyi ñaɂuva ñaɂūmi
Translative ñaɂun ñaɂurį ñaɂumān
Exessive ñaɂut ñaɂubhan ñaɂunīs
Essive ñaɂųs ñaɂunne ñaɂura
Dative ñaɂuvom ñaɂurį ñaɂusām
Ablative ñaɂuvų ñaɂubhan ñaɂunīs
Locative ñaɂuve ñaɂunne ñaɂulīm
Instrumental ñaɂup ñaɂubhan ñaɂunīka

4-m (-ih, -īh, -i6)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct ghārṭih
"arrow"
ghārṭīt ghārṭeyi
Vocative ghārṭī
Accusative ghārṭyu ghārṭīṣa ghārṭeyih
Ergative ghārṭyei ghārṭira ghārṭin
Genitive ghārṭīyi ghārṭiva ghārṭyumi
Translative ghārṭin ghārṭirį ghārṭimān
Exessive ghārṭit ghārṭibhan ghārṭinīs
Essive ghārṭįs ghārṭinne ghārṭira
Dative ghārṭyom ghārṭirį ghārṭisām
Ablative ghārṭyų ghārṭibhan ghārṭinīs
Locative ghārṭye ghārṭinne ghārṭilīm
Instrumental ghārṭip ghārṭibhan ghārṭinīka

1-h (h-paradigm)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct raiṇah
"(piece of) cloth"
raiṇāt raiṇai
Vocative raiṇe
Accusative raiṇu raiṇāṣa raiṇaih
Ergative raiṇei raiṇāra raiṇān
Genitive raiṇi2 raiṇeva raiṇumi
Translative raiṇan raiṇarį raiṇamān
Exessive raiṇat raiṇabhan raiṇenīs
Essive raiṇęs raiṇanne raiṇāra
Dative raiṇom raiṇarį raiṇasām
Ablative raiṇų raiṇabhan raiṇanīs
Locative raiṇe raiṇanne raiṇalīm
Instrumental raiṇap raiṇabhan raiṇanīka

The h-paradigm used by nouns in -ah and -āh is substantially identical to the regular 1-h one, except for the exessive, dative, ablative, locative, and instrumental plural which have -a- instead of -e- as a linking vowel and, for some nouns, the genitive singular (see table note 2).

Table notes:

  1. -o nouns are mostly toponyms of Toyubeshian origins; they decline like -a nouns, with their ending being treated as *-a-u, with the -a part of the stem; e.g. Paramito, locative Paramitai (underlying form Paramit-a-e).
  2. -ya, and -yā nouns form the genitive singular in -ei (e.g. lalyā "night" → lalei). Nouns in -yah, and -yāh, however, have the regular ending (e.g. yamyah "fog" → yamyi).
  3. All -ǣh nouns are of Lällshag origin, and are mostly toponyms (like Laikunanǣh), with some exceptions like the two lunar days kælyaunænǣh and yeicapænǣh. Note that such nouns have their genitive singular in -ǣyi and not in .
  4. In older texts -eiva (e.g. javileiva), today only used in literature for an archaïzing effect or to mark a character speaking with a Northern Plain pronunciation (where this form survives in the spoken language).
  5. Mostly regional Western words of Dabuke origin.
  6. Non-productive with borrowings, but common in native words.

Special declensions

Ablaut declension
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct lila
"person"
lilāt lelyē
Vocative
Accusative lilu lilāṣa lelyu
Ergative lilei lilāra lelyei
Genitive leli lileva laili
Translative lilan lilarį lelyan
Exessive lilat lilabhan lelyat
Essive liląs lilanne lailąs
Dative lilom lilarį lelyom
Ablative lilų lilabhan lelyų
Locative lile lilanne laile
Instrumental lilap lilabhan lelyap

-oe declension
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct haloe
"name"
halenāt halenī
Vocative
Accusative halenu halenāṣa halenaih
Ergative halenei halenāya halenān
Genitive haleni halemva haloemi
Translative halenan halenaus haloemān
Exessive halenat haloebhan haloenīs
Essive halen haloegin halenāya
Dative halenom halenaus haloesām
Ablative halenų haloebhan haloenīs
Locative halenye haloegin halenilīm
Instrumental halenap haloebhan haloenīka

-ai declension
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct lunai
"tea"
lunaiva lunāye
Vocative
Accusative lunāyu lunāyes lunāyaih
Ergative lunǣ lunāyēn lunāyūn
Genitive lunāyi lunaiva lunāyān
Translative lunain lunāyį lunaimān
Exessive lunait lunaibhan lunǣnīs
Essive lunąis lunainne lunāyēn
Dative lunāyom lunāyį lunaisām
Ablative lunāyų lunaibhan lunǣnīs
Locative lunāye lunainne lunailīm
Instrumental lunaip lunaibhan lunainīka

The ablaut declension is in the singular (except for the vocative and essive) and dual the same as the 1-h one, including the -ei rule for the genitive singular (e.g. rinya "ceiling", gen.sg. renei), except for the fact that the genitive singular has a middle-grade vowel. The plural has mostly the same endings as the singular but with middle-grade vowels in most forms (genitive, essive, and locative have a higher-grade one). -y- is inserted between the stem and the ending, but not for nouns ending in -ya (rinyarenyē).
The vowel that undergoes ablaut is usually the penultimate (e.g. plušamila "Office of the Inquisition", plural plušamelyē), but in some cases it's the first (e.g. kimeda (a type of panther), plural kemedyē).

Hypocoristic forms of male names, which end in -em and are only used in the singular, are declined following a mix of the 1-m and 1-h patterns. In fact, they follow the 1-m pattern (the -am paradigm) except for the ergative (in -emei instead of *-(e)mæ) and the essive (in -ęs instead of *-(e)mą). For example the hypocoristicon Kælem has ergative Kælemei and essive Kælęs.

Singularia and pluralia tantum

Pluralia tantum in Chlouvānem include the following words or categories of words:

  1. many collective nouns:

    pārāk "hair", kāraṇḍhai "guts", yūgure "limbs", agṇyaucai "sons and daughters", vailašaus "cutlery", šūlyakāše "dishes"
  2. things that are heterogeneous in form but considered as a single entity:
    katanai "clutter", dūḍhvai "banquet, buffet", vārṇaigīk (a type of sandals made from straw rope), ḍheṃlatiryai "streaming"[2], ltælime "magic", ṣrūḍhais "savings", dāyārṣe "resin", ḍåtvāk "fat", tadmāltsāk "controller"
  3. certain actions and processes that involve multiple people:
    vāgdilanai "elections", viṣlonai "protest, riot", jāṃrice "traffic jam", grembātatālunai "hide-and-seek" (sometimes also found as dual)
  4. nouns denoting certain time spans, festivals, or holidays:
    saṃlallai "afternoon", Bhaivyāvāṣaryai (the most important Yunyalīlti festivity), Kūlħanarai (a winter festival of Kenengyry origin)
  5. a few illnesses and health conditions or disorders:
    nirganai "urticaria", nañvai "autism", paṣadårbhai "influenza"
  6. some locations, including large delimited areas as well as many toponyms:
    aryai "square", cahåtaibāk "tropics"
    Rīkalīnai, Mūnnakṣalte
  7. all ethnonyms:
    chlǣvānem "Chlouvānem", ṣurṭāgyai "Skyrdegan(s)", bronyai "Bronic(s)", sairghīṭyai "Cerian(s)", nivrahīrai "Nivarese"

A few nouns do not have a singular, but can have a dual and a plural form. Their citation form is usually the dual:

maihadhūt "parents", grembātatālunāt "hide-and-seek" (most commonly a plurale tantum)

Counted among pluralia tantums are certain words which are not defective in number, but whose plural forms have an additional meaning alongside the one of the singular form, like in the following examples:

hamvyenī "nursery" (hamvyoe "cradle"), įsmirte "playground" (įsmirtas "swing"), nacai "clothes" (naca "cloth"), garaṇai "clock, watch" (garaṇa "hour), lairusī "galaxy" (lairē "sky, air"), ilēneyi "universe" (ilēni "space, invisible sky").

Unlike ethnonyms, nouns formed with the suffix -yūs, generally identifying a person from a certain city (e.g. līlasuṃghāṇyūs, ajāɂilbādhyūs) – but note yacvānyūs "Westerner" – are not pluralia tantum and have regularly-formed plurals (in -yaus).

Some words are singularia tantum:

  1. many collective nouns:
    nūlastām "money", maula "breasts [pair of]", mæchlišam "leafy greens" (and particular types, e.g. mæcichā "spinach), bågras "legumes" (and particular types, e.g. dīlla "peas", mahīra "lentils"), lāsīm "cereals", båltis "free time"
  2. feelings and sensations:
    lācāh "romantic love", læchlyoe "fun", ǣlna "sadness"
  3. nouns denoting certain uncountable things:
    paɂeh "dust", kanai "spices", nāmvāvi "powder, dust made from crushing something", ḍolam "ice", narmis "ash"
  4. certain illnesses and health conditions:
    badarauga "blue plague", kloppa "cough" (cf. pluralizable kloppukāram "a single instance of coughing"), nadirṣas "runny nose"
  5. proper nouns referring to certain concepts:
    yunya, lillamurḍhyā, mulipenai "the Eastern Bloc's 'Internet'", tulbaiganim "the Eastern Bloc's 'Olympics'"
    individual sports, such as tēyakaitsūh, ḍaṣaras, lairhiṃħa, yalkhaitah
    cardinal points, pūrjayuñca "North", nalejñuñca "East"..., including relative ones such as smrāṇyuñca "upstream" or memājñuñca "downstream"
    musical genres, such as laneika, mūṃjas, kerachomā, tūnisus
    specialistic terminology made with suffixes and related to sciences (-tarlā, -nātra), diseases (-ræṣka, -yūtam, -ītsun, -gulas), and political/philosophical currents (-nātra, -lija)
  6. Most toponyms:
    Murkadhānāvi "the Inquisition", Kaiṣamā, Ṣurṭāgah "Skyrdagor", Sairghīṭa "Ceria", Kuyugvajitava "Kŭyŭgwažtov"

Irregular plurals

A few Chlouvānem nouns have irregular plurals:

  • The word chlǣvānem itself is plural-only (like all ethnonyms) and irregular; direct and vocative are in -em, but all other cases decline as a standard plural 1h noun (e.g. accusative chlǣvānānu, ergative chlǣvānān, genitive chlǣvānumi);
  • hulineh "woman" has the suppletive plural hulūne "women", which is declined as a regular 1s declension noun.
  • maila “water” does not have a dual form outside of colloquial use (where mailāt is used with the meaning of “two glasses of water”) and has the irregular plural mailusī, declined as the plural of an -oe noun, with -us- instead of -en- or -oe- throughout the declension (but note genitive mailūsmi and not mailusmi). This plural form is actually common, used when talking about bodies of water in an area, water layers, glasses of water, and a few minor idiomatic uses (e.g. taili mailusilīm hilælulke, lit. “to arrive by crossing many waters”, meaning “to have had much experience”).
    The -usī semantic plural is also used for the word damītah when used for "petals" (damītusī; the meaning of "nails" has the regular plural damītai), and lairē (lairusī, which does not mean "skies" or "days" but "galaxy").
  • Nouns with non-standard final endings (except chlǣvānem) are declined by unpacking the vowel through regular saṃdhi and applying the resulting declension to the newfound root, with regular saṃdhi. The most common such nouns are gos "ford, crossing of a small river" (ga-us; gen.sg. ge (ga-i), pl. gaus (ga-aus)) and khaim "goose" (khā-im; pl. khaik (khā-īk)).
  • švas "animal (including humans)" pluralizes as švai, as if it were a h-noun; all cases except for direct and vocative are however regular.

Irregular vocatives

Five very common words have common, irregular, vocative forms:

  • ñæltah "(male's) sister" — ñæli or ñæl
  • glūkam "(female's) brother" — galū
  • meinā "mother" — or
  • bunā "father" — or
  • udhyāras "Comrade" — udhyā (rarely udhyār)

Use of the plural

Chlouvānem sometimes uses the singular in contexts where English uses the plural:

  • Nouns are always singular after numerals (except, optionally, dani (two), which they can also be dual after), sora (some), grāṇa (any), gu (no), guviṣam (no other), taili (many, much), širē (more), kaili (most), and ṣubha (few, little).
    • After yaiva, the difference in the noun's number expresses a distinction much like the one between English "every" and "all": yaiva kita "every house", yaiva kitai "all houses".
  • When referring to existence or availability of something, that something is always singular, e.g. dvārma širēmįs virā "there are chairs in the room". It may be plural if topicalized, but the overall meaning of the sentence changes - e.g. širēmeyi mæn dvārma virā "the chairs are in the room".
  • When referring to a single person, dhāna (hand), mešīn (eye), and minnūlya (ear), and often also junai (foot) (more rarely for pājya (leg) and molnya (arm)) are typically singular and not dual - e.g. nanau mešīp mešute "I see it with my eyes" (lit. "with my eye"). In fact, they might be translated as "a person's hands/eyes/ears", given that dual forms are often used to mean e.g. "both hands of two people" and the plural ones for e.g. "many people's hands".
  • junyoe (indoor slippers), rapūda ((thick) shoes), mæska (boots), and all types of shoes are also used in the singular to refer to a pair of them. The main exception is varṇaigīk (straw rope sandals), which is a plurale tantum.

Duals and plurals of given names have the meaning of an associative plural, i.e. Kālomījñai "Kālomīyeh and people in/of her group".

Verbs (daradhaus)

Main article: Chlouvānem verbs

The Chlouvānem verb (daradhūs, pl. daradhaus) is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.

Pronouns (hailihalenī)

The system of personal pronouns of modern Standard Chlouvānem is quite complex due to the honorific system. In modern Chlouvānem, the category of "pronouns" isn't actually syntactically differentiated from other nouns (except for being used anaphorically), and only some of them - the inherited pronouns from Proto-Lahob and Archaic Chlouvānem - follow a declension different from the one of nouns.

The main reason for the complexity of the pronominal system is that there are many possible variants for each person, depending on the formality of the context, the two-way rank difference between speaker and listener, or the three-way rank difference between the speaker, the listener, and the addressee. Some particular forms are also chosen depending on gender.

The fact that there is no syntactical difference between the morphological pronouns and those that are nouns also means that every word used pronominally, including given names, requires that person's verbal concord, i.e. a given name used as a second-person pronoun will be used in concordance with a second-person verb. In the following list, words not marked as being inflected according to pronominal declension are inflected as nouns. However, yamei and lāma are honorific adpositions which do not decline; the title or given name used with them declines instead.

List of personal pronouns and pronoun-equivalents

First person singular (I, me)

  • lili (pronominal declension): the morphological inherited pronoun and the most neutral. It is overall the most used, especially in the non-direct cases, but there are alternatives for very informal, childish, slang, and humble speech.
  • emmā: the humble speech word for "person", sometimes used in humble speech.
  • demi (pronominal declension): literally "oneself", the reflexive pronoun; used in informal speech but conveying a sense of distance.
  • Given name: used in childish speech and in certain slang forms, considered rude or uneducated otherwise.
  • lilyā hulineh: literally "my woman", informal or semi-formal, implies superiority.
  • paralonį emmā: literally "the person [humble] who is a disciple" or "I, [your] disciple". Used almost exclusively in writing, by students or pupils when talking to their professors or teachers.
  • lilyā jāyim (in Archaic Chlouvānem only); literally "my girl", implying humbleness. Notably used by the Chlamiṣvatrā to refer to herself throughout the Holy Books.

Second person singular (You)

  • Given name plus lāma: the general polite form. lāma can be replaced by an appropriate title.
  • yamei + given name + lāma: similar to the above, but more polite, typically used for people of much higher rank or public officials.
  • yamei + title: very polite, alternative to the above two.
  • Appropriate honorific formula: the most polite usage, usually progressively reduced to (yamei) given name + lāma or yamei + title during the course of a conversation[3].
  • Given name + tanta: same politeness as lāma, used respectfully towards lower-ranked people, for example workers and colleague with less experience, soldiers of lower rank, employees, apprentices, and (from seventh class onwards) by teachers towards their students.
  • Given name alone: used in semi-formal speech between (equal ranked) colleagues and friends with a moderate degree of acquaintance. Can be or is rude otherwise. Note that it is considered especially rude to use the given name (or any other form of the personal name) towards older family members, or family members of the same generation who are not siblings (e.g. brothers/sisters-in-law, unless they're close friends).
  • Informal name: used in informal speech among friends, siblings (and possibly cousins[4]), partners, and all family members of a younger generation.
  • Kinship term alone: used for older family members or non-siblings (excluding cousins) of the same generation.
  • sāmi (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun used in informal speech. Often replaced by the given name or by the hypocoristic form.
  • nami (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun of formal speech towards higher ranked people. Often used (and even more often in non-core forms such as the genitive namyā), but it is also common to use the given name + lāma formula instead.
  • tami (pronominal declension): morphological pronoun of formal speech towards equal ranked people. Often used alternatively to the given name (with or without lāma), even in the same conversation.
  • rami (pronominal declension): morphological formal pronoun for lower ranked people; same usage pattern as tami.
  • udhyāras: translatable as "Comrade" and introduced during the Kaiṣamā era, it is a formal second-person pronoun used for people in situations transcending social rank. It is particularly used among political activists, volunteers in any organization, or in cooperative activities distinct from one's usual work. It is also the preferred option when one has no information about the addressed person, or as a general second person pronoun not referring to any particular person.
  • ṣari: quite old-fashioned (but still actively used by older people), used by guests towards homeowners (or innkeepers) and by soldiers towards their superiors.
  • ūttuka (mostly historical except for the Northeast): similar to ṣari but mostly used by servants towards their superiors or landowners; rapidly disappeared because of the Kaiṣamā era reforms except for the Northeast, where it was used in most contexts ṣari was elsewhere.
  • blikā; an endearing term for "girl", used by sisters among themselves.
  • lorkhās; male counterpart to blikā.
  • Informal name + cuca: endearing form used in informal speech by parents towards their children.
  • nūrya, literally "kid, child": used in formal instances by parents towards their children.

The following pronouns are mostly used for specific people, and only as reductions of other formulae:

  • aveṣyotariri nami: literally "You excellent one"; extremely formal locution for non-religious superiors several ranks ahead.
  • gopūrṭham: used for public/religious and military officials.
  • gopūrṭhami brausa: used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
  • yobrausa: same as gopūrṭhami brausa.
  • lalla yobrausa: used for the Great Inquisitor.

With second-person pronouns, the possessives used are in nearly every case those of the corresponding morphological pronouns; however, in very informal speech, it is not uncommon to use the genitive of the informal name or of pronoun-equivalents such as blikā or lorkhās.

Third person singular

Chlouvānem does not have any morphological third person pronoun; the demonstratives are used instead for non-human referents. For human referents, however, it is considered extremely rude to address them using a demonstratives. The choice of pronoun in the third person is especially complex because not just the relative rank of speaker and listener should be kept in mind, but also the rank of the addressee relative to both the speaker and the listener.

All titles listed in the section "Honorific titles" may be freely used with and without names. Furthermore, it is common in not excessively formal speech to use nāḍima (honorific word for "mother") for all female older relatives - of previous generations, not older siblings - of the interlocutor and similarly tamvāram (honorific for "father") for male older relatives.

udhyāras, equivalent to "Comrade", is in contemporary Chlouvānem the least controversial third person pronoun, at least the only one that is never considered rude to use. However, depending on the situation, other pronouns may be more appropriate.

Reference table

The following table is meant as a non-exhaustive reference for the most common ways used to refer to third person human referents in different situations, excluding titles:

If... Speaker is higher than Listener Speaker is equal to Listener Speaker is lower than Listener
3SG is higher than... both Speaker and Listener yamei (name) lāma
yamei (name) suntam/sintam
(yamei) (name) suntam/sintam(/lāma) yamei (name) suntam/sintam
Listener,
but lower than or equal to Speaker
udhyāras
yamei lātiṃṣin
(name) lāma
/ /
Speaker,
but lower than or equal to Listener
/ / yamei (name) lāma
3SG is equal to... Listener udhyāras
yamei (name) tanta
(name) lāma
/ yamei (name) suntam/sintam
both Speaker and Listener / udhyāras
lātiṃṣin
(name) lāma
yamei (name) tanta
/
Speaker udhyāras
lātiṃṣin
(name) lāma
/ yamei (name) lāma
udhyāras
lātiṃṣin
3SG is lower than... Listener udhyāras
(name) tanta
/ /
both Speaker and Listener / udhyāras
(name) tanta
/
Speaker / / (name) lāma
udhyāras

Dual pronouns

Plural pronouns

Other personal pronouns

Pronominal declension

The pronominal declension has two variants: one used for the first person pronouns and another for the 2nd person ones. First person pronouns are the most archaic: they have a single-phoneme stem in all cases bar the direct, and a different stem in the direct case (lili, derived from the original pronoun *li, in the singular, and suppletive amūt and amūvi in the dual and plural respectively).
The second person pronouns are a Pre-Chlouvānem innovation, from the original short stem attached to the demonstrative ami, and therefore they follow that word's declension. However, the original short stems are kept as alternative, shorter forms, for the accusative, ergative, and dative cases. Second-person plural pronouns exist, but are virtually unused outside of Archaic Chlouvānem.

All ergative singular forms in -ei have literary variants in -eis (cf. emeis, ergative of emibe "one").

Direct Accusative Ergative Genitive Translative Exessive Essive Dative Ablative Locative Instrumental
Singular 1st person lili lei lyai
lilyā
lan lat lįs lum ląu lēn lāni
2nd person Informal sāmi sāmyū
sāmī
sei
sāmī sāmīn sāmīt sāmįs sāmūm
som
sāmų sāmǣ sāmūni
Form. sup. nami namyū
namī
nei
namī namīn namīt namįs namūm
num
namų namǣ namūni
Form. equal tami tamyū
tamī
tei
tamī tamīn tamīt tamįs tamūm
tum
tamų tamǣ tamūni
Form. inf. rami ramyū
ramī
nei
ramī ramīn ramīt ramįs ramūm
rum
ramų ramǣ ramūṇi
Reflexive pronoun demi jei jai
demyā
jen jet jįs jum jąu jēn jāni
Dual 1st person amūt lūṣa lūra lūva lūh lūbhan lūnne lūh lūbhan lūnne lūbhan
2nd person Informal sāmīt sāmīṣa
seṣa
sāmīra
sera
sāmīva sāmirį sāmibhan sāminne sāmirį
seh
sāmibhan sāminne sāmibhan
Form. sup. namīt namīṣa
nīṣa
namīra
nira
namīva namirį namibhan naminne namirį
nih
namibhan naminne namibhan
Form. equal tamīt tamīṣa
tīṣa
tamīra
tira
tamīva tamirį tamibhan taminne tamirį
tih
tamibhan taminne tamibhan
Form. inf. ramīt ramīṣa
rīṣa
ramīra
rira
ramīva ramirį ramibhan raminne ramirį
rih
ramibhan raminne ramibhan
Plural 1st person amūvi laih lān lumi lemān lenīs lāra lisām lenīs lelīm lenīka

Honorific titles

→ See also: Chlouvānem names § Using names

Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective yamei is often added to many of them - especially lāma - and is mandatory in other ones.

  • lāma - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, lāma is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. Namihūlša lāma); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then lāma comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with lāma (e.g. Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma) are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
  • tanta - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students. Also used by militars towards lower-ranked soldiers.
  • suntam (regionally also sintam) - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
  • lallāmaha - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with yamei. Inquisitors may also be referred to as lallāmaha + matronymic + yamei + given name + murkadhāna (lāma)
  • jūlin - less formal than lāma, used for people who work in one's home but are not part of the family.
  • tallam - less formal than lāma, used by men for unmarried women whom they know somewhat well. Currently less frequently used than it was up to about 10 years ago.
  • jāmilšīreh - used in military contexts towards higher-ranked people, or by common people towards military commanders in service.
  • udhyā(ras) - neutral but respectful title of address, often used when generally speaking and without knowing who the listener is. Sometimes used, when in a plural sense, in the form yamei dāvudhyāre. In its neutralness relative to rank, it can be compared with the Soviet-era use of товарищ. It is also how high-ranked Inquisitors and most monks address the general public.
    Note that udhyāras is the direct form, udhyā the irregular vocative.
  • pūrivāla - an impersonal term of address used in written language, towards unfamiliar people never met personally. Often used as yamei [name] pūrivāla.
  • cuca is not strictly an honorific, as it pertains to more colloquial forms of speech, but it works the same way. It has a diminutive and endearing meaning, not unlike Japanese -chan. In formal speech, it is often used towards and when speaking about children.
Occupations commonly used as titles
  • camitorai — head of a company (usually as [matronymic] yamei [name] camitorai lāma)
  • kauchlærīn (voc.: kauchlærī) — professor (in universities, seminaries, institutions, and work schools)
  • tatnāmęlīn (voc.: tatnāmęlī) — teacher (in first and basic schools)
Official titles

Where not noted, the formula is [matronymic] yamei [name] [title] lāma.

  • brausamailenya — Baptist — rendered as aveṣyotārire lallāmaha [matronymic] yamei [surname + given name] brausamailenia lāma.
  • camimurkadhāna — Great Inquisitor — rendered as širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha [matronymic] yamei [surname + given name] camimurkadhāna lāma.
  • camitorai — president (of diocesan parliaments or executives or of foreign countries). Rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic (if Chlouvānem)] yamei [name] camitorai lāma.
  • plušamelīs (voc.: plušamelī) — Prefect (head of an Office (plušamila) of the Inquisition). Rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [name] plušamelī(s) lāma.
  • gatvā — leader/head/president/mayor — preceded by the genitive of the respective administration (ṣramāṇa "province", lalka "circuit", hālgāra "district", marta "city"…).
  • hurdagīn — Head Monk (head of a monastery) — rendered as kaili brausire yamei [name] hurdagīn lāma (+ monastery name-GEN)[5]
  • rākṣaṇa — Bishop (head of a diocese) — rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [(surname +) name] rākṣaṇa lāma (+ diocese name-GEN).
  • lallaplušamelīs (voc.: lallaplušamelī) — High Prefect (head of the Table of Offices (flušamaili eṇāh, the executive branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as taili aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [name] lallaplušamelī(s) lāma.
  • lallamurkadhāna — High Inquisitor (one of the 612 members of the Inquisitorial Conclave (murkadhānumi lanedāmeh, the legislative branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [name] lallamurkadhāna lāma.
  • ñæltryam — monk.
  • nīrvakṣari (voc.: nīrvakṣarī) — Eparch (head of an Eparchy).

Note that the full titles are used generally at the first mention only. For example, Martayināvi yamei murkadhāna Læhimausa lāma becomes afterwards either yamei murkadhāna or yamei Læhimausa lāma. With the Great Inquisitor, this does not usually get shorter than širē aveṣyotārire yamei lallāmaha ([Her] Respectable Most Excellent Highness) or širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha camimurkadhāna ([Her] Most Excellent Highness, the Great Inquisitor).

Correlatives

Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing ten types (proximal, medial, distal, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).

Category ↓ / Type → Proximal Medial Distal Interrogative Negative Ass. exist. Elect. exist. Universal Positive altern. Negative altern.
Attributive nenē
(and others; see below)
this (one)
nunū
(and others; see below)
that (one) (near you)
nanā
(and others; see below)
that (one) (over there)
yanū?
what?, which (one) ?
gu
no
sora
some
grāṇa
any
yaiva
every(thing)
viṣam
another, other
guviṣam
no other
Thing gomi
nothing
sorami
something
grāṇami
anything
viṣāmi
something else
guviṣāmi
nothing else
Person ·evita
this one
·utvita
that one (near you)
·ātvita
that one (over there)
yavita?
who?
guvita
no one
soraita
someone
grāmvita
anyone
yaivita
everyone
viṣvita
someone else
guviṣvita
no one else
Time emiya
now
utiya
then
ātiya
then (remote)
yamiya?
when?
gumiya
never
soramiya
sometime, somewhen
grāmiya
anytime, whenever
yaivmiya
always, everytime
viṣmiya
sometime else
guviṣmiya
never else
Place ·ejulā
here
·uñjulā
there
·āñjulā
over there
yajulā?
where?
gujulā
nowhere
sorajulā
somewhere
grāñjulā
anywhere
yavijulā
everywhere
viñjulā
elsewhere
guviñjulā
nowhere else
Destination ·ejulyom
hither
·uñjulyom
thither
·āñjulyom
thither (remote)
yajulyom?
whither?
gujulyom
nowhither
sorajulyom
somewhither
grāñjulyom
anywhither
yavijulyom
everywhither
viñjulyom
elsewhither
guviñjulyom
nowhither else
Source ·ejulų
hence
·uñjulų
thence
·āñjulų
thence (remote)
yajulų?
whence?
gujulų
nowhence
sorajulų
somewhence
grāñjulų
anywhence
yavijulų
everywhence
viñjulų
elsewhence
guviñjulų
nowhence else
Manner elīce
thus, hereby
ūlīce
thereby
ālīce
thereby; that other way
yalīce?
how?
gulīce
no way
soralīce
somehow
grāṃlīce
anyhow
yaivlīce
everyway
viṣlīce
otherwise
guviṣlīce
no other way
Reason emena
herefore
utmena
therefore
ātmena
therefore; for that other reason
yamenat?
why?
gumena
for no reason
soramena
somewhy
grāmena
whyever, for any reason
yaivmena
for every reason
viṣmena
for another reason
guviṣmena
for no other reason
Quality esmā
this kind
utsmā
that kind
ātsmā
that other kind
yasmāt?
which kind?
gusmā
no kind
sorasmā
some kind
grāṇismā
any kind
yavismā
every kind
viṣasmā
another kind
guviṣasmā
no other kind
Quantity enūḍa
this much
utnūḍa
that much
ātnūḍa
that much (remote)
yanūḍat?
how much?
gunūḍa
none
soraṇūḍa
some of it
grāṇūḍa
any much
yaivnūḍa
all of it
viṣṇūḍa
another quantity
guviṣṇūḍa
no other quantity

Note that in common speach ālīce and ūlīce as well as ātmena and utmena are basically interchangeable. The QUALITY correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. lajlęs grāṇismā "any kind of chair".
THING and PERSON correlatives decline for case and, in the case of evita, utvita, and ātvita, also for number (1h declension: evita, acc. sg. evitu, dir. pl. evitai, dat. pl. evitesām…). QUALITY and QUANTITY correlatives also decline for case.

Not to be confused with their literal English translations are yaivemibe (or yaiva emibe) "each, every" (literally "everyone") - which is most often attributive only in Chlouvānem - and especially sora emibe, literally "someone", which has a completely different meaning: sora emibe denotes "some single subjects, considered as single entities, hence inherently plural and taking plural verbs: sora emibe draikate "some single subjects did it" ≠ soraita dṛkte "someone did it".

Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number:

gomīt~guvitāt "neither";
grāṇamīt~grāmvitāt "either";
yaivāt~yaivitāt "both";
viṣāmāt~viṣvitāt "the other one".

Further correlatives not included in the above table:

yambā? (whose?)
smāmi (such a...) (archaic, literary)

Positional demonstratives

Chlouvānem has a large number of demonstratives, as they are integrated with the system of positional verbs, combining a general proximal-medial-distal distinction with positional prefixes, further localizing them in space. Only a subset of 10 out of the 24 positional prefixes are used to build demonstratives; the ones with a ∅- prefix correspond to most of the unused ones, and may be translated as "this/that one in front/ahead/in the middle" when a disambiguation from another one is needed. The same ten prefixes (except for įs-) are also used together with the PERSON series (with the same logic), and with the PLACE, DESTINATION, and SOURCE correlatives, which act as adverbial anaphoras of positional and motion verbs. This results in forms like kamyejulā "here, around" or māhāñjulyom "thither (remote), rightwards".

Prefix ↓ / Type → Proximal Medial Distal
∅- (ahead) nenē
this one ahead
nunū
that one (near you) ahead
nanā
that one ahead
ān- (above) āninē
this one above
ānnū
that one (near you) above
ānnā
that one above
šu- (below) šunē
this one below
šūnū
that one (near you) below
šonā
that one below
įs- (hanging) įsinē
this one hanging
įsunū
that one (near you) hanging
įsanā
that one hanging
na(ñ)- (inside) najinē
this one inside
najunū
that one (near you) inside
najanā
that one inside
kau- (outside) kaunē
this one outside
kaunū
that one (near you) outside
kaunā
that one outside
kami- (around) kaminē
this one around
kamyunū
that one (near you) around
kamyanā
that one around
pri- (behind) prinē
this one behind
prinū
that one (near you) behind
prinā
that one behind
vai- (beside; in the corner)
(sāṭ- for the main meaning)
vainē
this one beside
vayunū
that one (near you) beside
vayanā
that one beside
vyā- (left) vyāɂinē
this one to the left
vyāɂunū
that one (near you) to the left
vyāɂanā
that one to the left
māha- (right) māhenē
this one to the right
māhonū
that one (near you) to the right
māhānā
that one to the right

The įs- forms may also be used for things lying on people's hands.

The forms for the PERSON, PLACE, DESTINATION, and SOURCE series are mostly formed through regular saṃdhi (with the partial exception of the na(ñ)- and vyā- prefixes):

Prefix ↓ / Base → ·evita
·ejulā
·ejulyom
·ejulų
·utvita
·uñjulā
·uñjulyom
·uñjulų
·ātvita
·āñjulā
·āñjulyom
·āñjulų
∅- (ahead) evita utvita ātvita
ān- (above) ānevita ānutvita ānātvita
šu- (below) švevita šūtvita švātvita
na(ñ)- (inside) naivita notvita nātvita
kau- (outside) kāvevita kāvutvita kāvātvita
kami- (around) kamyevitai kamyutvitai kamyātvitai
pri- (behind) pryevita pryutvita pryātvita
vai- (beside, in the corner) vāyevita vāyutvita vāyātvita
vyā- (left) vyāɂevita vyāɂutvita vyāɂātvita
māha- (right) māhaivita māhotvita māhātvita

Note that, in the PERSON series, the kami- forms are only used with a plural meaning, as reflected in the table above.

Declensions of correlatives and possessives

Case ā-paradigm ē-paradigm ū-paradigm t-paradigm
All possessives, nanā and other distals,
yambā?, ami, correlatives in -i[6]
nenē and other proximals nunū, and other medials, yanū? yasmāt? and yanūḍat?
Direct
Vocative
lilyā nenē nunū yasmāt
Accusative lilyau nenyu nunūyu yasmau
Ergative lilye nenye nunūye yasmātei
Genitive lilyai neniai nunūyai yasmai
Translative lilyān nenēn nunūn yasmān
Exessive lilyāt nenēt nunūt yasmātat
Essive lilyą nenę nunų yasmātą
Dative lilyåh nenǣh nunǣh yasmātom
Ablative lilyąu nenēhu nunūvu yasmąu
Locative lilǣ neniǣ nunūvǣ yasmātǣ
Instrumental lileni nenēni nunauni yasmaini


Numerals (māltsāk)

Chlouvānem is one of the few human Calemerian languages - together with all other Lahob languages and a few ones of the southern hemisphere, as well as others like Qualdomelic or vernaculars of the Inquisition which have had considerable Chlouvānem influence - with a pure duodecimal number system.

Numbers (sg māltsām, pl. māltsāk) have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. 1-4 have separate adverbial multiplicative forms, while all other ones have an invariable form used both as adverbial and 'adjectival' multiplicatives. Cardinals from 1 to Ɛ and their compounds decline for case (see below); collectives, multiplicatives, and fractionaries always decline, while ordinals are only declined if used without an accompanying noun. Distributives do not decline.

Digit12 Base 10 Cardinal Ordinal Collective Distributive Adv./Multiplicative Fractionary
0 0 ajrā (ajrāyende) (ajrehaicē) (māgajrā)
1 1 emibe
emi
lahīla emibhaicē māgemibe (adv.)
emibarvīm
lahīlvāṭ
2 2 dani hælinaika danyatām danihaicē māgdani (adv.)
danirvīm
hælinaivāṭ
3 3 pāmvi pāmvende pāmvyatām pāmvihaicē māmpāmvi (adv.)
pāmvirvīm
pāmvendvāṭ
4 4 nęlte nęltende nęltitām nęltehaicē māgnęlte (adv.)
nęltarvīm
nęltendvāṭ
5 5 šulka šulkende šulkatām šulkhaicē šulkarvīm šulkendvāṭ
6 6 tulūɂa tulūɂende tulūɂatām tulūɂihaicē tulūrvīm tulūɂendvāṭ
7 7 chīka chīcænde chīcætām chīcihaicē chīkarvīm chīcændvāṭ
8 8 mbula mbulende mbulatām mbulhaicē mbularvīm mbulendvāṭ
9 9 moja mojende mojatām mojihaicē mojarvīm mojendvāṭ
10 tålda tåldende tåldatām tåldihaicē tåldarvīm tåldendvāṭ
Ɛ 11 vælden vældinde vælditām vældihaicē vældirvīm vældindvāṭ
10 12 māmei māminde māmintām māmeihaicē māmairvīm māmindvāṭ
11 13 emibumaye emibumayinde emibumaintām emibumaihaicē emibumairvīm emibumayindvāṭ
12 14 danimaye danimayinde danimaintām danimaihaicē danimairvim danimayindvāṭ
13 15 pamihælī pamihælīnde pamihælītām pamihælīhaicē pamihælīrvīm pamihælīndvāṭ
14 16 māminęlte māminęltende māminęltitām māminęltehaicē māminęltarvīm māmiynęltendvāṭ
15 17 māmišulka māmišulkende māmišulkatām māmišulkhaicē māmišulkarvīm māmišulkendvāṭ
16 18 māmivælka māmivælkende māmivælkatām māmivælkihaicē māmivælkarvīm māmivælkendvāṭ
17 19 māmichīka māmichīcænde māmichīcætām māmichīcihaicē māmichīkarvīm māmichīcændvāṭ
18 20 māmimbula māmimbulende māmimbulyatām māmimbulhaicē māmimbularvīm māmimbulendvāṭ
19 21 māmimoja māmimojende māmimojatām māmimojihaicē māmimojarvīm māmimojendvāṭ
1ᘔ 22 māmitålda māmitåldende māmitåldatām māmitåldihaicē māmitåldarvīm māmitåldendvāṭ
23 māmivælden māmivældinde māmivælditām māmivældihaicē māmivældirvīm māmivældindvāṭ
20 24 hælmāmei hælmāminde hælmāmintām hælmāmeihaicē hælmāmairvīm hælmāmindvāṭ

As for the two forms for one, emi is used in disjunctive counting (e.g. count-ins or countdowns) while emibe is used elsewhere. Compounds always have the full form, i.e. forms such as *hælmāmyemi do not exist.
Some compound words, especially technical and scientific ones, use Lällshag morphemes for the quantities from 1 to ᘔ (though from 5 onwards they're rarer): mån- 1, yūn- 2, lyāš- 3, alan- 4, tamb- 5, jiruṇ- or ciruṇ- 6, tulyæn- 7, neim- 8, šid- 9, abar- ᘔ.

Numbers from 2012 above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes, like 2112 (2510) hælmāmyemibe, and then hælmāmidani, hælmāmipāmvi, and so on. Note that other compounds with 6 use -tulūɂa and not -vælka as in 1612.
The other dozens are:

30 (3610) pāmvimāmei
40 (4810) nęltemāmei
50 (6010) šulkmāmei
60 (7210) vælknihæla
70 (8410) māmyāvælka (regionally chīcæmāmei, particularly in the East)
80 (9610) mbulmāmei
90 (10810) mojemāmei
ᘔ0 (12010) tåldimāmei
Ɛ0 (13210) māmimīram
and 100 (14410) nihæla.

The apparent irregularities in the words for 6012, 7012, and Ɛ012 are explained by etymology: vælka is the reflex of PLB *wewənko, which meant “half”, thus vælknihæla is “half hundred” and māmyāvælka is “twelve on half”; māmimīram is literally “twelve [less] from ahead”. 1312 originally meant "one finger/three (pāmvi, the word for three, also meant "finger" in PLB (*pāmwəj) - whence also the Chlouvānem word for "finger", pamuvis (< PLB *pamwəjis)) in the second [dozen]", where the -hælī part is a worn form of hælinaika.

Numbers from 10012 to ƐƐƐ12 are still compounds, e.g. nihælaimibe, nihæladani, and so on. Note that 16012 is most commonly nihæltulūɂa, but the more literary form nihælvælka may still be heard.
The other dozenal hundreds are:

200 (28810) daninihæla
300 (43210) pāmvinihæla
400 (57610) nęltenihæla
500 (72010) šulknihæla
600 (86410) tulūnihæla
700 (100810) chīcænihæla
800 (115210) mbulnihæla
900 (129610) mojanihæla
ᘔ00 (144010) tåldanihæla
Ɛ00 (158410) vældenihæla.

1.000 (172810) is tildhā and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. 1.001 tildhā emibe, 6.2ᘔ9 (1078510) tulūɂa tildhā daninihælatåldimāmimoja.
Note that 2.00012 may be either one of tildhāt, dani tildhā, or (only emphatically) dani tildhāt.

The other divisions - numbers over ƐƐ.ƐƐƐ12 are based on groups of two digits: the two most commonly used ones in common speech are 1.00.000 (248.83210) - a raicē - and 1.00.00.000 (35.831.80810) - a lallaraicē.

The next two groups have their separate words, but are quantities rarely used in common speech: 1.00.00.00.000 (129) (5.159.780.35210) is a taiskaucis and 1.00.00.00.00.000 (1211) (743.008.370.68810) a lallataiskaucis. The words khorādi (127, i.e. synonym of lallaraicē), yaṣmūn (1211, i.e. lallataiskaucis), iriakas (1213), mairāṇa or lalleriakas (1215), nirāvah (1217), and sṝva or lallanirāvah (1219) were introduced in Classical-era texts, but are almost never used today. However, they form the base for the scientific measurement system's prefixes.

Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with -ende (-inde after -m or for Ɛ12) for ordinals, -tām for collectives, -haicē for distributives, -rvīm for adverbials/multiplicatives (prefixed māg- for the separate adverbial forms), and -endvāṭ/-indvāṭ for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-2 retain all irregular suppletive forms, e.g. hælmāmilahīla 2112st (2510th); hælmāmihælinaika 2212nd (2610th).

Finally, there are few other cardinals commonly used in speech: vālhælya 1½, vālpāmvya 2½, vālnęlca 3½, vālšulca 4½, and vāltulūya 5½. The forms vālchīca, vālambulya (or vālumbulya), and vālmojya are used in telling the time only and obsolete otherwise, while other similar forms are sparingly attested in older mathematical texts, but periphrastical constructions such as tulūɂa hælinaivāṭ no (or, sometimes, - vælka no) are more commonly heard and used nowadays. A form that, however, is sometimes found up to the present day is vālhælnihæla, meaning 16012 (21610), i.e. one dozenal hundred and a half.

Use of fractionary numbers

Fractionary numbers (except vāl- ones) are used to express non-integers just like any other quantity. Simple ones such as 0,6 (½) are the basic fractionary number - in this case hælinaivāṭ (note that, outside mathematics, danyāmita is the preferred term for "half", both in metaphorical (lilyā viṣam danyāmita "my other half") and non-metaphorical uses (alāvi danyāmita "half of the bottle")); other examples are 0,3 (¼) nęltendvāṭ and 0,4 (⅓) pāmvendvāṭ.
With more complex fractions, the smallest part (negative power of twelve) is stated - the three commonly found are 1/12 (māmindvāṭ), 1/144 (nihælendvāṭ), and 1/1728 (tildhaindvāṭ). For example, 0,82 is mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ and 0,7ᘔ6 is chīcænihælamāmimīraṃtulūɂa tildhaindvāṭ; sometimes, "0, then" (mīram) may be added: ajrā mīram mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ.

With a non-fractionary portion that is not zero, instead of mīram, smurā (full, integer) is used - e.g. 2,307 is usually said as dani smurā pāmvinihælchīka tildhaindvāṭ.

Declensions of cardinal numbers

Some cardinal numbers are declined for case, but this is usually only done in formal Chlouvānem. In informal Chlouvānem, either only emibe is declined, or are all numerals up to vælden, plus nihæla. Compounds of these are usually not declined. The words tildhā, (lalla)raicē, and (lalla)taiskaucis are always declined, but they are fully nouns.

Case emibe Dual paradigm i-paradigm a-paradigm en-paradigm
dani pāmvi, nęlte[7] 5 to 10[8] vælden only
Direct
Vocative
emibe dani pāmvi šulka vælden
Accusative emiyu daneṣa pāmvyu šulku vældu
Ergative emeis daneya pāmvyes šulkes vældes
Genitive emibī dañva pāmvi[9] šulki vældi
Translative emiban danaus pāmvin šulkan vældanna
Exessive emibat danebhan pāmvit šulkat vældanta
Essive emibą danīgin pāmvyą šulką vældąs
Dative emibå danaus pāmvyå šulkå vældå
Ablative emiyų danebhan pāmvyų šulkų vældų
Locative emiye danīgin pāmvye šulke vælde
Instrumental emīp danebhan pāmvip šulkip vældampa

Use of numerals

Cardinal numerals may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.

  • In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put before the noun and the noun is always singular (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. emibe yujam (one lotus flower); dani māra (two mango fruits); pāmvi haloe (three names), vælden ñaiṭa (eleven stars), and so on.
  • If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in genitive singular instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: yujami emibe (one lotus flower), māri dani (two mango fruits), haleni pāmvi (three names), ñaiṭi vælden (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. marti pāmvi (three cities) but marte pāmvye (in the three cities).
    This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
  • "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: dani māra or māri dani are both as correct as dani mārāt and māreva dani - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning; the dual form alone does not give particular emphasis to the number, while using the numeral, at least in formal styles, already gives more emphasis (intermediate to the two abovementioned forms). Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.

Note, though, the structure "nihæle + genitive of a noun + a cardinal numeral", used for expressing percentage (dozenally), e.g. nihæle laili hælmāmei "20% of people".

Ordinal numerals are regular attributive adjective-like words that precede nouns - e.g. hælinaika kita "second house". They do not decline if are used together with a noun, but they can also be used alone (e.g. hælinaika "the second one"), in which case they decline for case and number, as if they were -eh nouns (-a for 1st and 2nd), e.g. mojendesām ukulate "it has been told to those in ninth position".

Collective numerals (which decline as regular -ām nouns) are most commonly found with the meaning of "a group consisting of X ...", therefore implying greater cohesiveness than using the cardinal number implies. A common example of the subtle meaning change is between the sentences chīka lalāruṇa togāhaite (with a cardinal) and chīcætām lalāruṇa togāhaite (with a collective): both mean "seven lalāruṇai hit", but in the latter sentence the action is implied to be a coordinate act of all seven animals, while in the former they either hit randomly or the coordination of the action is not specified (or not specification-worthy). This is also the most common meaning with pluralia tantum, as commonly heard with ethnonyms (which are all plural only in Chlouvānem), e.g. šulkatām chlǣvānem "[a group of] five Chlouvānem people".
They can also be found, context-dependent, used with the meaning of "all X of..." - in a sentence such as e.g. mbulatām lejīn dilu liju lilejlaikate "all eight singers wanted to sing the same song" - or with the meaning of "X sets of" with singularia tantum - e.g. pāmvyatām hærṣūs "three pairs of lips" (but note that colloquial Chlouvānem increasingly often uses the cardinals here, e.g. pāmvi hærṣūs).
The collective numerals for 0 and 1 (ajrāṇṭām and emibutām respectively) are not included in the table above because they do not exist in practical use; however, they are sporadically found in poetry and literature, referring to people and with the meaning of "a group where only one/no one is ...", e.g. ajrāṇṭām tadhusmausīn "a group where no one is honest". Similarly, collectives for vāl- numbers (e.g. vālpāmvyantām "a group consisting of 2½ ...") exist, but are virtually unused. danyatām, like dani, may be use together with either a singular or a dual noun.

In some cases, the choice between a collective and a cardinal is stylistic. While for example concepts such as "we are..." or "I have ... children" do normally use the collective (e.g. tulūɂatām ñæltah jalim "we are six sisters/a group of six reciprocal brothers and sisters"; lili mæn nęltitām nūrya "I have four children"), even if using a cardinal isn't wrong, in a sentence such as "there are X people" both versions are found, with the collective-using sentence (e.g. dvārma vælditāmą lilęs virā "in the room there are eleven people") being perceived as more formal than the more colloquially heard cardinal-using version (i.e. dvārma vældąs lilęs virā).

Distributive numerals are indeclinable adjective-like words, and have the meaning of "X each": pāmvihaicē titē męlyāhai "three pens each are given"; lili lilyā ñæltah no tulūɂihaicē karjhañī alau ulgutarate "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in titē (pencil) and alūs (acc. alau) "bottle", just like after cardinal and collective numerals.

Adverbial numerals are adverbs with the meaning of "X times" and multiplicative numbers are adjective-like words (that can also be used alone) with the meaning of "X times as large"; numbers from 1 to 4 have both forms, while all other ones (except 0) have only the multiplicative one, which is used for both meanings. Examples: pāmvirvīm yąloe "triple meal/a meal three times as large"; āsena māgdani "twice a month"; āsena mbularvīm "eight times a month".
Zero only has an adverbial form (māgajrā), which is however only used in reading multiplications and powers, e.g. 3 * 0 māgajrā pāmvi, 90 māgajrā demǣ moja.

Fractionary numerals are always used in the noun.GEN numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with -vaḍa in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + vaḍa, meaning Xth part, e.g. hælinaika vaḍa (the second part) → hælinaivāṭ). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: marti hælinaivāṭ "half of the city" ; alāvi nęltendvāṭ "one fourth of the bottle" ; babhrāmi tulūɂendvaḍe "in one sixth of the country".

Basic maths

  • 1 + 2 = 3
emibe širē dani pāmvyå lunade (1.DIR. more. 2.DIR. 3-DAT. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: ADIR širē BDIR (širē ...) CDAT lunade (two addends) / lunāhai (3+ addends)
  • 3 - 2 = 1
pāmvi isan dani emibå lunade (3.DIR. minus. 2.DIR. 1-DAT go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: ADIR isan BDIR (isan ...) CDAT lunade (two addends) / lunāhai (3+ addends)
  • 3 * 2 = 6
māgdani pāmvi tulūɂå liven (2.ADV.MULTIP. 3.DIR. 6-DAT. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-B ADIR CDAT liven
  • 6 : 2 = 3
hælinaivadęs tulūɂa pāmvyå liven (2.FRACTION-ESS. 6.DIR 3-DAT. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: FRACTIONARY-BESS ADIR CDAT liven
  • 62 = 30 (3610)
māgdani demǣ tulūɂa pāmvimāmei liven (2.ADV.MULTIP. REFL.GEN-LOC. 6.DIR. 3012. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-B demǣ ADIR CDAT liven

Reified numerals

Reified numerals, or numerals used as nouns, have a special form, which is actually the numeral with the common noun-forming suffix -as added (with regular saṃdhi). These numerals are used most notably for:

  • In order to refer to the digits themselves (danyas "the digit 2");
  • Things named with numbers (tulūɂās "[tram/bus/etc] number 6");
  • (in the plural) Year dozens (vælknihælē "the 6012s = the 386012s);
  • (in the plural) Age ranges by the dozen (hælmāmeyē "2012ies" = the age range from the start of one's 2012th year to the end of one's 2Ɛth);
  • School marks - note that there's no uniform system in the Inquisition (nęltayas "a grade 4" (passing grade in the most widespread system for non-higher education in the Inquisition, ranging from 1 (emibayas), worst, to 7 (chīkās), best));
  • A group of X people - a reification of collective numerals (pāmvyas "a trio").

Note that there are some terms which use numerals as roots but aren't considered reified numbers (also because of their rather inconsistent meanings); the most common examples include danyāmita (half) and māmyāmita (dozen).

Units of Measurement

Chlouvānem units of measurement (lęlgīs, pl. lęlgais) are divided in popular units (leilausirena lęlgais) and scientific units (tarlausirena lęlgais). Scientific units, while understood, are rarely found outside of scientific contexts if corresponding popular units exist, while popular units are found in daily usage. Popular units follow however a measurement standard introduced in the year 36Ɛ7 (618710) and updated several times in the following two centuries, in order to give a single understood measure for all units whose names and definitions varied across the many countries of the Chlouvānem cultural space.
It is also to be noted that Calemerian scientific units have internationally unified definitions for their base units but are substantially different between the Western and the Eastern world as Western countries use them with a decimal system, while the Eastern countries (the Inquisition, most of the former Kaiṣamā, and Greater Skyrdagor) use them with a duodecimal system.

Length

The tyuta, nakūrum, and garaṇa are known but rarely used; the vālpāmvyās is rarely written as a separate measure, but isn't uncommon in speech.

Short Name Meaning/name origin Equivalent to Metric system (approx.)
lūj lūjla (ABL) Point, tip ⅛ tyu ~3.09639 mm
tyu tyuta Short (dialectal) ⅓ ka ~2.47711 cm
ka katis Finger ⅓ mā ~7.43133 cm
mākoba Span (base unit) 22.294 cm
pājya Leg 4 mā 89.176 cm
vāl vālpāmvyās
vālpāmvya pājya
Two and a half legs 2+½ pā 2.2294 m
nak nakūrum Rod 8 pā 7.13408 m
cān cāṃtrūh Section (A. Yodhvaši) 140 (19210) pā 171.21792 m
vai vaiṣrya Plough 8 cān
ᘔ80 (153610)
1369.7434 m — 1.36974 km
gar garaṇa Hour 34 (4010) cān 6848.72 m — 6.84872 km


Temperature

Temperature measuring in the Chlouvānem world uses the Jahārāṭha scale (shortened ºj; named after scientist Ṣastirāvi Jahārāṭha Nukthalin), which is fixed with a zero degree at water freezing temperature at sea level. 100 ºj is the rough boiling temperature of water, but, being a duodecimal scale, it is 10012 (14410), thus 1 ºj equals 25/36 of a degree Celsius, or 1 ºC = 1.44 ºj.
The median body temperature of a Calemerian human (which is slightly lower than for terrestrial humans) is of 41 ºj (4910), thus ~34.0278 ºC.

Time

See also: Chlouvānem Calendar and time § the Chlouvānem calendar

English Chlouvānem Equivalent to rough Earthly approximation
Year heirah 418 Calemerian days 609.6 Earth days
Day lairē 2812 (3210) hours ~35 hours
Hour garaṇa 3 hælmāmyai
6012 (7210) railai
~65 min ~37 sec
group of "minutes" hælmāmya 2012 (2410) railai ~21 min ~52 sec
"Minute" raila (base unit) ~54.6805 sec
"Second" namišoe 1/4012 (1/4810) raila ~1.8986 sec
1/12 of a "second" (namišeni) māmendvāṭ 1/1012 (1/1210) namišoe ~0.1582 sec
1/144 of a "second" (namišeni) nihælendvāṭ 1/10012 (1/14410) namišoe ~0.0131 sec
1/1728 of a "second" (namišeni) tildhaindvāṭ 1/100012 (1/172810) namišoe ~1.0987 ms

Other units

Chlouvānem Symbol rough Earthly approximation
frequency lūnaji lnj ~0.526704 Hz
voltage chulgān chg 1 V

Particles (remīk)

Traditional Chlouvānem grammar only recognizes a single part of speech called "particles" (remīn, literally "helper(s)") which includes conjunctions, postpositions, and interjections. However, these three are recognized as subsets of particles - here translated as "conjunctive particles" (natemālāhai remīn), "accompanying particles", i.e. postpositions (ūtimāhai remīn), and "exclamatory particles" (pigdilanah nali remīn).

Many Chlouvānem particles are grammaticalized usages of other words, some of them no longer being used in their original meaning in contemporary use (e.g. varve).

Conjunctive particles

Conjunctive particles may not stand syntactically alone and, with a few exceptions, don't require any particular case of a noun. Most of them function, or are also used, as conjunctions between sentences.

  • jahān — anyway (conjunction or second position adverb)
  • lai — inclusive or
  • las — and (in incomplete listings, cf. no and sama); it follows the noun it refers to, and in listings with more than two nouns it follows every noun except for the first. Not used to conjoin sentences.
  • lenta — "together (with)", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage. When pospositive, it is more emphatic than . Adverbially, gimmālsiṭ is more common.
  • mailiven — so, thus, therefore (grammaticalized use of go_forward.UNIDIR.PRES.IND.EXP.3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.)
  • mbu — exclusive or
  • mešē — given that (grammaticalized use of see.PRES.IND-EXP-3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.)
  • najelai — maybe. Originally the archaic potential form of najalle (to happen). Sentence-final, requires a verb in the subjunctive mood, e.g. yahatite najelai "maybe I'll read it".
  • nānim — almost; if used with nouns, requires essive case.
  • ni — but (in second position)
  • no — and (in complete listings, cf. las); same placement as las. Also used to conjoin sentences, but sama is preferred, especially when there are different subjects (triggered arguments).
  • nyąu — because, for, as (cf. ); amyąu in the Classical era, i.e. the ablative of the former demonstrative ami.
Used sentence-finally: aganą lā įstyāk nyąu yųlake pañcekte "as (s)he was hungry, (s)he started eating." In lone sentences, e.g. answers, is preferred: aganą lā tī įstyāk "because (s)he was hungry."
  • paṣe — furthermore
  • — if (and pūmbu "whether") - see Chlouvānem syntax § Conditional sentences
  • sama (sam before vowels) — and (between sentences only, cf. las and no)
  • širē — also, too (only between sentences, cf. tan). A different use of the adverb meaning "more".
  • tadye — despite that (between sentences), cf. tatta.
  • tan — also, too; used adverbially and between sentences (where, however, širē is more common).
  • tatta — despite, even though; requires a noun in the essive case or a subjunctive verb (e.g. gu talunīs ša tatta dadrā "even though you didn't come, it has been done."). Colloquially, it is also used anaphorically, instead of tadye; however, it is considered bad style in formal language.
  • varve — instead of; requires genitive case or subjunctive mood. Originally the locative singular of varva "form", no longer used in contemporary Chlouvānem.
    • samvarve — on the other hand, whereas
  • vivāmi — "too much", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage.
  • væse — while, in the meantime; "during (the)" with nouns. Requires a verb in the subjunctive mood or a noun in the essive (or, meaning-dependant, exessive or translative) case.

Accompanying particles (i.e. postpositions)

These particles can never stand alone, do not conjoin sentences, and nearly always require a particular noun case.

  • bīs — between; from ... until, in expressions of time. Comes after both nouns in essive case: šurājęs nyūramyęs bīs "between Šurājah and Nyūramyah".
  • bisikita — except for; requires subjunctive mood or essive case. Grammaticalized usage of put_aside-EXP-IND.PERF.3.PATIENT.EXTERIOR. (e.g. nītedarāhai lailąs bisikita nalunya upulsma "entrance is forbidden, except for involved people" → "authorized personnel only")
  • dam — interrogative particle in polar questions, put after the verb (e.g. daltah vi dam? "is it a fish?")
  • e — like. Requires essive case with nouns and subjunctive mood with verbs.
  • ga — adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles or proper names, but not honorifics), e.g. Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta "Līlasuṃghāṇa city" or Tāllahārya ga maita "Tāllahārya river".
    Mostly in poetry (for metrical reasons), or Archaic and Early Classical Chlouvānem prose (e.g. in the Lileṃsasarum, or many Yunyalīlti holy books), ga is used to conjoin attributive verbs to nouns, e.g. lei imiša ga švas "the animal seen by me". Already in parts of the Lileṃsasarum the decading usage of the particle in this sense is to be noted, as often it is only used to conjoin exterior verbs to nouns, but not interior ones.
  • gu(n) ~ ša — negative circumposition used around verbs, e.g. gu yuyųlsegde ša "(s)he does not want to eat". The first element is gun before vowels; the ša element is omitted if the verb is attributive.
  • — with (comitative); requires essive case (e.g. lilyą ñæltęs lā "with my sister"). The Archaic Chlouvānem form was lapi.
  • lut — used with expressions of time: means "ago" if used with ablative case (nęlcų heirų lut "four years ago"), "for/since" if with essive case (nęlcą heiręs lut "for four years").
  • mei and go — "yes" and "no", used according to the polarity of the question; i.e. mei denotes the statement is true ("yes" to affirmative questions, "no" to negative questions), while go denotes the statement is false ("no" to affirmative questions, "yes" to negative questions).
  • mænmarks a topic which otherwise has no role in the sentence.
  • nali — benefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the benefited argument when the verb is not in benefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "in order to", with a nuance of hope (the bare subjunctive already carries the "in order to" meaning).
  • nin — after, with ablative or subjunctive (nęlcų heirų nin "after four years")
  • pa — on, of, concerning, on the subject of, about. Requires a direct case noun (e.g. vāṇatarlā pa naviṣya "book about botany") or a subjunctive mood verb (e.g. šūñjulā drētte pa nīdhāḍirdya "the two of us are talking about what (s)he did down there").
  • ras — antibenefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the anti-benefited argument when the verb is not in antibenefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "to avoid X".
  • sām — different meanings depending on case:
ablative, in expressions of time: "in ... time" (at the end of a certain period), or "by": nęlcų heirų sām "in four years' time, four years for now"; šurājų sām "by Šurājah";
translative (rarely essive), in expressions of time: "in/for/until" (within, during a certain period): nęltin heiran sām "for the coming four years" (or nęlcą heiręs sām); ājvan sām "until dawn";
dative case, with places: "until, as far as": līlasuṃghāṇa ṣrāvamaila ga keikom sām "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Ṣrāvamaila Station")
subjunctive verb: "until": primęlirī sām "until he/she/it comes back".
  • šut — before, with ablative or subjunctive (nęlcų heirų šut "four years before").
  • vādį — without, with essive or subjunctive. Unlike English, it cannot be used anaphorically.

Correlative particles

Chlouvānem does not have correlative conjunctions as English does, because they are translated in different ways:

  • English "both... and..." is most commonly translated as X Y no tan ("X, and also Y"), e.g. jādāh lañekaica no tan nanau draikate "both Jādāh and Lañekaica did that".
    Alternatively, the forms X Y no peiṃsiṭ ("X, and the same for Y") or X ..., Y peiṃsiṭ ("X ..., and Y the same") are also widespread, e.g. jādāh lañekaica no peiṃsiṭ nanau draikate; nāneh lei uyųla, māra peiṃsiṭ "I have eaten both the bread and the mango".
  • English "neither... nor..." is translated by the same structures as "both... and...", but negative. In the most common usage, tan is omitted:
    jādāh lañekaica no (tan) nanau gu draikate ša "neither Jādāh nor Lañekaica did that"; nāneh lei gun uyųla ša, māra peiṃsiṭ "I have eaten neither the bread nor the mango".
  • "either... or..." is easily translated by the exclusive or (mbu). It is commonly only used after the second term, but it can be put after every term for emphasis:
    jādāh (mbu) lañekaica mbu nanau dṛkte – either Jādah or Lañekaica did it. (note the singular verb)

Emphatic particles

A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:

  • anā is an introductory particle (e.g. "so")
  • å expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. å vikṣiṭ dadrāte "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / vikṣiṭ dadrā å "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
  • gives the sentence, especially a command or a proposition, an informal tone - cf. German "mal" or Italian "un po'", e.g. najire nanau mešute dā "I'll just see what happens"; peithos dā "just calm down and take a walk around here."
  • e is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
  • eri means "even", marking a positive emphasis (e.g. hūnakumi dhāḍan eri dhāḍire "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi[10]")
  • gāri means "not even", being the opposite of eri, marking a negative emphasis (e.g. hulābdān chlǣvānumi dhāḍan gāri dhāḍire "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
  • , a generic filler (cf. "I mean"), often combined with e. e.g. nā (e) nenēt nāṭ tarliru! "I mean, I already know this!"
  • nane is a tag question, e.g. camiyūs vi dam nane? "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
  • nimā is an introductory particle, same as anā.
  • naihā is a tag question much like nane, but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. lære draute dam naihā? "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
  • pos is a filler with a meaning similar to tau, but it is more properly translated as emphasizing that the speaker considers the statement as a general truth or a widely accepted thing, e.g. ālīce jeldegde pos "yeah, everybody knows (s)he acts that way/does that kind of things."
  • sāṭ expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. tamye tamyu draukæ sāṭ "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
  • tau emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. lārvājuṣe ēk tau "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; kitui vasau tau "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
  • tva puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. nenēyu daudyute tati ukulaṃte tva! "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"

Derivational morphology (vāmbeithausire maivāndarāmita)

Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.

Compounds

Chlouvānem, like Sanskrit, has four main types of compound words (tadmaiva, pl. tadmaivai), called in Chlouvānem grammar emibądanīs (dvandva), ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva (avyayībhāva), nīdhvakādhūs (tatpuruṣa), and kaudhvakādhūs (bahuvrīhi).

Dvandva (emibądanīs)

The first type of compounds is emibądanīs type (also called no ga tadmaiva), corresponding to dvandva compounds. In emibądanais, all words in the compound are taken with the concrete idea they represent. As hinted to by the alternative name, these compounds effectively substitute an "X Y no" (X and Y), compressing it into a single word.

tēneh ukyā no "a branch and a trunk" → tēnayukyāt "branch and trunk"

Dvandva compounds are formed by removing the direct case -s or -h marker from the word, lengthening all resulting final vowels (i.e. for all words not ending in -oe, -ai, -m, or -n), and joining with saṃdhi the second word; the second word is then inflected in the dual (if the word semantically refers to two things) or in the plural (if it refers to three or more things - see the next example).

tēneh nūlyai no "a branch and leaves" → tēnēnūlyai "branch(es) and leaves"

Note that, if the dvandva is plural, there is no indication of how many elements of each component are present:

lalāruṇāt voltām no "two lalāruṇai (DU) and a sheep (SG)" → lalāruṇāvoltāk "lalāruṇai and sheep" (PL)
lalāruṇai voltām no "lalāruṇai (PL) and a sheep (SG)" → lalāruṇāvoltāk "lalāruṇai and sheep" (PL)
lalāruṇa voltāk no "a lalāruṇa (SG) and sheep (PL)" → lalāruṇāvoltāk "lalāruṇai and sheep" (PL)

The identification of how many individual lalāruṇai and sheep is lost in the compound, however, we know from the plural number that there must be at least three animals; otherwise, the dvandva would be dual:

lalāruṇa voltām no "a lalāruṇa (SG) and a sheep (SG)" → lalāruṇāvoltīvā "lalāruṇai and sheep" (DU)

Dvandva made of three or more elements can, obviously, only be plural:

lalāruṇa voltām no jorai no "a lalāruṇa, a sheep, and a goat" → lalāruṇāvoltāñjorāye "lalārunai, sheep, and goats"

In the most formal registers of Chlouvānem, it is not uncommon to find dvandva compounds made of several elements:

lācāh kraṣṭāmita no lillāmita no demigretas no lelyēmita no "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family" → lācākraṣṭāmitālillāmitādemigretālelyēmitai "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family"

Avyayībhāva (ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva)

Avyayībhāva compounds, in Chlouvānem ṭvādaradhausirāhe tadmaivai ("adverbial compounds"), are not as productive as the other types and, in fact, except for a few words they're mostly limited to Archaic and Classical Chlouvānem; despite being based on the latter, modern Chlouvānem does not use them productively (but see nīpenai below).
These compounds generally have a first element which is a particle (or a verbal prefix), and the second element is a noun which is either left uninflected in the direct singular or, more commonly, in the two Archaic Chlouvānem adverbializing cases: the instrumental plural or the locative singular.

sam + jildas "after + act" → *sañjildas → sañjilde "consequently"
naš(e) + sṝva "full, complete + extent" → *nakṣṝva → nakṣṝve "as much as possible"
væse + vāyam "while + image, form" → væsvāyam or væsvāyaṃrīka "thus, therefore"
paṣ(e) + vāyam "beyond + image, form" → paṣvāyam "in addition, furthermore"
maibu + jallas "enough + condition" → *maibujallas → maibujalle "as needed"
+ penai "within + net" → nīpenai "online" (generally considered the only modern Chlouvānem avyayībhāva)

A particular kind of avyayībhāva is the -ṣati class, whose particularity derives from having a first element which is a declinable word (a possessive determiner); however, they're still adverbs and therefore uninflected:

lilyā ṣati "my way" → lilyāṣati "from my point of view; in my opinion; my way"
sāmyā ṣati "your way" → sāmyāṣati "from your point of view; in your opinion; your way"

Tatpuruṣa (nīdhvakādhūs)

Tatpuruṣa compounds (nīdhvakādhūs "with meaning inside", pl. nīdhvakādhaus) are likely the most common overall in Chlouvānem, and are the preferred way of crafting new words. These are endocentric compounds, the last element, the head of the compound, is modified by the previous element(s), which can be of any part of speech. Usually, the tatpuruṣa replaces genitive "X of Y", agentive "X which does Y", benefactive "X for Y", locative "X in Y", instrumental "X with Y", or sometimes copular structures "X which is (also) Y" (corresponding to Sanskrit karmadhāraya compounds) or "X made of Y".
The determining elements are generally uninflected.

vāṇumi tarlā "study of plants" → vāṇatarlā "botany"
vāṇatarlom kaminairīveyē lila "a person studying botany" (semantic agent) → vāṇatarlālila "botanist"
mordhē cūlla "carriage that flies" → mordhacūlla "airplane"
aṣṭre nali hatsunā "brush for teeth" → aṣṭṛhatsunā "toothbrush"
nanāye līlta "path in the jungle" → nanailīlta "jungle path"
nijogāp konanah "shooting with bow" → nijogākonanah "archery"
munnęs ḍūṇā "a telephone which is a computer" → munnaḍūṇā "smartphone"
javilenīs mayābi "wine made from apples" → javilmayābi "cider"

Bahuvrīhi (kaudhvakādhūs)

Bahuvrīhi compounds (kaudhvakādhūs "with meaning outside", pl. kaudhvakādhaus) are also quite common Chlouvānem words; they are exocentric compounds where none of the elements is the head of the compound, or, all elements are qualifiers. They replace structures like "[someone/something] with X which is/are Y" or "[sm/st] whose X is/are Y"; it could even be generalized to "[sm/st] whose [tatpuruṣa compound]":

murkire dhānęs lā lila "person with black hands" → murkadhāna "Inquisitor"
yųlgis nali javyęs lā dvārma "room with fire for food" → yųljavyāh "kitchen"[11]

Noun-forming morphemes

-a (unstressed) or (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.

  • dṛ (to do, to make) → dara (activity)
  • lil (to live) → lila (person; living thing)
  • tṛl (to know) → tarlā (science)

-as is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.

  • tug (to beat) → tugas (beat)
  • māhatyā (māhatim-) (be to the right of) → māhatimas (right)
  • āntyā (āntim-) (be above, be on) → āntimas (part above)

-ūm is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with -as.

  • lgut (to buy) → lgutūm (something bought)
  • peith (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → peithūm (walk)
  • yālv (to be sweet (taste)) → yālvūm (sweet taste)

-(u)kāram is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.
In modern coinings, it is also used to denote a division of something.

  • lun (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → lulkāram (step)
  • lil (to live) (or liloe (life)) → lilukāram (moment, instant)
  • daša (rain) → dašukāram (raindrop)
  • araṣa (atom) → araṣkāram (subatomic particle)

-anah, with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.

  • dig (to pour) → deganah ((act of) pouring)
  • miš (to see) → mešanah (sight)
  • lgut (to buy) → lgotanah (shopping)

-na (-ra after t or d; -iyāna after Cy, -uvāna after Cv) with lengthening denotes a quality.

  • māl (to keep together) → mālna (union)
  • hælvē (fruit) → šaulviyāna (fertility) (morphemically //hyaulviyāna//)
  • åbdv (to swell, blow up) → åbduvāna (swollenness, bloatiness)
  • blut (to clean) → blūtra (cleanliness)
  • Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an -aus- adjectival verb (e.g. chlæraus- ((to be) easy) → chlærausna (easiness)) and in a few exceptions.
  • Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix (e.g. vald (to (be) open) → uvaldra (opening, state of being open)).

-išam has the same meaning as -na, but it's rarer.

  • yųlniltas (edible) → yųlniltešam (edibility)
  •  yālv (to be sweet (taste)) → yālvišam (sweetness)
  • ñailūh (ice) → ñailūvišam (coldness)
  • nevy (to model, to give a form) → nevīšam (plastic) (This word underwent a meaning shift from "modellability" to a common material with that quality, replacing the derived form nevīšandhūs previously used. "Modellability" is nyaviyāna in contemporary Chlouvānem.)

-āmita (-yāmita when used with nouns with thematic e or i), often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English -ism.

  • lalteh (friend (female)) → laltyāmita (friendship)
  •  ēmīla (tiger) → ēmīlāmita (nobility (quality); most important people in society[12])
  • ñæltah (sister (male's)) → ñæltāmita (brotherhood)

-tsām (-utsām after ñ, š, and voiced stops except d(h)), with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings, though typically instrumental.

  •  māl (to keep together) → māltsām (number)
  •  lij (to sing) → lejutsām (choir)
  •  dhāḍ (to speak) → dhāḍutsām (voice)
  • kul (to say) → kultsām (word) (irregular lack of middle-grade ablaut)

-rṣūs (-ṛṣūs after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.

  • yaud- (to catch) → yaudṛṣūs (trap)
  • miš- (to see) → meširṣūs (eye (literary, rare))[13]
  • nail- (to kiss) → nailṛṣūs (lips (pair of))

-gis denotes something used for doing an action, not always synonymous with -rṣūs. -t-gis becomes -ñjis.

  •  mešīn (eye) → mešīlgis (glasses (pair of))
  •  tug- (to beat) → tulgis (drumstick)
  •  lgut- (to buy) → lguñjis (money, currency)

-oe (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.

  •  hal- (to call) → haloe (name, noun)
  •  mbiṇḍh- (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → mbiṇḍhoe (development; the way something is carried out)
  • yųl- (to eat) → yąloe (meal)

-īn plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English -er); usually it is a person, but not always.

  • bhi- (to take care of; to care for) → bhayīn (someone who takes care; guardian)
  • tug- (to beat) → togīn (heart)
  •  lgut- (to buy) → lgotīn (buyer)

-āršis is a mostly non-productive agentive suffix like -īn, surviving in a few ancient forms as well as some colloquial pejoratives:

  • lęk- (to measure) → lękāršis (surveyor, inspector)
  • dhīl- (to be idle) → dhīlāršis (lazy ass (pejor.))
  • ēreša (teardrop) → ērešāršis (crybaby (pejor.))

-āvi denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.

  •  lameṣa (coconut palm) → laṃṣāvi (coconut)
  •  mešanah (sight) → mešanąvi (knowledge)
  • yųl- (to eat) → yųlāvi (strength (literary, rare))
  • It is also used with surnames of writers, usually as a plurale tantum, in order to derive words meaning "the works of...", e.g. yukahināryāvi "the works of Lileikhurāvi Yukahināri Mæmihūmya".

-āmis, with lengthening, means "made of X".

  • tāmira (rock, stone) → tāmirāmis (stone tool)
  •  tarlā (knowledge, science) → tārlāmis (wisdom)
  •  lil- (to live) → līlāmis (a blissful place)
  • Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either h, s, or m) do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ñaryāh (mountain) → ñaryāmis (mountainous area)).

-ūneh (-īneh after stems in -Cy-, -ēneh for nouns in ), with middle grade ablaut (rarely strong grade), has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.

  •  daša (rain) → dašūneh (monsoon)
  •  nail- (to kiss) → nailūneh (love (literary, rare))
  • yaiva (all) + lairē (day) → yaivlairēṇeh (everyday life)
  • lalāruṇa (giant domestic lizard) → lalārauṇūneh (knight mounting a lalāruṇa)

-dhūs means "having X".

  • dara (activity) → daradhūs (verb)
  • šaṇṭrās (field, soil) → šaṇṭrādhūs (countryside)
  • hælvē (fruit) → hælvidhūs (fruiting tree; literary: pregnant woman)

-bān and -ūrah are two roughly equivalent suffixes used for locations. The first one is generally used after vowels, the second after consonants, but it's no strict rule.

  • hælvē (fruit) → hælvēbān (orchard)
  • lil (to live) → lilūrah (world)
  • peith (to go, to walk (multidirectional)) → peithūrah (passage)

-(l)āṇa forms a true collective noun:

  • lalteh (friend (female)) → laltelāṇa (group of friends)
  • jīma (character, symbol, letter) → jīmalāṇa (writing system)
  • maiva (word) → maivalāṇa (lexicon)

-(l)ænah denotes a tree or a plant having a certain fruit[14].

  •  haisah (pineapple) → haisænah (pineapple tree)
  •  maɂika (uncooked rice) → maɂikænah (rice plant)
  • šikālas (prickly pear) → šikālænah (prickly pear cactus)

-yūs is used with toponyms and is one of the most common ways to form demonyms. As many of the nouns these words are derived from are proper nouns and of non-Chlouvānem origin, there are often irregular formations, e.g. using only a part of the original word.

  • Līlasuṃghāṇalīlasuṃghāṇyūs
  • Camicamiyūs
  • Ajāɂilbādhiajāɂilbādhyūs

-mana (-ana after CC clusters) is often found with the meaning of "that has to be X"; usually, a synonymous word may be formed by -s derivation from a necessitative stem, but some -mana words have their own specialized meaning:

  • ṭvur- (to believe) → ṭvurmaṇa (miracle)
  • miš- (to see) → mišmana (attraction) (also memikṣūs)
  • tṛl- (to know, understand) → tṛlmana (rule) (not synonymous with tartṛlsūs, meaning "needed knowledge, prerequisite")

-yai (often with lengthening) forms nouns with the meaning of "pertaining to", generally applied to nouns denoting inanimate (but usually concrete) concepts. Such nouns are found in literature with an anaphorical use.
It is commonly found in Chlouvānem surnames. In chemistry, it denotes binary compounds, usually with a dvandva stem.

  • vīhatam (farm) → vīhātyai (farmer; farm's)
  • svāṣṭa (armor) → svāṣṭyai (armored knight)
  • bilumbida (sodium) + talyelīm (chlorine) → bilumbītalyelīyai (sodium chloride)

-ceh, -cænah, and -cañīh (all often with palatalization of the last consonant) are three different (but with roughly the same meaning) diminutive-forming suffixes; some of them have developed distinct meanings. They can also be compounded, as in -cæñ-cañīh:

  • nūrya (child) → nūricænah (little child)
  • ēmīla (tiger) → ēmīlcañīh (cat)
  • pǣka (taste) → pǣcicænah (hors d'œuvre, entrée)

Similarly, -rarā (a likely Laiputaši borrowing) is used as an augmentative, but is only found in informal styles.

  • dårṣa (cool, nice) → dårṣararā (fantastic)
  • jāmṝṣa (dam) → jāmṝṣararā (a huge dam)
  • alūs (bottle) → alūrarā (a big bottle)

Verb-forming morphemes

Denominal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are not formed with derivational suffixes; a "light verb" is attached to the semantic root instead; the semantic root remains invariable but the light verb is conjugated (as a prefixed one). The light verb used are especially dṛke (to do, make), but also jilde (to do an action), jānake (to feel (physical)), and gyake (to be). Some examples:

  • āmaya (collection) → āmayadṛke (to collect)
  • språma (glue) → språñjilde (to glue)
  • jålkha (cold (sensation)) → jålkhajānake (to be/feel cold)
  • ñailūh (ice) → tæñailūgyake (to freeze) (note the tæ- dynamic prefix).

The other basic derived formation is the frequentative verb, formed with reduplication (with a long vowel) and -ve(y)- (-vi(y)- in the past tense[15]). -ṛ reduplicates as , but becomes a in the root.
Due to the common use of this form in modern Chlouvānem, some grammarians consider it as an inflectional category instead of a derivation. Note though that for motion verbs only multidirectional ones have a frequentative form (with iterative meaning); the multidirectionals already act as frequentative forms of the monodirectionals.

  • dṛ- (to do) → dṝdave- (to repetitively do)
  • na-jaly- (to happen) → najājlive- (to keep happening; to regularly happen, to occur)[16] (jaly- reduplicates as jā-jli-, with the i from the root y).
  • -jaly- (to be) + various prefixes → bījājlive- (to cease to be); galajājlive- (to remain in one place; to visit; to keep being)
  • tvorg- (to fear) → totvargve- (to fear over and over again) (tvo- reduplicates as to- instead of tva-).
  • låvy- (to slip) → laulavive- (to slip around here and there) (-å- reduplicates as -au- and becomes a in the root).

Note that nairīveke conjugates as a frequentative verb, but is not frequentative and does not have frequentative forms.
Frequentative perfect stems have the ablauted vowel in the reduplication and a long one in the root (cf. miš-, bare frequentative mīmišve-, perfect frequentative memīšve-); both vowels are long for non-ablauted stems (cf. nāmv-, nānamve-, nānāmve-).
Inverse ablauting roots have similar rules: the bare frequentative uses the reduplication of the nonreduced root and the reduced vowel in the root itself (vald- → va-uld-ve- → voldve-); the frequentative perfect is like the normal frequentative of other verbs, with the long vowel in the reduplication only (vald-vāvaldve-).

In many cases, frequentatives are used with an iterative meaning; the latter, if needed for disambiguation, may be specified by the particle dīdān.

Adjectival verbs

Adjectival verbs, however, do have some ways to be derived from other parts of speech.

-ūk-ke is the most common adjectival verb-forming suffix, denoting something strictly related to an object or a verb. Note that they are all thematic verbs, even if their infinitive is contracted (Archaic Chl. -ūkake → Classical and Modern -ūkke). Often they are interchangeable with the genitive form of the noun they derived from:

  • avyāṣa (time) → avyāṣūkke ([to be] temporal)
  • chlærūm (light) → chlærūkke (of the light)
  • daša (rain) → dašūkke (rainy, concerning rain)

-uy-a-ke is a rarer variant of -ūk-ke, most commonly found for qualities related to people, but not exclusively (see third example):

  • jāyim (girl) → jāyimuyake (girly, girlish)
  • saṃhāram (boy) → saṃhāruyake (boyish)
  • irūtākalam (atom) → irūtāruyake (atomic) (the -r is etymological from Ancient Kūṣṛmāṭhi)

-aus-a-ke (rarely -us-a-ke) forms adjectival verbs related to a quality that is applied to some object, but more abstractly related than those formed with -ūkke; sometimes they are only figurative:

  • chlærūm (light) → chlærausake (easy)
  • pāṇi (side) → pāṇyausake (peripheral, less important)
  • namęlь (to make an effort, to apply oneself, to work harder) → namęliausake (Stakhanovite)
  • Nouns ending in typically only add -sь- (-si-ke):
    • laikā (innocence) → laikāsike (innocent)

-nilt-a-ke translates English -able, and the circumfix uṣ- -niltake translates to "un- -able" or, sometimes, "difficult to X". The rare ñǣ- -niltake translates as "easy to X".
The uṣ- prefix has the allomorphs ū- (before voiced stops), uš- (before c and ch), and u- (before l+consonant); uṣ- plus any sibilant becomes ukṣ-.

  • tṛl (to know, understand) → tṛlniltake (understandable) → uṣṭṛlniltake (uncomprehensible; difficult to understand) / ñǣtṛlniltake (easy to understand)
  • yųl (to eat) → yųlniltake (edible) → uṣyųlniltake (unedible)
  • lgut (to buy) → lgutniltake (buyable) → ulgutniltake (not buyable)

-ṣeni-ke (morph. seny-ke, all root verbs) translates "having X as a quality", usually added to nouns, or "X-like" in some cases; it may be synonymous with the -dhūs derivative. u- and i- stems (thus -uh, -ih, -us...) lengthen that vowel before the suffix.

  • rahēlah (health) → rahēlṣenike (healthy)
  • nakṣuma (music) → nakṣuṃṣenike (having a musical talent)
  • migmairuh (emerald) → migmairūṣenike (emeraldine, emerald-like)

Compound verbs

Chlouvānem uses compound verbs as its main method of deriving verbs from nouns. Such "verbs" are actually a nominal root which does not decline followed by a conjugating verb. The verb used influences the meaning that the compound will have:

  • dṛke (to do) is probably the most commonly used, and may have a meaning of using something (denoted by the nominal root) to treat something else (cf. bikṣurdṛke "to deodorize" < bikṣurga "deodorant"), of moving or acting like the nominal root (yināṃdṛke "to protect" < yinām "protection"), or of simply having or creating something (āmayadṛke "to collect" < āmaya "collection").
  • kitte (to put) is used for a meaning of addition of the nominal root or its characteristics to something (cf. nāmṛkitte "to add salt" < nāṃra "salt).
  • męlike (to give) is sometimes used with the same meaning as kitte (cf. junyāmęlike "to plant flowers" < junyā "flower").
  • jilde (to act) is used for subjects "emitting" or "giving off" something (cf. lāhajilde "to judge" < lāham "judgement"), also for subjects possessing (dhokajilde "to mean" < dhokam "meaning") or undergoing something (lañšijilde "to marry" < lañši (arch.) braid, wedding), and also for weather phenomena[17] (dašajilde "to rain" < daša "rain").
  • gyake (to be) is used, like in one meaning of dṛke, for moving or acting like the nominal root. Typically, it is more for states than actions (the prototypical and most common example is pṛšcāṃgyake "to be pleasing" < pṛšcām "something pleasing"[18]).
  • jānake (to feel) has a meaning partially overlapping with jalle (and dṛke), particularly marking the "feeling" of a (usually uncontrollable) condition (jålkhajānake "to be cold" < jålkha "cold").
  • milke (to take) has a varied range of meaning: getting or gathering something (vīrādhmilke "to adopt" < vīrādhen "orphan"; mailьlut(a)milke "to take advantage" < mailьluta "advantage"), also the opposite, taking something away (cf. rantamilke "to peel (fruits)" < rantas "peel"), and also overlapping partially with kitte and męlike in marking the addition of something or, more, properly, the act of bringing something (prātamilke "to get windy; (figur.) to accelerate" < prātas "wind" - cf. prātajilde "to be windy").
  • bismilke (to take away) and bīdṛke (to destroy) are used, more commonly than milke, for the meaning of removing or taking something away: (ssūbismilke "to calm down" < ssūgis "something that worries"; lilembīdṛke "(euphem.) to kill" < liloe "life").

Sometimes, the most meaningful element of a compound verb is not otherwise found as a standalone word in Chlouvānem, as in pṛšcāṃjalle (to like), or hārlājmęlike (to prefer).

Prefixes

Prefixes are a major part of Chlouvānem derivational morphology. Most of them are the same as for positional and motion verbs — for their formation and use, see the related section. Most prefixes are used with verbs, and are found with nouns only in derived forms; some of them, however, can be used also or exclusively with nouns and adjectives. Prefixes derive usually from Proto-Lahob, but a few chiefly nominal ones are from Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi words.
Here follows a complete list of all prefixes used in Chlouvānem and their meaning. When two prefixes are divided by a wave dash, the first is lative and the second is ablative; NOM marks meanings of nouns derived with that prefix.

Positional and motional prefixes

  • ta- 〜 tų- - generic direction

  • ān- 〜 yana- - on, above
  • šu- 〜 šer- - under, below
  • ṭvā- 〜 ṭus- - between
  • gin- 〜 ją- - among
  • nī- 〜 ani- - within/from within inside
  • ū(b)- 〜 yom- - close to
  • bis- 〜 bara- - far, away
  • tad- (tata- before l) 〜 tasi- - attached to; against
  • įs- 〜 įṣu- - hanging
  • na(ñ)- 〜 nani- - inside
  • kau- 〜 kuvi- - outside
  • viṣ- 〜 vyeṣa- - opposite; somewhere else
  • kami- 〜 kara- - around
  • pri- 〜 prā- - behind
  • mai- 〜 mīram- - in front of
  • vai- 〜 vǣ- - in a corner; bordering; at the limit
  • sāṭ- 〜 ṣlū- - next to; along; on the side of
  • lā(d)- 〜 lo(d)- - in the center of
  • vyā- 〜 veši- - left
  • māha- 〜 mege- - right
  • pid- - facing (positional only)
  • nal- - towards the center; inwards; convergent movement
  • vād- - away from the center; outwards; divergent movement

Motional prefixes

  • be- 〜 ter- - along the surface
  • gala- 〜 hali- - through, across
  • naš- - completely, until the end; NOM: omni-, pan-, entirely
  • vod- - avoiding
  • paṣ- - ahead, beyond; also NOM: further, again, re-
  • sam- - movement to the following place/person/object in a set; NOM: after, post-

Verbal-only prefixes

  • tæ(m)- - inceptive/inchoative
  • raš- - to do something a bit more than needed (ral- or rar- before voiced consonants)
  • yā- - too much
  • iva- - completely, also intensive
  • nare- - applicative (nar- before another prefix, cf. the common form narta- for "to reach"-verbs)
  • min- - transitivizer of intransitive verbs

Other prefixes

  • o- - before, pre-, proto-, preceding (os- before vowels)
  • tail- - multi-, pluri-
  • emib(u)- or tūt(u)- - one, mono-, uni-, homo-
  • lani- - same, fellow
  • vre- - bad
  • demi- - self-

Specific terms

Derivational terms considered "specific" are those mostly found in certain jargons. Some of these are applied directly to a Lällshag root instead of a Chlouvānem one:

Used in politics and/or the arts:

  • -nātra has two main meanings: -ism (as in a doctrine) in a political sense, and -esque in the arts, cf. yaivcārṇātra "communism" (< yaiva "all", cār- "to have"), or lānūṣurṇātra "in the style of writer Naryejūramāvi Lānūṣurah Mæmihomah".
    • -nātryūs (← -nātra-yūs) is the term for a person that follows such a doctrine or style, cf. yaivcārṇātryūs "communist"; lānūṣurṇātryūs "someone whose writing is Lānūṣuraësque".
    • Note that lija and lejīn (lit. "song" and "singer") were formerly alternatives to these. They notably remain in nāɂahilūṃlija "politico-religious doctrine inspired by Great Inquisitor Kælahīmāvi Nāɂahilūma Martayinām; Yunyalīlti religious extremism" and nāɂahilūṃlejīn, as well as in arāmilija "pacifism".

Used for medical terminology:

  • -gulas usually translates "-philia" or "-mania", particularly in medical contexts, e.g. ryukagulas "masochism" from ryuka "pain".
    • -gulašålyē is the related term for someone who has that (thus "-philiac" or "-maniac"), e.g. ryukagulašålyē "masochist".
  • -rauga is a generic term used in medicine for names of illnesses or conditions affecting health, e.g. gåtnirauga "obesity" from gåtnake "to vomit"; skañcrauga "insomnia" from skañcake (to be awake at night).
    • -raugotis is the term for someone affected by a -rauga, e.g. skañcraugotis "insomniac".
  • -ītsun is a rarer alternative to -ræṣka, e.g. vrayobulītsun "asplenia" (vre- (bad) + obula (spleen)), or lagukītsun "paralysis" (the latter with the root of Lällshag gahoke (still)).
    • -ītsunis is the corresponding term for affected organisms, e.g. vrayobulītsunis "aspleniac", lagukītsunis "paralyzed".
  • -måkṣan is used for inflammatory diseases, cf. "-itis", like ṇīṭmåkṣan (dermatitis) or āḍhyāsnūlimåkṣan (meningitis).

Compounding

  • tarlā (knowledge) is used as the head element of compounds, with a meaning like -logy in English. Sometimes the meaning is only abstracted (see second example) or has changed with time (see third example):
    • babhrām (land) → babhrātarlā (geography)
    • smoḍ- (to count, to enumerate) → smoṇḍarlā (mathematics)
    • ladragyalah (inn) → ladragyaltarlā (economics)

See also

Notes

  1. ^ These are the remnants of a former gender system present in Proto-Lahob, still evident in other Lahob languages; unlike others in the family, Chlouvānem did not become genderless because of losing gender marking on nouns, but because it lost concordance anywhere else.
  2. ^ The word latiryai is the plural of latirē (wave, ray), but this compound does not have a singular form.
  3. ^ This is due to many honorific formulae being quite long - for example, the standard honorific formula when talking to an Inquisitor is (lallāmaha) [matronymic] yamei murkadhāna [given name] lāma.
  4. ^ With cousins, whether the informal or the given name is used depends on how close they are; with first cousins using the informal name is nearly universal, while with farther cousins the given name may be more common.
  5. ^ Many head monks have their own unique titles based on their monastery. For example the head monk of the Vādhaṃšvāti Lake Monastery is not referred as […] hurdagīn lāma vādhaṃšvāti ga gūltayi but as […] laliājuniāmiti jāṇi camilālta lāma, literally "Great Guardian of the Field of the Night Bloom".
  6. ^ e.g. sorami, grāṇami
  7. ^ nęlte has the stem nęlc- wherever pāmvi has -vy-, i.e. accusatives pāmvyu, nęlcu.
  8. ^ chīka has the stem chīcæ- before consonants.
  9. ^ nęlte has the form nęlci.
  10. ^ Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjaiṭa.
  11. ^ Synchronically, this analysis is correct; however, this word was likely first crafted as a tatpuruṣa, i.e. "a fire for food" (yųlgis nali javyāh), before kitchens were rooms.
  12. ^ Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.
  13. ^ Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.
  14. ^ As for all living things, being Calémere a different planet, the given translation is the one of the closest equivalent on Earth.
  15. ^ Ex.: dṝdaveyute "I repetitively do" vs. dṝdaviyaute "I repetitively did"
  16. ^ The verb "to happen" does not exist as an iterative.
  17. ^ Rain, specifically, is more commonly used as the subject of the verb buñjñake, meaning "to run" for water (in Chl. rain runs just like a river does).
  18. ^ The word pṛšcām alone is almost never used in contemporary Chlouvānem.